Moving You Forward

Transcription

Moving You Forward

M o v i n g Yo u F o r w a rd
2 015 P R O D U C T C ATA L O G
MESSAGE
F R O M TH E P R E S I D E N T
We deliver remarkably easy solutions to help health
care providers like you meet the needs of the entire
orthopedic episode. This is the driving force behind
what we do, what we stand for, and our unwavering
commitment to solution-driven patient care. We
continue to be a leading national provider of highvalue sports medicine, rehabilitative orthopedic
products and related services.
In October 2014, we announced the merger between
Breg and United Orthopedic Group, whose whollyowned subsidiaries include Bledsoe, Cothera and
Viscent. The new company will be called Breg, and
we couldn’t be more excited to share our expanded
capabilities with you and your patients, building upon
the quality and innovation that are synonymous with
our collective offerings.
Brad Lee, President and CEO
We are bringing together the best of both companies—the best capabilities, services, products, customer
relationships, technology and Breg’s 360° customer care. Our plan is to integrate our companies over a
short period of time, with minimal disruption to you and your patients, while providing the benefits that the
combined organization has to offer.
From pioneering cold therapy and dynamic bracing solutions, to our award-winning Vision and Cloud Connect
software applications, we will continue to offer solutions that make life easier for you and your patients. We are
committed to providing you with the same high level of service that you have come to expect from Bledsoe
and Breg. In the meantime, please contact your Sales Representative or Customer Care for either Bledsoe or
Breg with any questions.
Sincerely,
Brad Lee, President and CEO
Developing and manufacturing
industry-leading bracing products for
more than 30 years. These products
have reached patients spanning
six continents and 24 time zones.
Manufactures and distributes products
designed to improve and promote the
recovery phase of post-operative treatment,
including cold therapy and deep vein
thrombosis products.
Provides orthopedic providers an
extensive network of local billing
services across the U.S.
Fre qu e nt ly A s k ed Q uest io ns
“How to Order” and other important notes on our 2015 catalog:
In this 2015 catalog, we are excited to be including both Breg and Bledsoe products.
We are committed to making this process as seamless as possible. Here are some
frequently asked questions about the ordering process.
How can I tell which products are Bledsoe in the catalog?
When you see this logo by product listings it indicates that it’s a Bledsoe product and
you will need to call the Bledsoe Customer Care team (1-888-253-3763) to order until the
integration process is complete.
Will I need an account number at both Breg and Bledsoe to order products from both
companies?
Yes, you will need an account number at both companies. To set up a Bledsoe account, please
contact Bledsoe customer care and provide your Breg account number along with all billing
and shipping information. Bledsoe will match the credit terms and vice versa.
What happens if I am ordering both Breg and Bledsoe products?
If you have products that you are ordering from both Breg and Bledsoe, you will need to place
two separate orders. For your convenience, calls can be transferred from one Customer Care
team to the other to aid in placing orders. As the integration process is completed, we expect
this to change.
Will I have two different order numbers and use separate account numbers when I place
an order?
Yes. If you order product from Breg and Bledsoe Customer Care teams, you will have a
separate order number for Breg products and a separate order number for Bledsoe products.
You will need to use your existing account number for Breg products and your existing account
number for Bledsoe products.
Will I have two different shipping charges?
Yes, you will pay for shipping for the Breg products and a separate shipping charge for the
Bledsoe products.
Why are some part numbers changing?
Breg has added a wide variety of new products due to company acquisitions. As we continue
through the integration process, there will be changes to some product part numbers. For
those products affected, we have added a note in the description. At the back of the catalog,
we have created a quick reference part number chart for your review; however, the Breg
Customer Care team can help you through this process.
69
Table of Cont ent s
COLD THERAPY PAGE 5
KNEE BRACING PAGE 15
Post-Op Knee............................................................................................... 17
Knee Ligament Bracing................................................................................ 29
Osteoarthritis Knee Bracing........................................................................ 41
Soft Knee Bracing......................................................................................... 53
Patellofemoral Bracing................................................................................. 63
HIP BRACING PAGE 77
WALKER / ANKLE / FOOT BRACING PAGE 83
Walking Boots............................................................................................... 85
Ankle Bracing................................................................................................ 98
Foot Supports............................................................................................. 108
SPINE BRACING PAGE 115
Lower Spine................................................................................................ 117
Upper Spine................................................................................................ 137
SHOULDER BRACING
PAGE 145
ELBOW / WRIST BRACING PAGE 161
P E D I AT R I C S PAGE 181
SPLINTS & FRACTURE MANAGEMENT PAGE 191
CRUTCHES, CANES & WALKERS PAGE 205
HOME THERAPY & MISC. PAGE 209
BUSINESS SOLUTIONS PAGE 217
CUSTOM LOGO / BREG STORE PAGE 221
195
MARKET LEADER
Breg is the market leader in motorized cold therapy. We focus
on designing innovative pain management products that help
patients recover from injury, trauma or surgery to comfortably
move forward.
Therapy
Cold
Polar Care Kodiak
shown
What a difference a
BRACE MAKES
The Freestyle OA has changed my life.
Skip Bath looks fondly at his Freestyle OA knee braces and says
they are responsible for his metamorphosis. Diagnosed with ‘significant
arthritis’ in both knees, Skip noticed that his activity level rapidly declined due
to his debilitating condition. “There was a point where I couldn’t walk without
assistance,” he said. “I used the shopping cart as my walker when I’d go to the
store.”
Freestyle™ OA Knee Brace
Over the course of a little more than a year, and with the aid of his knee braces, Skip was able to return to the
activities he loved; and in the process, he lost an incredible 175 lbs. Most recently, he even caught himself
running a bit. “I was at a wedding and ran across the grass to catch a child. I surprised myself—it was the first
time I’ve ran in about 7 or 8 years.
“The Freestyle OA has changed my life—from being reclusive to the outgoing guy I used to be. It’s given me
back that freedom—that courage. I’m back doing yoga, I’m comfortable going to the mall—all the things I’d
stopped doing, I can now do. I can go for my routine walks and actually enjoy myself.”
Empowering people to return to their active lifestyles: that’s part of Breg 360° Customer Care.
Visit www.breg.com, or call 800-897-BREG (2734).
©2014 Breg, Inc. All rights reserved.
Freestyle is a trademark of Breg, Inc. No fee was paid for this testimonial.
BREG STORY
Skip Bath
Co l d Ther a p07
y
Part # Description
Polar Care® Kodiak®
The Polar Care Kodiak Cold Therapy System is the most convenient and versatile offering
in Breg’s Polar Care line. Its easy to use, compact design makes it great for clinic, hospital,
and home use. With the addition of a little ice and water, your patients will enjoy 6-8 hours of
effortless cold therapy. Offering the only battery powered option on the market, Breg ensures
your patients can enjoy the benefits of cold therapy from anywhere: on the sidelines or in the
backyard; the Kodiak is a reliable companion. Each battery pack comes with 4 replaceable
AA batteries ready to power 10-14 hours of motorized cold therapy. Proper use requires an
insulation barrier between the Intelli-Flo pad and the patient’s skin.
Common Examples of Use
• Post-operative
• Arthroscopic procedures
• Reconstructive procedures
• Plastic surgery
• General surgery
• Post trauma
• Chronic pain
• Physical therapy
Features
• Physicians and patients benefit from reduced pain and
swelling—follow-up visits focus on recovery, rather than
pain management
• Whisper-quiet pump technology allows patients to rest and recover in comfort
• Durable, powerful construction provides peace of mind
• Battery Pack option for patients on the go
• Intelli-Flo Pad technology meets the unique demands
of the treatment area with fine tuned temperature
control
10601
Polar Care Kodiak*
Kodiak Combo Units
(includes Kodiak and 1 single-patient use pad)
10602
PC Kodiak with Intelli-Flo
Multi-Use Pad
Intelli-Flo Multi-Use, Sterile
10630
Polar Dressing
10603
PC Kodiak with Intelli-Flo Multi-
Use, Long Stem Pad (16” long)
10630
Polar Dressing
10604
Knee Pad
10630
Polar Dressing
10605
PC Kodiak with Intelli-Flo Knee, Compression Pad
10630
Polar Dressing
10606
Shoulder Pad
10630
Polar Dressing
PC Kodiak with Intelli-Flo XL
10607
Shoulder Pad
10650
Intelli-Flo XL Shoulder, Sterile Polar Dressing
10608
Ankle Pad
10640
Intelli-Flo Ankle, Sterile Polar Dressing
10609
PC Kodiak with Intelli-Flo Ankle, Compression Pad
10640
10611
Back Pad
09810
Intelli-Flo Back, Sterile Polar Dressing
10621
PC Kodiak with Intelli-Flo Hip
Pad
Intelli-Flo Hip, Sterile Polar 10680
Dressing
Note: Matching Polar Dressing listed under
each combo unit.
Bulk 6-Packs
Polar Care Kodiak Battery Pack (optional)
28027
28028
28029
28030
28031
PC Kodiak, Bulk 6-Pack
PC Kodiak Combo, Intelli-Flo
Multi-Use, Bulk 6-Pack
Knee, Bulk 6-Pack
Knee Compression, Bulk 6-Pack
Shoulder, Bulk 6-Pack
97050
10698
10699
10670
10690
71647
Kodiak Battery Pack
Replacement Power Supply
Intelli-Flo Pad Y Adaptor
Intelli-Flo Pad Compression Strap (60” long)
Intelli-Flo Hip Pad Strap
Replacement Kit
PC Hanger
Accessories
* Contact customer care for CE Marking
international part numbers.
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
07
70
C ol d T hera p y
Part # Description
Intelli-Flo Pads
10240
Intelli-Flo Pad, Multi-Use
10630
Polar Dressing
10245
Intelli-Flo Pad, Multi-Use,
Long Stem (16” long)
10630
Polar Dressing
10230
Intelli-Flo Pad, Knee
10630
Polar Dressing
10235
Intelli-Flo Pad, Knee,
Compression
10630
Polar Dressing
10220
Intelli-Flo Pad, Shoulder
10630
Polar Dressing
10225
Intelli-Flo Pad, XL Shoulder
10650
Intelli-Flo XL Shoulder, Sterile Polar Dressing
10210
Intelli-Flo, Ankle*
10640
10211
Intelli-Flo, Small Ankle*
02508
Intelli-Flo Small Ankle, Sterile Polar Dressing
10250
Intelli-Flo Pad, Back
09810
Intelli-Flo Back, Sterile Polar Dressing
10280
Intelli-Flo Pad, Hip
Intelli-Flo Hip, Sterile Polar 10680
Dressing
10260
Intelli-Flo Pad, Hand / Wrist*
02508
Intelli-Flo Small Ankle, Sterile Polar Dressing
10205
Intelli-Flo Pad 3x5*
Intelli-Flo 3x5, Sterile
10660
Polar Dressing
Intelli-Flo® Pads
These revolutionary pads offer hassle-free temperature regulation specific to each treatment
area, allowing for consistent cold delivery. The ergonomic design provides exceptional
coverage, static compression, and patient comfort. Intelli-Flo Pads are compatible with Polar
Care Kodiak only. Proper use requires an insulation barrier between the Intelli-Flo Pads and
the patient’s skin. The water impermeable Sterile Polar Dressings offered by Breg provide an
appropriate and complete barrier between the pad and the patient’s skin.
Intelli-Flo Multi-Use Pad
(13.5” x 14.25”)
Intelli-Flo Knee Pad
(13.5 “ x 14”)
Intelli-Flo Shoulder Pad
(13.5” x 14”)
X-Large (13” x 21”)
Intelli-Flo Ankle Pad
(12.75” x 18.5”)
Small (8.25” x 9.75”)
Contact customer care for CE Marking
international part numbers.
* Sterile Dressing included
each Intelli-Flo Pad.
Intelli-Flo Back Pad
(8.25” x 11.25”)
69
08
Intelli-Flo Hip Pad
(13” x 20”)
Intelli-Flo Hand / Wrist Pad
(8.25” x 9.75”)
Shown on Ankle
Shown on Hand
Shown on Foot
Intelli-Flo 3x5 Pad
Intelli-Flo 3x5 Pad
Intelli-Flo 3x5 Pad
(3” x 5”)
(3” x 5”)
(3” x 5”)
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Co l d Ther a p y
Polar Care Cube™
The Polar Care Cube Cold Therapy System is simple and reliable. Its easy to use, compact
design makes it great for clinic, hospital, and home use. With the addition of ice and water, your
patients will enjoy 6-8 hours of effortless cold therapy. Proper use requires an insulation barrier
between the pad and the patient’s skin.
• Post-operative
• Plastic surgery
• General surgery
• Post trauma
• Chronic pain
Features
pain management
• Whisper-quiet pump technology allows patients to rest
and recover in comfort
• Durable, powerful construction provides peace of mind
• Broad selection of premium WrapOn Pads conform to
the affected area
Part # Description
10701
Polar Care Cube
PC Cube Combo Units – PC Cube with
WrapOn pad (includes Cube & 1 singlepatient use pad)
10705
PC Cube with WrapOn Knee
Pad
04708
Polar Dressing, Knee L / XL
10706
PC Cube with WrapOn L
Knee Pad
04908
10707
PC Cube with WrapOn XL
Knee Pad
04908
10708
PC Cube with WrapOn
Ankle Pad
02508
Polar Dressing, Ankle
10709
PC Cube with WrapOn
Multi-Use XL pad with
Long Stem (16” Long)
02344
Polar Dressing, XL Multi-Use
10710
Multi-Use pad
02344
10711
PC Cube with WrapOn
Shoulder pad
04908
10712
Shoulder pad
04918
Polar Dressing, XL Shoulder
10713
PC Cube with WrapOn Hip Pad
Polar Dressing, Hip
10680
each combo unit.
PC Cube Combo Units – PC Cube with
Polar pad (includes Cube & 1 singlepatient use pad)
10703
02328
10704
02348
Knee / Shoulder Combo
Polar Dressing, Knee Multi-Use XL Combo
Polar Dressing, Multi-Use
Bulk Packs:
28600 Polar Care Cube, 4-Pack
28601 PC Cube Combo, WrapOn
XL Multi-Use, 4-Pack
Knee, 4-Pack
Shoulder, 4-Pack
Accessories:
10698
10670
Compression strap (60” long)
07640
PC Y Adaptor
71647
PC Hanger
09915
4ft Extension Tube
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
09
70
C ol d T hera p y
Part # Description
10901
Polar Care Glacier
PC Glacier Combo Units – PC Glacier
with WrapOn Pad (includes Glacier and
1 single-patient use pad)
10903
PC Glacier with Knee / Shoulder Pad
Polar Dressing, Knee / Shoulder
02328
PC Glacier with Multi-Use Pad
10904
02348
10905
PC Glacier with WrapOn
Knee Pad
04708
Polar Dressing, Knee L
10906
Knee Large Pad
04908
Polar Dressing, Shoulder L
10907
Knee XL Pad
04908
10908
Multi-Use XL Pad
02344
10909
Multi-Use XL Pad with Long
Stem
02344
10911
Shoulder Pad
04908
10912
Shoulder XL Pad
Polar Dressing, XL Shoulder
04918
10913
Ankle Pad
02508
10914
Hip Pad
04708
Polar Care Glacier™
The Polar Care Glacier Cold Therapy System balances the needs of the patient and the clinician.
Its easy-to-use, feature-rich design makes it a great choice for hospital use. With the addition
of ice and water, your patients will enjoy up to 13 hours of cold therapy according to their own
comfort level. Proper use requires an insulation barrier between the pad and the patient’s skin.
• Post-operative
• Plastic surgery
• General surgery
• Post trauma
• Chronic pain
Features
• Once-a-shift fill requirement increases a hospital’s
efficiency - 8hr shifts? 12hr shifts? The Glacier has them
covered
pain management
• Whisper-quiet pump technology allows patients to rest
and recover in comfort
• Temperature control dial allows physicians to
individualize protocols
the affected area
Note: Matching Polar Dressing listed
under each WrapOn Pad. Body part
indicated for Polar Dressing may or
may not correlate with body part in pad
name, but the sizes have been paired
appropriately.
Accessories
10698
10670
Compression strap (60” long)
PC Y Adaptor
07640
09915
4ft Extension Tube
Knee pad dressing is recommended for hip.
Shoulder is recommended for XL Knee.
69
10
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Co l d Ther a p y
Part # Description
Polar Care Cub
The manually powered Polar Care Cub Cold Therapy System is a simple and cost-effective
solution for patients and practitioners looking for an effective alternative to rudimentary ice
therapy methods. The Cub uses a manually powered hand pump to deliver cold therapy to the
treatment area. With the addition of ice and water, hours of pain relief are just a few squeezes of
the pump away.
• Post-operative
• Plastic surgery
• General surgery
• Post trauma
• Chronic pain
Features
pain management
• Small, lightweight, manually powered design ensures
the Cub can go anywhere it’s needed—on the sidelines,
or in the backyard
• Simple, hand-powered design is intuitive
the affected area
04009
Polar Care Cub
Polar Care Cub Combo Units – PC Cub
with WrapOn pad (includes Cub & 1
single-patient use pad)
04690
02344
04740
09810
04600
04708
11040
04908
PC Cub with WrapOn XL
Multi-Use pad
PC Cub with WrapOn XL
Multi-Use pad
Polar Dressing, Back
PC Cub with WrapOn
Knee pad
PC Cub with WrapOn Shoulder pad (universal)
each combo unit.
Accessories
04010 PC Cub Pump Assembly
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
11
70
C ol d T hera p y
Part # Description
WrapOn Pads
04790 WrapOn Pad, XL Multi-Use
02344
04740
WrapOn Pad, XL Multi-Use
02344 Polar dressing, XL Multi-Use
04700
WrapOn Pad, Knee
04708
04703
WrapOn Pad, Large Knee
04708
04705
WrapOn Pad, XL Knee
04908
04900
WrapOn Pad, Shoulder *
(Universal)
04908
04903
WrapOn Pad, Shoulder,
w/ Extra Long Straps
(9”, 12” and 29” long)
04908
WrapOn Pad, XL Shoulder
04905
(Universal)
Polar Dressing, XL Shoulder 04918
04750
WrapOn Pad, Hip
04708
WrapOn Pad, Ankle
04730
02508
WrapOn Polar Pad, Back*
09800
09810
WrapOn Polar Pad, Back w/
09805
Long Straps (17.5”x 5” Strap)
09810
WrapOn Polar Pad, Hand / Wrist
10750
Polar Dressing
02508
WrapOn Polar Pads
The WrapOn Pads’ ergonomic design provides exceptional coverage and patient comfort.
Elastic straps offer static compression while holding the pad firmly in place. WrapOn Pads may
be used with the Polar Care Glacier, Cube, and Cub only. Proper use requires an insulation
barrier between the pad and the patient’s skin. The water impermeable Sterile Polar Dressings
offered by Breg provide a complete barrier between the pad and the patient’s skin.
Multi-Use XL WrapOn Pad
Knee WrapOn Pad
(11.25” x 11.25”)
(10.25” x 11.25”)
(10.25” x 11.5”)
Large (11.5” x 12”) XL (12.25” x 19”)
X-Large (13” x 21.5”) (10” x 11.75”)
Shoulder WrapOn Pad
Note: Matching Polar Dressing listed
under each WrapOn Pad. Body part
indicated for Polar Dressing may or
may not correlate with body part in pad
name, but the sizes have been paired
appropriately.
* (Must be combined with Back Brace
PN 1015X or 0733X)
Knee pad dressing is recommended for hip.
Shoulder is recommended for XL Knee.
WrapOn Hip Pad
(11.5” x 12”)
69
12
Ankle WrapOn Pad
(8.25” x 9.75”)
Back WrapOn Pad
Hand / Wrist WrapOn Pad
(9.5” x 11”)
(8.5” x 9.75”)
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Co l d Ther a p y
Polar Pads
Polar Pads’ ergonomic design provides exceptional coverage and patient comfort. The sterile
versions provide flexibility according to the physician’s protocol. Polar Pads may be used with
the Polar Care Glacier, Cube, and Cub only. Proper use requires an insulation barrier between
the pad and the patient’s skin.
Multi-Use Polar Pad
Multi-Use Polar Pad XL
(9.75” x 11.25”)
(11.5” x 11.75”)
Rectangle Polar Pad
Small (4.5” x 10.75”)
Large (10” x 14.25”)
Part # Description
02340
Polar Pad, Multi-Use
02348
02480
Polar Pad, Multi-Use, Long Stem
02348
02346
Polar Pad, XL Multi-Use
02344
02486
Polar Pad, XL Multi-Use,
Long Stem
02344
02400
Polar Pad, Small Rectangle
02428
Polar Dressing, Rectangle
02420
Polar Pad, Large Rectangle
02428
02520
Polar Pad, Large Rectangle,
02428
02320
Polar Pad, Knee, Knee /
Shoulder
Polar Dressing, Knee / Shoulder
02328
Polar Pad, Ankle
02500
02508
Polar Pad, Back
09900
09810
Polar Pad, Eye Mask*
02380
02388
Polar Dressing, Eye Mask
Polar Pad, TMJ
02460
02468
Polar Dressing, TMJ
each Polar Pad.
* Dressing is included
Knee / Shoulder Polar Pad
(9.75” x 11.25”)
Ankle Polar Pad
(8.25” x 9.75”)
Eye Mask Polar Pad
TMJ Polar Pad
(4.25” x 9”)
(4.25” x 16”)
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Back Polar Pad
(6.25” x 11.25”)
13
70
C ol d T hera p y
Part # Description
02873
02874
02875
02876
02877
02878
02879
02880
02881
02882
02883
02884
02885
02887
Gel Wrap Knee
Gel Wrap Knee, 2-pack
Gel Wrap Knee, 4-pack
Gel Wrap Shoulder
Gel Wrap Shoulder, 2-pack
Gel Wrap Shoulder, 4-pack
Gel Wrap Hip
Gel Wrap Hip, 2-pack
Gel Wrap Hip, 4-pack
Gel Wrap Ankle
Gel Wrap Ankle, 2-pack
Gel Wrap Ankle, 4-pack
Gel Pack Single
Gel Wrap Patient Bag
Polar Care Packs
Breg’s new Polar Care Pack line is a complete line of gel pack products with wraps for the ankle,
knee, hip, and shoulder. The premium gel packs are vacuum packed, so the gel stays evenly
distributed and pliable at standard freezer temperatures. These unique gel packs are specifically
formulated to provide cold therapy for more than 2 hours. Each wrap features elastic straps that
provide static compression while holding the gel packs firmly in place. Kits come packaged in
a drawstring patient bag with a body-part specific wrap and the option of 2 or 4 premium gel
packs. All kitted items are sold individually. The Polar Care Pack line is an excellent addition to
your motorized cold therapy protocol.
Knee Wrap
Hip Wrap
69
14
Shoulder Wrap
Gel Pack with Bag
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Ankle Wrap
Two Gel Packs
Bracing
Knee
DUO knee brace
shown
Designed for your
LIFESTYLE
Indira Velasquez and friend
Wearing a brace for 18 months is no easy feat.
To make the most of her bracing experience, Indira Velasquez chose to customize the color of her
Bledsoe™ Z-12 brace. Not only did her brace provide comfort to her osteoarthritic knee, but it also became a
fashion staple as part of her everyday wear.
“Pink and green became my favorite colors for new clothing,” said Indira. “I could have worn the brace
under long pants, but I liked to show it off.” Strangers were eager to stop Indira to comment on what a
colorful brace she was sporting. Indira’s Z-12 proved to be not only fashionable but functional as well.
“I am very active and wore the brace to cut the lawn, shovel snow, and clear my yard of leaves. I went to the
local gym two to three times per week and attended spin class, weight lifting, kickboxing, kettlebells, and
some aerobics classes. It was tough on my knee, but I knew I had to keep my body strong ,” said Indira. “The
brace was very, very helpful.”
Functional solutions for everyday use: that’s part of Breg 360° Customer Care.
©2014 Breg, Inc. All rights reserved. Z-12 is a trademark of Bledsoe Brace Systems.
No fee was paid for the use of this testimonial.
BREG STORY
Indira Velasquez
Pos t- O p K nee B r a c i ng
T Scope® Premier Post-Op Knee Brace
The Breg T Scope Premier Post-Op knee brace delivers a patient centric design to provide
unprecedented comfort, simplicity, and support during post-operative knee rehabilitation.
The brace is designed to provide protected, controlled range-of-motion (ROM) for patients
recovering from knee surgery or those who have knee injuries or instabilities. It’s based on the
same innovative telescoping design of the original T Scope, which medical professionals have
used for years.
• Locked or limited motion control
• Post-op rehabilitation
• Soft tissue injuries of the knee
• ACL, PCL, MCL, LCL repairs / injuries
• Tibial plateau fractures
• Osteochondral repairs
• Meniscal repairs
• Patella tendon repairs
• Condylar fractures
• Sprains / strains of the knee
• HTOs (High Tibial Osteotomy)
• Stable or internally fixed fractures of the knee
Part # Description
08814 08815 08816 73621 T Scope Premier
17” – 27”, fits up to a 30.5” thigh,
universal Right or Left
T Scope Premier, XL
17” – 27”, fits up to a 35.5” thigh,
universal Right or Left
T Scope Premier, Full Foam, XL
17” – 27”, fits up to a 35.5” thigh, universal Right or Left
Bridgetech Incision Pad
CE Marking
Features
• Easy-to-use ROM hinge with quick-adjusting flexion /
extension stops to control and limit knee flexion and
extension
• Telescoping calf and thigh sleeves for sizing a wide
range of patients from 5’ to 6’4’’ tall (brace extends
from 17” to 27”)
• BridgeTech Incision pad relieves pressure and provides added comfort around the incision site
(optional accessory)
• Comfortable padding throughout the brace, designed with patient compliance in mind
• Brace is lightweight, weighing less than 35 oz (standard version)
• Accommodates both right and left leg procedures, reducing the need to stock additional
products
69
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
17
Po st -O p K n ee B r a c ing
Part #
EK061000
EK061010
EK061002
Description
G3, Cool, Universal
G3, Full Foam, Universal
G3, Cool, Open Cell Foam
Pads, Universal
G3
Post-operative brace with convenient slide tabs for easy adjustment. Universal sizing to
accommodate a wide variety of patients. The adjustable paddles on the G3 brace allow the
clinician to adjust the position where the straps capture the leg. Having the ability to adjust
strap positions improves patient comfort by allowing the straps to be adjusted away from
incision sites.
Features
G3 Cool
Part #
Description
EK061001 G3 XL Extended, Cool,
Universal
EK061003 G3 XL Extended, Cool, Open
Cell Foam Pads, Universal
• One size adjusts from 18” to 26” (46 – 66 cm) in half
inch increments
• Anti-migration gastroc strap
• Full range-of-motion hinge adjustable from -10° to 110°
• Full foam and cool versions
• Extends to malleolus with double-padded ankle plate
for maximum suspension
• Straps are adjustable to accommodate surgical
incision site
G3 XL Extended
The G3 XL Extended has similar features as the G3 with an additional 2” (5 cm) in length and
with 4” (10 cm) longer straps. The brace is designed with an anatomically correct malleolus plate
to better contour to the ankle for brace suspension. Universal sizing accommodates a wide
variety of patients.
Features
G3 XL
Extended
18
• Range of motion hinge from -10° to 110° with 10°
increments
• Adjustable straps to accommodate surgical incision
sites
• Contoured malleolar plate for patient comfort around
the ankle
• Anti-migration gastroc strap
• Quick release buckles for ease of application
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Pos t- O p Kn ee B r a c i ng
Fusion
/ Fusion
OA BRACE
SIZING CHART
Shoe Insert
Sizing
Chart
Extender Plus and Extender
Adjusts from 22” – 30” (56 – 76 cm) and accommodates circumference up to 34” (86 cm).
Available options include cuffs or a short version which adjusts from 18” – 26” (46 – 66 cm).
• Shoe insert is indicated when support or immobilization
of the foot / ankle is needed
Shown with Optional
Shoe Insert
Size #
Size
Men’s
Women’s
Euro XX = 03
S
Up to 4
Up to 5
Up to 34.5
XX = 05
M
5 – 9
6 – 10
35 – 41
XX = 09
L
10 – 14
11 – 15
41.5 – 47.5
Part #
Description
EK087000 Extender Plus
EK088000 Extender Plus, w/ Cuffs
EK009000 Extender Plus, Short
EK0071XX Extender Plus Shoe Insert,
Left
EK0072XX Extender Plus Shoe Insert,
Right
XX = See size chart above
CE Marking
Features
• Versatile and quick application with push button length
adjustment
• Ankle plate flared out for comfort
• Quick release buckles
• Optional shoe insert
Part #
Description
SK587000 Extender w/ Quicklock
SK587010 Extender w/ Shear Force
Straps and Quicklock
SM0071XX Extender Shoe Insert,
Left
SM0072XX Extender Shoe Insert,
Right
CE Marking
Shown with Optional
Shoe Insert
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
19
07st -O p K nee BKnee
Po
r a c ingBra c ing
Recover Knee Brace
Size #
Size
Thigh Circumference
X=1 XS 12” – 15” (30 - 38 cm)
X=2 S
15” – 18” (38 - 46 cm)
X=3 M
18” – 21” (46 - 53 cm)
X=4 L
21” – 24” (53 - 61 cm)
X=5
XL
24” – 27” (61 - 69 cm)
X=6 XXL 27” – 30” (69 - 79 cm)
Circumference taken 6” (15 cm) above mid patella.
Recover Knee Brace
The Recover Knee brace combines the low profile nature of a hinged ligament knee brace with
the functionality of a post-operative brace. This product is available in wraparound style in both
long and short lengths. The wraparound design allows patients to apply the brace with ease and
with the options of Airmesh® or Neoprene, patients can choose the material that best meets
their needs. The Recover Knee brace utilizes the patented T Scope user-friendly hinge, which
offers range of motion control of the knee with simple, quick adjustments. The universal design
accommodates both right and left leg procedures. The Recover Knee brace combines ease of
use, comfort, and functionality all in one brace.
Part # Description
0036X
Recover knee brace, Long, Neoprene
0038X
Recover knee brace, Long,
Airmesh
0037X
Recover knee brace, Short, Neoprene
Recover knee brace, Short,
0039X
Airmesh
X = See size chart above
CE Marking
Features
• T Scope hinge offers extension adjustability between -10° and 70°, while flexion may be
adjusted between -10° and 120°
• Easy to use extension drop lock allows the brace to be locked out in 5 positions (in -10°, 0°,
10°, 20°, and 30°) of knee extension with the push of a button
• Wraparound design for easy application
• Universal fit for a right or left leg to reduce inventory
• Open back design to ensure no bunching or pinching of the popliteal crease of the knee
• Available in Airmesh or Neoprene
69
20
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Original Knee Brace
Original Knee
Size #
Nine sizes for optimal fit. Optional right and left posterior and anterior fracture plates.
Features
• Easily converts to KAFO and HKAFO with Bledsoe’s Hi
Top Boot and / or Simple Pelvic Braces
• Fracture plates include femoral, tibial and winged tibial
pieces
Optional Shoe
Insert
Size
Leg Length
ZZ = 18 18” (46 cm)
17 – 19”
(43 – 48 cm)
ZZ = 20 20” (51 cm)
19 – 21” (48 – 53 cm)
ZZ = 22 22” (56 cm)
21 – 23”
(53 – 58 cm)
ZZ = 24 24” (61 cm)
23 – 25”
(58 – 63 cm)
ZZ = 26 26” (66 cm)
25 – 27”
(63 – 68 cm)
ZZ = 28 28” (71 cm)
27 – 29”
(68 – 74 cm)
ZZ = 30 30” (76 cm)
29 – 31”
(74 – 79 cm)
ZZ = 32 32” (81 cm)
31 – 33”
(79 – 83 cm)
ZZ = 34 34” (86 cm)
33 – 35”
(83 – 89 cm)
Part #
EK0200ZZ
AK0100ZZBB
AK5200ZZBB
AJ0051XX-B
AJ0052XX-B
AL0041XX-B
AL0042XX-B
AL0051XX-B
AL0052XX-B
AM0051XX-B
AM0052XX-B
Description
Original w/ Standard
Hinge, 18”-34”
Original w/ Multi-Centric
Hinge, 18”-34”
Original w/ Simple Hinge
and Quicklock, 18”-34”
Femoral Plate, Left
Femoral Plate, Right
Winged Tibial Plate, Left
Winged Tibial Plate, Right
Tibial Plate, Left
Tibial Plate, Right
Original Shoe Insert, Left
Original Shoe Insert, Right
ZZ = See size chart above
Y: Left (1), Right (2)
XX= S (03), M (05), L (07)
Revolution 3
Economy post-operative brace with patient-friendly adjustment tabs. Available in two adjustable
sizes.
Features
• Full range-of-motion hinge adjustable from -10° to 110°
Original Shoe Insert Sizing Chart
Size #
Size Men’s
Women’s
EURO
XX = 03 S
Up to 4
Up to 5
Up to 34.5
XX = 05 M
5 – 9
6 – 10
35 – 41
XX = 09 L
10 – 14
11 – 15
41.5 – 47.5
CE Marking
Revolution 3 Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Leg Length
XX=03
Short
18”-22” (46-56 cm)
XX=05
Long
24”-28” (61-71 cm)
Part #
EK0190XX
EK1195XX
Description
Revolution 3
Revolution 3, Full Foam
Revolution 3
Short
Revolution 3
Full Foam
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
21
70
K n e e Br a c i ng
Post-Op
Size Thigh Circumference
Short
<32” inseam
Long
>32” inseam
XL
27” – 35” thigh circumference
Post-Op Knee Brace
The upper and lower hinge bars on the Post-Op can be easily contoured or shortened for an
optimized fit, and the foam may be trimmed to suit smaller patients. Universally sized for left and
right for easy stocking.
Part # Description
00112
00113
00114
00115
73620
Post-Op, Short
Post-Op, Short, XL
Post-Op, Long
Post-Op, Long, XL
Post-Op Breakdown Kit
(Available at no charge)
CE Marking
Features
• Full foam for compression and warmth
• Spring loaded flexion / extension stops for easy range
of motion from 0° – 120°
• Ability to lock out in full extension
• Scored anodized bars break down to post-op rehab
length
• Quick Lock offers ability to lock out brace from -10° to
30° (with increments of 10°)
Part # Description
00116
00117
00118
00119
Post-Op Lite, Short
Post-Op Lite, Short, XL
Post-Op Lite, Long
Post-Op Lite, Long, XL
CE Marking
Post-Op Lite Knee Brace
The Post-Op Lite offers the same function as our regular Post-Op, but with reduced foam
coverage for greater breathability and comfort.
Features
• Reduced foam for warmer climates
of motion from 0º – 120º
• Scored anodized bars break down to post-op rehab
length
• Quick lock offers ability to lock out brace from -10° to
30° (with increments of 10°)
69
22
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Post-Op Rehab Knee Brace
The Post-Op Rehab is a shortened version of the Post-Op brace, measuring approximately 15”
in overall length.
Part # Description
00123
Post-Op Rehab
CE Marking
Features
• Anodized hinge bars
• Full foam for comfort and tissue containment
Quick-Fit Post-Op Knee Brace
Quick-Fit Post-Op / Quick-Fit
Designed for ease of use, the thigh and calf foam padding are sized to fit the leg without
additional adjustments. The combination of easy to use buckles and hook and loop straps
makes the Quick-Fit one of the easiest post-op braces to apply.
Size #
Size
Thigh Circumference
X = 2
S
14” – 18”
(36 – 46 cm)
X = 3
M
18” – 22”
(46 – 56 cm)
X = 4
L
22” – 27”
(56 – 69 cm)
X = 5
XL
27” – 35” (69 – cm)
Part # Description
0014X
0015X
Quick-Fit Post-Op, Short 22”
Quick-Fit Post-Op, Long 26”
CE Marking
Features
• Full foam for comfort and tissue containment
• Quick-Fit buckles for easy on / off
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
23
70
K n e e Br a c i ng
Merit OR Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Leg Length
XX=01 Short
16”-22” (40-56 cm)
XX=05 Regular
22”-26” (56-66 cm)
XX=07 Long
26” - 30” (66-76 cm)
XX=09 XLong
30”+ (76cm+)
Part #
Merit OR
Optimal suspension strapping configuration. Full foam design with four sizes to fit any patient.
Description
EK0800XX Merit OR
AK5800XXB OR w/ Quicklock
Features
• Four size lengths to fit any patient height
• Available in 16” (41 cm) option for shorter patients
Part # Description
09340
09350
EPO, Short
EPO, Long
EPO Post-Op Knee Brace
The EPO is an economical alternative to our premier Post-Op line. EPOs feature a Quick-Set
hinge providing complete range of motion control.
CE Marking
Features
• Economic alternative to premier Post-Op line
• Quick-Set hinge for range of motion control
Part # Description
09360
09370
EPO Lite, Short
EPO Lite, Long
Note: Short < 32” inseam. Long > 32” inseam.
CE Marking
EPO Lite Post-Op Knee Brace
An economical solution for post-operative indications, the EPO Lite features the Quick-Set hinge
and has reduced foam coverage for greater breathability and comfort.
Features
• Reduced foam for breathability and comfort
69
24
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Quick-Fit Post-Op / Quick-Fit EPO
Quick-Fit EPO Post-Op Knee Brace
The Quick-Fit EPO is pre-sized for ease of application in the OR and recovery room.
Size #
Size
Thigh Circumference
X = 2
S
14” – 18”
(36 – 46 cm)
X = 3
M
18” – 22”
(46 – 56 cm)
X = 4
L
22” – 27”
(56 – 69 cm)
X = 5
XL
27” – 31”
(69 – 79 cm)
Part # Description
0934X
0935X
Quick-Fit EPO, Short
Quick-Fit EPO, Long
CE Marking
Features
Post-Op with Shells Knee Brace
For additional rigidity and stability, the shells enable full circumferential tissue containment. The
polyurethane shells are adjustable and universally sized.
Part # Description
00121
00122
Post-Op w/ Shells, Short 22”
Post-Op w/ Shells, Long 26”
CE Marking
Features
• Full circumferential shells for tissue containment, rigidity
and stability
• Shells can be trimmed to desired size with scissors
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
25
70
Part # Description
120108
120110
120112
120113
120116
120118
120120
120123
120126
120128
Uni-Versatil Knee Immob, 8”
K n e e Br a c i ng
Uni-Versatil Knee Immobilizer
Medial, lateral and posterior aluminum stays provide rigid immobilization.
• Immobilization
• Acute sprains / strains of the knee
Features
• Circumferential strapping provides an adjustable
secure fit
• Available in various lengths
Part # Description
96500
96510
96520
Tri-Panel Knee Immobilizer 16” Length (Universal)
Tri-Panel Knee Immobilizer
Breg’s Tri-Panel Knee Immobilizer is fully adjustable to accommodate varying leg circumferences.
Available in three lengths.
• Immobilization
CE Marking
Features
• Fully adjustable side panels
• Posterior rigid stays for additional support
• One size fits all (up to 25” thigh)
• Easy to use hook and loop straps
Part # Description
96600
Quick Wrap Knee
Immobilizer - 12”
96601
Quick Wrap Knee
Immobilizer - 16”
Quick Wrap Knee
96604
Immobilizer - 18” (extra wide)
Quick Wrap Knee
96602
Immobilizer - 20”
Quick Wrap Knee
96603
Immobilizer - 24”
Quick Wrap Knee Immobilizer
The Quick Wrap Knee Immobilizer is designed for quick application and universal sizing.
• Immobilization
Features
• Compressive elastic straps for added support
• Alternating hook and loop straps for ease of application
• Specifically designed for quick application
• Two moldable stays for medial and lateral placement
and support
• Moveable stays are bendable for contouring to leg
anatomy
• Reinforced posterior stays for extra rigidity
• Universal sizing, extra wide version can accommodate
up to 10” greater leg circumference than the standard
69
26
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Fusion
FusionKnee
OA BRACE
SIZING CHART
Three /Panel
Immobilizer
Size Chart
Three Panel Knee Immobilizer
Classic tri-panel design immobilizes the knee.
• Immobilization
Size#
Size ZZ = 12
12”
ZZ= 18
18”
ZZ= 20
20”
ZZ= 24
24”
Part #
Description
SA6080ZZ Three Panel Knee
Immobilizer
ZZ = See size chart above
Features
• Terry cloth interior for added patient comfort
• Circumference adjusts up to 30” (76 cm) thigh
Part #
Single Panel Knee Immobilizer
Simple single panel design immobilizes the knee.
• Immobilization
Features
• Lightweight, breathable foam
• Circumference adjusts up to 30” (76 cm) thigh
• Elastic straps reduce migration
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
SA607012
SA607014
SA607016
SA607018
SA607020
SA607022
SA607024
SA607922
SA607924
Description
Single Panel Knee
Immobilizer, 12”
Single Panel Knee
Immobilizer, 14”
Single Panel Knee
Immobilizer, 16”
Single Panel Knee
Immobilizer, 18”
Single Panel Knee
Immobilizer, 20”
Single Panel Knee
Immobilizer, 22”
Single Panel Knee
Immobilizer, 24”
Single Panel Knee
Immobilizer, 22” XL
Single Panel Knee
Immobilizer, 24” XL
27
70
INNOVATIVE
One key innovation of our knee bracing is advanced material
selection. The Z-12 (shown at right) is the first brace in the market to
use magnesium alloy. Magnesium braces are lighter than a traditional
aluminum brace, weighing just 14 ounces, yet provide support and
stability for ligament injuries. The brace is designed for patients with
active lifestyles because of the low profile frame just 13” or 15” in
length. See page 34 to view the Z-12.
Bracing
Knee Ligament
Z-12 knee brace
shown
69
To Order: Breg (800) 897-2734 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
K n e e Lig a m ent B ra c ing
Fusion® Technology
Fusion’s sleek frame is made of lightweight, high-strength aluminum, making it
extremely low profile. Fusion braces feature Breg’s proprietary ProForm™ technology,
a strong yet flexible polymer that allows the brace to conform to the shape of the
leg (Figure A, highlighted in blue), resulting in a precise, contoured fit. With proper
strapping the ProForm goes into tension upon valgus load. This allows the brace
to engage sooner, to help resist knee displacement (Figure B). ProForm technology
also helps the brace accommodate the changing axis of the knee, keeping the brace
solidly in place.
Figure A
Figure B
Introducing Improved Comfort and Fit with AirTech® Innovation
AirTech was specifically designed to improve comfort and fit. AirTech is a complete
system of air mesh vents and grooved channel frame pads that increase airflow
throughout the brace. The system allows cool air in and moves warm air and moisture
away from the skin, improving patient comfort. The new pad technology also
improves suspension, reduces pinching and helps alleviate pressure points.
69
30
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
K n e e Ligame nt B r a c i ng
Fusion / Fusion Women’s
Fusion Knee Brace
Fusion provides patients with protection for the ACL, PCL and collateral
ligaments. It’s ideal for normal daily activities as well as athletic
endeavors. This brace is designed using ProForm technology, which
creates a comfortable, precise fit that won’t compromise mobility and
helps to align and support the knee.
• ACL
• PCL
• Collateral ligament protection
• Medial (inside) / Lateral (outside
of the knee) instabilities
Size #
Size
6” Above Mid Patella
6” Below Mid Patella
XX = 10
XS
13” – 15” (33 – 38 cm)
10” – 12”
(25 – 30 cm)
XX = 20
S
15” – 18” (38 – 46 cm)
12” – 14”
(30 – 36 cm)
XX = 30
M
18” – 19.5” (46 – 50 cm)
14” – 15”
(36 – 38 cm)
XX = 35
M+
19.5” – 21” (50 – 53 cm) 15” – 16”
(38 – 41 cm)
XX = 40
L
21” – 24” (53 – 61 cm)
16” – 18”
(41 – 46 cm)
XX = 50
XL
24” – 27” (61 – 69 cm)
18” – 20”
(46 – 51 cm)
XX = 60
XXL
27” – 30” (69 – 76 cm)
20” – 23”
(51 – 58 cm)
Circumference measured 6” (15 cm) above mid patella and 6” (15 cm) below mid patella
Features
• AirTech Frame pads – innovative
windows and channels in the pad permit cooling air
flow while allowing moisture and heat to move away
from the skin
• Pivot Point Strap tabs – pivoting strap tabs allow straps
to contour to the leg for enhanced fit, comfort and
suspension
• ProForm Technology – medial side structure,
redesigned for contoured fit and protection
Part # Description
01209
01207
005XX
007XX
976XX 979XX 984XX 985XX 00521 Fusion Custom Color / Pattern
Fusion Custom
Fusion, Left
Fusion, Right
Refurbish Kit (Thigh), Left*
Refurbish Kit (Thigh), Right*
Refurbish Kit (Calf), Left*
Refurbish Kit (Calf), Right*
Condyle pads (set of 2)
* Kit only includes either thigh frame pads and
thigh straps, or calf frame pads and calf straps.
Condyle pads (pair) can be ordered separately.
CE Marking
Fusion Women’s Knee Brace
Fusion Women’s provides patients with protection for the ACL, PCL and collateral ligaments.
It’s ideal for normal daily activities as well as athletic endeavors. This brace is designed using
ProForm technology, which creates a comfortable, precise fit that won’t compromise mobility
and helps to align and support the knee.
• ACL
• PCL
• Medial (inside) / Lateral (outside of the knee)
instabilities
Features
• AirTech Frame pads – innovative windows and channels
in the pad permit cooling air flow while allowing
moisture and heat to move away from the skin
• Pivot Point Strap tabs – pivoting strap tabs allow straps
to contour to the leg for fit, comfort and suspension
redesigned for contoured fit and protection
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Part # Description
01203
01214
01201
009XX
011XX
980XX 981XX 982XX 983XX 00521 Fusion Women’s Custom,
Argento White
Available in Custom only
Fusion Women’s Custom,
color / pattern
Fusion Women’s Custom
Fusion Women’s, Left
Fusion Women’s, Right
Refurbish Kit (Thigh), Left*
Refurbish Kit (Thigh), Right*
Refurbish Kit (Calf), Left*
Refurbish Kit (Calf), Right*
* Kit only includes either thigh frame pads and
thigh straps, or calf frame pads and calf straps.
Condyle pads (pair) can be ordered separately.
CE Marking
31 70
Fus i o n X T / L P R S i z in g C h a rt
Size #
Size
Knee Joint
Thigh
Calf
XX = 10
XS
11” – 12.75”
(28 – 32 cm) 13” – 15.5”
10 – 12”
XX = 20
S
12.75” – 14.5”
(32 – 37 cm)
15.5” – 18”
12” – 14”
XX = 30
M
14.5” – 15.25”
(37 – 39 cm)
18” – 19.5”
14” – 15”
XX = 35
M+
15.25” – 16.25” (39 – 41 cm)
19.5” – 21”
15” – 16”
XX = 40
L
16.25” – 18”
(41 – 46 cm)
21” – 24”
16” – 18”
XX = 50
XL
18” – 19.75”
(46 – 50 cm)
24” – 27”
18” – 20”
XX = 60
XXL
19.75” – 22”
(50 – 56 cm)
27” – 31”
20” – 23”
Circumference should be taken at knee joint, 6” (15 cm) above mid patella
Fusion XT and Solus are not available in XS
Fusion XT provides patients with protection for the ACL, PCL, and
collateral ligaments. By combining a high-strength frame design with
lightweight, aircraft-grade tempered aluminum, Fusion XT delivers high
performance for the rigors of contact activities.
• ACL
• PCL
instabilities
Features
• Lightweight, high-strength 2024 tempered
aluminum
• AirTech frame pads – innovative windows and
channels in the pad permit cooling air flow
while allowing moisture and heat to move
away from the skin
• Pivot Point Strap tabs – pivoting strap tabs
allow straps to contour to the leg for fit,
comfort and suspension
now redesigned for contoured fit and
protection
Part # Description
01215
01200
006XX
008XX
976XX
979XX
984XX
985XX
00521 Fusion XT Knee Brace
Fusion XT Custom,
color / pattern
Fusion XT Custom
Fusion XT, Left
Fusion XT, Right
Refurbish Kit, Left (Thigh)*
Refurbish Kit, Right (Thigh)*
Refurbish Kit, Left (Calf)*
Refurbish Kit Right (Calf)*
* Kit only includes either thigh and thigh straps
or calf frame pads and straps / pads. Condyle
pads (pair) are extra.
(Not Available in XS)
CE Marking
Part # Description
022XX
056XX
00028
00029
709XX 710XX LPR, Right
LPR, Left
LPR Custom
LPR Color Custom
Refurbish Kit, Left*
Refurbish Kit, Right *
LPR ligament knee brace is crafted of high grade, aerospace aluminum and shaped to offer the
stiffness and support your patients need for ligament stabilization. The LPR is one of the lightest
knee braces available. Diagonal strapping opens up the popliteal space and offers full range
of motion for all levels of activity. Combining ligamentous support and patient comfort and
compliance – the LPR – Ligament Protection Redefined.
*Kit contains thigh pad (1), calf pad (1), thigh
strap (1), calf strap (1), tibia strap (1), shims (4),
condyle pads thick (2), stop sets (1), IFU, hook
and loop pieces (to adhere the frame pads to
frame).
• ACL
• PCL
• Medial (inside) / Lateral (outside of
the knee) instabilities
Features
CE Marking
69
LPR® Brace
32
• AirTech frame padding – innovative channels in the pad
permit cooling air flow, allowing moisture and heat to
move away from the skin and create grip for suspension
• Sleek, modern strap guides that pivot for fit, comfort
and suspension
• Truss-shaped frame with aerospace aluminum for high
strength-to-weight ratio and field formability
• Cushioned strapping for comfort and contoured fit
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Bledsoe Dynamic Bracing Technology
Dynamic bracing maintains the proper relationship between the femur and tibia as it goes
through a range of motion. In the case of Dynamic ACL knee braces, the quadriceps extensor
force is used to provide a progressively increasing force to push the tibia posterior relative to the
femur as the knee moves into extension. Force is reduced as the knee flexes back into the ready
position. As the knee extends to less than 30° flexion, the force rises more quickly; the resulting
force is sufficient to prevent the tibia from subluxing prior to foot strike. As the knee joint is
compressed in the proper position, it gains much more stability.
This normal tibial position enhances joint position sense and maintains a more normal knee
flexion angle. The rapid rise in strap force is often enough to elicit a tonic reflex co-contraction
in the hamstrings which further stabilizes the knee and decreases hamstring latency. An added
benefit of using dynamic braces after several days is the muscle re-learning that occurs providing
“spontaneous hamstring coactivation” that is elevated to prevent subluxation even if the brace
is removed.1
Benefits of Dynamic Braces
There are multiple key benefits resulting from the use of dynamic knee braces as opposed
to passive or static type braces. The biggest benefit is the reduction or elimination of ACLD
symptoms.
Eliminating ACLD Symptoms
Preventing tibial translation before foot strike is the key to stopping the remaining elements in
the chain of events that lead to symptoms. Without tibial translation, there is no subsequent
pivot shift or joint reduction. This stops the giving way episodes, quadriceps inhibition, and
other symptoms. In a 1995 study by Acierno et al, it was shown that ACL deficient patients using
dynamic braces could generate maximal voluntary isokinetic extension effort throughout the
full range of motion with significantly increased quadriceps activation and without any knee
subluxation.2 One of the paper’s authors, Solomonow, later commented that “a noticeable
decrease in hamstrings co-activation was also noted, as it was not required.”1
breg.com/dynamic-bracing
Learn more about
dynamic bracing
1. Solomonow M. Sensory - Motor control of ligaments and associated neuromuscular disorders. 2006 ISEK
Congress Keynote Lecture, Journal of Electromyography and Kinesiology 16 (2006) 549-567.
2. Acierno S, D’Ambrosia C, Solomonow M, Baratta RV, D’Ambrosia RD. EMG and biomechanics of a dynamic
knee brace for ACL deficiency. Orthopedics 995;18:1101-7.
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
33 70
Z -12D / A x i o m D / P r i m a s D
Size # Size Thigh Circumference
Standard Calf Cir.
Athletic Calf Cir.
XX=01 XS
13.5”–16” (34–41 cm)
12.5”–14” (32–36 cm)
11”–12.5” (28–32 cm)
XX=03 S
16”–18.75” (41–48 cm) 14”–15.5” (36–39 cm)
12.5”–14” (32–36 cm)
XX=05 M
18.75”–21.5” (48–55 cm)15.5”–17” (39–43 cm)
14”–15.5” (36–39 cm)
XX=07 L
21.5”–24.25” (55–62 cm)17”–18.5” (43–47 cm)
15.5”–17” (39–43 cm)
XX=09 XL
24.25”–27” (62–69 cm) 18.5”–20” (47–51 cm)
17”–18.5” (43–47 cm)
XX=11 XXL 27”–29.5” (69–75 cm)
20”–21” (51–53 cm)
XX=13 3XL**29.5”–35” (75–89 cm)
21.5”–22.75” (55–58 cm) 20”–21” (51–53 cm)
Z-12D Knee Brace
The Z-12 D provides dynamic technology in a lightweight brace ideal
for patients under 6’ (183 cm) tall. Featuring the unique hinge-tostrapping system in a dual upright frame, the Z-12 D provides dynamic
control of tibial translation. The magnesium frame contains spring steel
reinforcement for extra shell strength.
18.5”–20” (47–51 cm)
• Knee ligament injuries / deficiencies
• Meniscal instabilities
• Prophylactic
Thigh circumference measure 6” (15 cm) above mid-patella. Calf circumference
measure 6” (15 cm) below mid-patella.
Features
**Axiom aluminum only.
Part #
• Dynamic hinge-to-strapping system for
added control of tibial translation
• Pivoting gastroc strap design helps minimize
brace migration
• Quick-release buckles ease application
• D-ring strapping option available for contact
sports
Description
AZ128000 Z-12 Dynamic Custom
AZ128YXX Z-12 Dynamic Standard,
XS-XXL
AZ158YXX Z-12 Dynamic Extended,
XS-XXL
AZ148YXX Z-12 Dynamic Athletic,
XS-XXL
AZ168YXX Z-12 Dynamic Extended
Athletic, XS-XXL
Shown with
PCL strap
(customizable
upon order)
Custom color
shown
Axiom D Knee Brace
Dynamic control of tibial translation in a 17” (43 cm) dual upright frame makes the Axiom-D an
ideal brace for taller patients needing support following ligament injuries. For contact sports the
spring steel reinforced aluminum frame is recommended while the lighter weight magnesium
provides support for non-contact sports and during normal activities of daily living.
• Knee ligament injuries / deficiencies.
• Meniscal instabilitie
• Prophylactic
Part # Description
PK118YXX Axiom Dynamic Aluminum,
XS-XXXL
PK113YXX Axiom Dynamic Aluminum
Athletic, XS-XXXL
CK118000 Axiom Dynamic Aluminum
Custom
MG118YXX Axiom Dynamic Magnesium,
XS-XXL
MG113YXX Axiom Dynamic Magnesium
Athletic, XS-XXL
Features
• Dynamic hinge-to-strapping system for added control
of tibial translation
• Pivoting gastroc strap design helps minimize brace
migration
• D-ring strapping option available for contact sports
Custom color
shown
Shown with PCL strap
(customizable upon order)
Primas D Knee Brace
Part # Description
PK318YXX Primas-D PCL Aluminum,
XS-XXXL
PK313YXX Primas-D PCL Aluminum,
Athletic, XS-XXXL
MG318YXX Primas-D PCL Magnesium,
XS-XXL
MG313YXX Primas-D PCL Magnesium
Athletic, XS-XXL
69
34
The Primas D is a unique dynamic brace designed for the injured PCL. As the knee moves
further into flexion, the quadriceps have less of an effect to keep the tibia forward. The brace
uses quadricep and hamstring power to work against the pathological movement of posterior
drop and pushes the tibia anterior with increasing force as the knee flexes. Tibial drop begins to
occur at 50°-60° of knee flexion; this is when the dynamic brace is most effective.
• Prophylactic
Features
migration
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Z -12 / Axiom / Z -13
Z-12 Knee Brace
Size #
Weighing in at 14 oz (.4 kg), our Z-12 brace is one of the lightest on the
market. The low-profile Z-12 has a magnesium frame and is for patients
requiring support and stability following ligament injuries. The Z-12 is not
recommended for contact sports.
• Knee ligament injuries /
deficiencies
• Prophylactic
Features
• Pivoting gastroc strap design
helps minimize brace migration
• Quick-release buckles ease
application
• Low-profile and lightweight
Size Thigh Circumference
Athletic Calf Cir.
XX = 01 XS
13.5”–16” (34–41 cm)
XX = 03 S
16”–18.75” (41–48 cm) 14”–15.5” (36–39 cm) 12.5”–14” (32–36 cm)
XX = 05 M
18.75”–21.5” (48–55 cm)15.5”–17” (39–43 cm) 14”–15.5” (36–39 cm)
XX = 07 L
21.5”–24.25” (55–62 cm)17”–18.5” (43–47 cm) 15.5”–17” (39–43 cm)
XX = 09 XL
12.5”–14” (32–36 cm) 11”–12.5” (28–32 cm)
24.25”–27” (62–69 cm) 18.5”–20” (47–51 cm) 17”–18.5” (43–47 cm)
XX = 11 XXL 27”–29.5” (69–75 cm)
20”–21” (51–53 cm)
18.5”–20” (47–51 cm)
XX = 13 3XL** 29.5”–35” (75–89 cm)
21.5”–22.75” (55–58 cm) 20”–21” (51–53 cm)
Thigh circumference measure 6” (15 cm) above mid-patella. Calf circumference measure
(15 cm) below mid-patella.
6”
**Axiom aluminum only.
Custom color
shown
Standard Calf Cir.
Axiom™ Knee Brace
For patients taller than 6’ (183 cm), Bledsoe’s Axiom brace provides support and stability
following ligament injuries or reconstructions. Available in magnesium or aluminum dual-upright
frames, our spring steel reinforced aluminum option is recommended if the brace will be worn
for prophylactic use.
• Prophylactic
Features
migration
• Aluminum version is impact-resistant
Part #
Description
AZ114000 Z-12 Custom
AZ119000 Z-12 Extended Custom
AZ114YXX Z-12 Standard, XS-XXL
AZ119YXX Z-12 Extended, XS-XXL
AZ113YXX Z-12 Athletic, XS-XXL
AZ118YXX Z-12 Extended Athletic,
XS-XXL
Part # Description
MG114000 Axiom Magnesium, Custom
CK114000 Axiom Aluminum, Custom
MG114YXX Axiom Magnesium, XS-XXL
MG119YXX Axiom Magnesium Athletic,
XS-XXL
PK114YXX Axiom Aluminum, XS-XXXL
PK119YXX Axiom Aluminum Athletic,
XS-XXXL
Custom color
shown
Part #
Z-13 Knee Brace
The Z-13 provides the same low-profile design as the Z-12 with the strength of aluminum. Can
be modified in the field for a more custom fit.
• Prophylactic
Features
Description
EZ114YXX–B Z-13 Standard, XS-XXL
EZ113YXX–B Z-13 Athletc, XS-XXL
EZ119YXX–B Z-13 Extended, XS-XXL
EZ118YXX–B Z-13 Athletc, Extended,
XS-XXL
migration
• D-rings keep straps flush against the brace during
activities
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
35 70
X2K / Wome n ’s X 2 K / C o m p ac t X 2 K
Size #
Size
X2K® Knee Brace
Knee Joint
XX = 10 XS 13” – 15.5” (33 – 39 cm)
11” – 12.75” (30 – 32 cm)
XX = 20 S
15.5” – 18” (39 – 46 cm)
12.75” – 14.5” (32 – 37 cm)
XX = 30 M
18” – 19.5” (46 – 50 cm)
14.5” – 15.25” (37 – 39 cm)
XX = 35 M+
19.5” – 21” (50 – 53 cm)
15.25” – 16.25” (39 – 41 cm)
XX = 40 L
21” – 24” (53 – 61 cm)
16.25” – 18” (41 – 46 cm)
XX = 50 XL
24” – 27” (61 – 69 cm)
18” – 19.75” (46 – 50 cm)
XX = 60 XXL
27” – 31” (69 – 79 cm)
19.75” – 22” (50 – 56 cm)
*
X2K is designed to provide patients with optimal varus and valgus
stiffness. The X2K is available in versions with standard or adjustable
hinges.
• ACL
• PCL
Features
• Diamond design for optimal varus
and valgus stiffness
• Lightweight aluminum frame
• Patented adjustable hinges allow for
optimal loading across the joint
• Internally mounted straps for ideal brace
suspension
Circumference should be taken at knee joint and 6” (15 cm) above mid patella
*XS not available in X2K and X2K–OA
Part # Description
20001
X2K Custom
20002
X2K Custom
w/ Adjustable Hinge
201XX X2K, Left
202XX X2K, Right
203XXX2K,
w/ Adjustable Hinge, Left
204XXX2K,
w/ Adjustable Hinge, Right
705XX X2K Refurbish Kit*
X2K High Performance Knee Brace (HP)
The X2K High Performance is the brace for patients who need the ultimate in durability.
• ACL
• PCL
Not available in size XS
* (Kit contains 2 regular condyle pads, 2 thin
condyle pads, 2 stop sets, black frame pads,
straps / pads, strap-tabs, hex key and
instructions)
Features
• Constructed with 2024 tempered aluminum
• Ideal for high level contact activities
• Accommodates larger patients with extreme varus
deformities
CE Marking
Part # Description
20007
X2K HP Custom
20008X2K HP Custom
w/ Adjustable Hinge
227XX X2K HP, Left
228XX X2K HP, Right
229XX X2K HP,
230XX X2K HP,
705XX X2K HP Refurbish Kit*
Not available in size XS
* (Kit contains same as X2K Custom)
CE Marking
X2K Women’s Knee Brace
X2K Women’s is a compact, lightweight version of the standard X2K and is for normal daily
activity as well as athletic endeavors.
Part # Description
20013
X2K Women’s Custom
20014X2K Women’s Custom
w/ Adjustable Hinge
209XX X2K Women’s, Left
210XX X2K Women’s, Right
211XX X2K Women’s,
212XX X2K Women’s,
• ACL
• PCL
Features
• Designed to fit the female leg without compromising
stability
• Lightweight frame for reduced migration
CE Marking
69
36
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
X2K / / X2K
Women’s
X2K / Compa
X2K BRACE SIZING CHART
X2K
COUNTERFORCE
PLUS / ct
X2K–OA
Compact X2K Knee Brace
Knee Joint
XX = 10 XS*
13” – 15.5” (33 – 39 cm)
11” – 12.75” (30 – 32 cm)
XX = 20 S
15.5” – 18” (39 – 46 cm)
12.75” – 14.5” (32 – 37 cm)
XX = 30 M
18” – 19.5” (46 – 50 cm)
14.5” – 15.25” (37 – 39 cm)
XX = 35 M+
19.5” – 21” (50 – 53 cm)
15.25” – 16.25” (39 – 41 cm)
XX = 40 L
21” – 24” (53 – 61 cm)
16.25” – 18” (41 – 46 cm)
XX = 50 XL
24” – 27” (61 – 69 cm)
18” – 19.75” (46 – 50 cm)
XX = 60 XXL
27” – 31” (69 – 79 cm)
19.75” – 22” (50 – 56 cm)
Size #
Offering the same fundamental design as the standard X2K, the
Compact X2K frame is slightly shorter in overall length, providing a more
proportional and comfortable fit for patients 5’6” and under (Available
in HP = High Performance).
• ACL
• PCL
Features
Size
• Diamond design for optimal
*XS not available in X2K and X2K–OA
varus and valgus stiffness
• Patented adjustable hinges for
reduced migration
Part # Description
• Internally mounted straps for ideal brace suspension
20019
Compact X2K Custom
20020
Compact X2K Custom
w/ Adjustable Hinge
219XX Compact X2K, Left
220XX Compact X2K, Right
221XX Compact X2K,
X2K-PTO Knee Brace
222XX Compact X2K,
For patients requiring both ligamentous support and patellofemoral control. Only available as a
custom brace.
Compact X2K Custom HP 20051
20052
Compact X2K Custom HP
w/ Adjustable Hinge
• ACL
• PCL
247XX Compact X2K HP, Left
248XX Compact X2K HP, Right
249XX Compact X2K HP
Features
• Diamond design for optimal varus and valgus stiffness
250XX Compact X2K HP
• Strap tab release system
• Lateral patella stabilization, PTO attachment prevents
lateral patella maltracking only
CE Marking
• Joint stabilization
• Adjustable hinge can move 6 mm in toward knee joint
Part # Description
NZONE™
Protective athletic equipment designed specifically for football linemen.
• For prophylactic use to reduce knee ligament injuries
prominent in football linemen
20025
20029
20033
20037
20056
X2K-PTO Custom
w/ Adjustable Hinge
X2K-PTO Custom HP
w/ Adjustable Hinge
X2K-PTO Women’s Custom
w/ Adjustable Hinge
Compact X2K-PTO Custom w/ Adjustable Hinge
Compact X2K-PTO Custom HP
w/ Adjustable Hinge
CE Marking
Features
• Ideal for ACL / PCL / MCL / LCL protection in offensive
and defensive linemen
• Protective football pads
• Dynamic strapping design
• Aluminum shell
• Removable knee pads
NZONE
Size #
Size
Thigh Circumference
XX = 05 M
18.75” – 21.5” (48 – 55 cm)
XX = 07 L
21.5” – 24.25” (55 – 62 cm)
XX = 09 XL
24.25” – 27” (62 – 69 cm)
XX = 11 XXL
27” – 29.5” (69 – 75 cm)
XX = 13 3XL
29.5” – 31” (75 – 78 cm)
Part # Description
FB1130XX
NZONE Pair
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
37 70
Undersleeve Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Width
Length
X = 1
XS
17”
19”
X = 2
S
18”
19”
X = 3
M
19”
19”
X = 4
L
20”
19”
X = 5
XL
21”
19”
X = 6
XXL
22”
19”
Undersleeve
Available in cotton or 1 / 8” Neoprene, these undersleeves fit comfortably under Breg or
Bledsoe functional braces and are ideal as a barrier for sensitive skin, as well as for soft tissue
containment. The undersleeve can help with suspension while wearing our knee braces as well.
• Cotton undersleeve has closed patella (Cotton / Lycra
blend - no elastic)
• Neoprene undersleeve has open patella (shown)
NeopreneCotton
* Circumference should be based on brace size
Part # Description
0985X
0735X
Undersleeve, Cotton, XS – XXL
(All 19” Long)
Undersleeve, Neoprene,
XS – XXL
CE Marking
Size #
Width
Length
XX = 3 S
Size
18”
19”
XX = 5 M
19”
19”
XX = 7 L
20”
19”
XX = 9 XL
21”
19”
XX = 11 XXL
22”
19”
Part #
BK0260XX
Description
Undersleeve, Neoprene,
S – XXL
Size #
Size
Width
Length
X = 1
XS
17”
19”
X = 3
S
18”
19”
X = 5
M
19”
19”
X = 7
L
20”
19”
X = 9
XL
21”
19”
Part #
Description
BK02603XUndersleeve, Supplex /
Lycra, XS – XXL
BK026043
Undersleeve, Supplex /
Lycra, XXL
BK026047
Undersleeve, Supplex /
Lycra, 3XL
69
38
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
K n e e Brace A c c es s or i es
Fusion XT Slide Guide
The slide guard is ideal for sports such as football, baseball / softball and soccer. Designed to be
worn with a Breg knee brace.
Features
Part # Description
22000
22001
Fusion XT Slide Guide, M / L
Fusion XT Slide Guide, XL / XXL
CE Marking
• Durable Neoprene around hinges to provide lateral
protection to brace during sliding
Protective Patella Cup
This protective cup is ideal for patients requiring patellar protection. Cup attaches to both
Fusion and X2K Knee Braces.
Brace Cover
Part # Description
70058
CE Marking
Fusion
/ Fusion OA BRACE SIZING CHART
Brace Cover
A lightweight padded cover that protects the brace during contact with another person or
during sliding.
Size #
Size X = 2
Small
X = 3
Medium
X = 4
Large
Part # Description
1099X
Brace Cover, X2K
1008X
Brace Cover, Fusion, LPR, Solus, Compact X2K and X2K Women’s
Not available in XS
CE Marking
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
39 70
K n e e B ra ce A cce sso ries
Part # Description
06560
Custom Brace Measuring
System
Custom Brace Measuring System
CE Marking
Part #
Description
Bledsoe Measuring Kit
AGO82000 Bledsoe Measuring Kit
Part # Description
70069
70056
40
Breg Brace Bag
(17.75” x 9.5” x 9.5”)
VIP Bag
(20” x 11.25” x 12.25”)
Brace Bags
Breg Brace Bags are made of black nylon and feature a large front-zippered pocket, end
pockets,top-mounted handles, and a removable shoulder strap. This durable bag is made of
black nylon and can accommodate a cold therapy unit along with other items.
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Bracing
Osteoarthritis
Freestyle OA knee
brace shown
69
Ost e o a rt h
hrit
rit is B ra c ing
Fusion OA Plus Knee Brace
With its sleek, lightweight design, Fusion OA Plus provides gentle medial or lateral offloading for unicompartmental osteoarthritis. The brace features Breg’s exclusive thumbwheel
hinge technology, which provides an effective valgus or varus load to the knee. The hinge
utilizes a telescoping condyle with our exclusive, user friendly thumbwheel dial design that
allows patients to easily adjust the level of off-loading without using a tool. The Fusion OA
Plus hinge also incorporates an offset gauge with a large viewing window to clearly display
the amount of load applied in half millimeter increments.
Improved Comfort and Fit with Airtech® Innovation
Another key feature of the Fusion OA Plus products is the AirTech frame pads that are
specifically designed to improve comfort and fit. Airtech is a complete system of air mesh
vents and grooved channel frame pads that increase airflow throughout the brace. The
system allows cool air in and moves warm air and moisture away from the skin, improving
comfort. The pad technology also improves suspension, reduces pinching and helps alleviate
pressure points. Additionally, since Fusion OA Plus features Breg’s ProForm technology,
it contours to the leg providing unhindered mobility, enhanced comfort, and ligament
protection making it ideal for a variety of uses. Fusion OA Plus braces set the standard when
it comes to suspension – it just stays where you put it!
Adjustments at Your Fingertips
Exclusively on Fusion OA Plus and Freestyle OA knee braces is the innovative thumbwheel
dial technology that allows precision off-loading adjustments with the touch of a finger (or
thumb). This makes Fusion OA Plus and Freestyle OA braces easy to use, with “no hassle”
adjustments. Competitive braces often require tools, like a screwdriver, to change hinge
settings.
Thumbwheel dial
69
42
Thumbwheel dial hinge
makes off-loading easy.
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Fusion and Freestyle knee braces
gently apply pressure to the
unaffected side to align the knee to
relieve the compressive force in the
affected side.
O s te oart h ri t i s B r a c i ng
Fusion OA Plus
The Fusion OA Plus knee brace provides patients with medial
compartment off-loading for unicompartmental osteoarthritis. It
features Breg’s exclusive adjustable hinge technology, which provides an
effective valgus load to the knee. The hinge utilizes Breg’s thumbwheel
dial design that allows patients to easily adjust the level of offloading
without using a tool. Breg’s ProForm technology provides an intimate,
contoured fit, that keeps the brace in place all day long. Fusion OA Plus
provides medial / lateral, anterior / posterior stabilization and support.
• Unicompartmental OA-medial
• Chondral defect procedures
• Meniscal procedures
Size #
Size
XX = 10
XS
13” – 15” (33 – 38 cm)
10” – 12”
(25 – 30 cm)
XX = 20
S
15” – 18” (38 – 46 cm)
12” – 14”
(30 – 36 cm)
XX = 30
M
18” – 19.5” (46 – 50 cm)
14” – 15”
(36 – 38 cm)
XX = 35
M+
19.5” – 21” (50 – 53 cm) 15” – 16”
(38 – 41 cm)
XX = 40
L
21” – 24” (53 – 61 cm)
16” – 18”
(41 – 46 cm)
XX = 50
XL
24” – 27” (61 – 69 cm)
18” – 20”
(46 – 51 cm)
XX = 60
XXL
27” – 30” (69 – 76 cm)
20” – 23” (51 – 58 cm)
* Fusion XT and Solus Plus are not available in XS
Features
• AirTech frame pad
• Thumbwheel dial hinge for easy off-loading
• ProForm technology provides a contoured fit and
protection
• Low profile, lightweight, contoured design
• Enhanced comfort with foam condyle pads, cushioned
straps, and frame pads for all day support
Part # Description
01221
Fusion OA Plus Custom
01222
Fusion OA Plus Custom
Color / Pattern
130XX Fusion OA Plus, Left
131XX Fusion OA Plus, Right
787XX Fusion OA Plus, Refurbish Kit,
Left
788XX Fusion OA Plus, Refurbish Kit,
Right
CE Marking
Fusion Women’s OA Plus Knee Brace
The Fusion Women’s OA Plus knee brace provides medial compartment
off-loading for patients with unicompartmental osteoarthritis. It features
Breg’s exclusive adjustable hinge technology, which provides an effective
valgus load to the knee. The hinge utilizes Breg’s thumbwheel dial design
that allows patients to easily adjust the level of offloading without using a
tool. Breg’s ProForm technology provides an intimate, contoured fit, that
keeps the brace in place all day long. Fusion Women’s OA Plus provides
necessary medial / lateral, anterior / posterior
stabilization and support.
Fusion Women’s OA Plus
Size #
Size
XX = 10
XS
13” – 15” (33 – 38 cm)
10” – 12”
(25 – 30 cm)
XX = 20
S
15” – 18” (38 – 46 cm)
12” – 14”
(30 – 36 cm)
XX = 30
M
18” – 19.5” (46 – 50 cm)
14” – 15”
(36 – 38 cm)
XX = 35
M+
19.5” – 21” (50 – 53 cm) 15” – 16”
(38 – 41 cm)
XX = 40
L
21” – 24” (53 – 61 cm)
16” – 18”
(41 – 46 cm)
XX = 50
XL
24” – 27” (61 – 69 cm)
18” – 20”
(46 – 51 cm)
XX = 60
XXL
27” – 30” (69 – 76 cm)
20” – 23”
(51 – 58 cm)
• Unicompartmental OA-medial
Features
• AirTech frame pad
• Thumbwheel dial hinge for easy off-loading
protection
• Low profile, lightweight, contoured design specifically
for women
Part # Description
01224
Custom, Argento White
01225
Custom, Color / Pattern
01223
Custom
138XX Fusion Women’s OA Plus,
Left
Right
Refurbish Kit, Left
Refurbish Kit, Right
CE Marking
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
43 70
Ost e o aOrts h
teo
hrit
ritaisrtBhra
ritcis
ing
Bra c ing
Fusion XT OA Plus / Lateral OA Plus / Solus Plus
Size #
Size
XX = 10
XS
13” – 15” (33 – 38 cm)
10” – 12”
(25 – 30 cm)
XX = 20
S
15” – 18” (38 – 46 cm)
12” – 14”
(30 – 36 cm)
XX = 30
M
18” – 19.5” (46 – 50 cm)
14” – 15”
(36 – 38 cm)
XX = 35
M+
19.5” – 21” (50 – 53 cm) 15” – 16”
(38 – 41 cm)
XX = 40
L
21” – 24” (53 – 61 cm)
16” – 18”
(41 – 46 cm)
XX = 50
XL
24” – 27” (61 – 69 cm)
18” – 20”
(46 – 51 cm)
XX = 60
XXL
27” – 30” (69 – 76 cm)
20” – 23”
(51 – 58 cm)
Solus® Plus Knee Brace
The Solus Plus knee brace provides support and stability for patients
with medial compartmental osteoarthritis (OA). Designed for activities
of daily living, Solus Plus delivers effective load dispersion to relieve
the symptoms of OA. It features Breg’s exclusive thumbwheel hinge
technology, which provides an effective valgus load to the knee.
• Unicompartmental OA medial
* Fusion XT and Solus Plus are not available in XS
Features
• AirTech frame pads
• Low profile, single upright hinge for daily
living activities
• Thumbwheel dial hinge makes off-loading
easy
• Enhanced comfort with foam condyle pads,
cushioned straps, and frame pads for all day
support
Part # Description
19104
Solus Plus Custom, w/
Adjustable Hinge
19105
Solus Plus Custom, Color /
Pattern Option w/ Adjustable
Hinge
184XX Solus Plus, Left
186XX Solus Plus, Right
793XX
Solus Plus, Refurbish Kit, Left*
794XX Solus Plus, Refurbish Kit, Right*
Custom color
shown
* Refurb kit includes frame pads with hook and
loop pieces, straps and instructions
CE Marking
Part # Description
01226
01227
057XX
058XX
791XX
792XX
Fusion XT OA Plus Custom, w/
Adjustable Hinge
Fusion XT OA Plus Custom,
Color / Pattern Option w/
Adjustable Hinge
Fusion XT OA Plus, Left
Fusion XT OA Plus, Right
Fusion XT OA Plus, Refurbish
Kit, Left*
Fusion XT OA Plus, Refurbish
Kit, Right*
CE Marking
69
44
Fusion XT OA Plus
Fusion XT OA Plus is designed for OA patients who participate in high-impact activities. This
brace features a high-strength frame that utilizes Breg’s standard adjustable hinge design for
maximum durability. Note: Fusion XT OA Plus requires the use of a hex key (included) for offloading adjustments.
Features
• AirTech Frame Pads
• Lightweight, high-strength 2024 tempered aluminum
protection
• Easily adjustable / removable straps ensure a proper fit
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
O s te oart
Osh
terit
oart
is Bra
h ri tciisng
B r a c i ng
Fusion Lateral OA Plus Knee Brace
Part # Description
The Fusion Lateral OA Plus brace features a streamlined frame with an innovative, slim
thumbwheel dial. Designed to provide lateral off-loading for patients with unicompartmental
osteoarthritis. The Fusion Lateral OA Plus incorporates an offset gauge that clearly displays the
amount of load applied in half-millimeter increments. It features Breg’s revolutionary ProForm
technology, allowing patients to always get an intimate, contoured fit that keeps the brace in
place all day long.
01302
Fusion Lateral OA Plus Custom
01303
Fusion Lateral OA Plus Custom,
Color / Pattern Option
077XX
Fusion Lateral OA Plus, Left
079XX
Fusion Lateral OA Plus, Right
795XX Fusion Lateral OA Plus,
Refurbish, Left*
797XX Fusion Lateral OA Plus,
Refurbish, Right*
XX = See size chart at left
Features
• AirTech frame pads
• Thumbwheel dial makes off-loading adjustments easy
protection
• Low profile, lightweight, contoured design
CE Marking
Freestyle OA
The Freestyle OA provides off-loading of the medial or lateral
compartment for patients with mild to moderate unicompartmental
osteoarthritis. The simple wraparound design allows patients to apply
and remove the brace with ease. Comfortable, breathable material
provides focused compression around the knee joint. The single-sided
low profile hinge encourages patient compliance, while the innovative
thumbwheel dial allows precision unloading adjustments without the
use of a tool.
Size #
Size
X = 2
S
15” – 18” (38 – 46 cm)
12” – 14”
(30 – 36 cm)
X = 3
M
18” – 21” (46 – 53 cm)
14” – 16”
(36 – 41 cm)
X = 4
L
21” – 24” (53 – 61 cm)
16” – 18”
(41 – 46 cm)
X = 5
XL
24” – 27” (61 – 69 cm)
18” – 20”
(46 – 51 cm)
X = 6
XXL
27” – 30” (69 – 76 cm)
20” – 23”
(51 – 58 cm)
• Mild to unicompartmental
osteoarthritis
Features
• Lightweight, low profile brace fits under most clothing
• Soft, comfortable material promotes patient
compliance
• Simple, intuitive wraparound design provides
compression
• Adjustable off-loading – no tools required
• Finger pockets aid in application
• Medial or lateral options available
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Part #
1171X 1172X
1176X 1177X
100338-000 Description
Freestyle OA Medial, Left
Freestyle OA Medial, Right
Freestyle OA Lateral, Left
Freestyle OA Lateral, Right
Freestyle OA Condyle Pad
Accessory Kit
CE Marking
45 70
Ost e o a rt h
hrit
rit is B ra c ing
DUO Brace
Size # Size Thigh Cir.
Standard Calf Cir.
Athletic Calf Cir.
XX = 01XS 13.5” – 16” (34 – 41cm) 12.5” – 14” (32 – 36cm) 11” – 12.5” (28 – 32cm)
XX = 03 S 16” – 18.75” (41 – 48cm) 14” – 15.5” (36 – 39cm) 12.5” – 14” (32 – 36cm)
XX = 05 M 18.75” – 21.5” (48 – 55cm)15.5” – 17” (39 – 43cm) 14” – 15.5” (36 – 39cm)
XX = 07 L 21.5” – 24.25” (55 – 62cm) 17” – 18.5” (43 – 47cm) 15.5” – 17” (39 – 43cm)
XX = 09 XL 24.25” – 27” (62 – 69cm) 18.5” – 20” (47 – 51cm) 17” – 18.5” (43 – 41cm)
XX = 11 XXL27” – 29.5” (69 – 75cm) 20” – 21” (51 – 53cm)
18.5” – 20” (47 – 51cm)
Thigh circumference measure 6” (15 cm) above mid-patella. Calf circumference measure 6” (15 cm)
below mid-patella.
Dynamic OA
The goal of treatment with off-loading braces is to reduce loads on the
degenerative compartment of the knee by application of peri-articular
forces applied distant from the knee joint. By transferal of loads to the
healthy or at least less-diseased compartment of the knee, pain from
the narrowed, arthritic compartment may be reduced.1 Osteoarthritic
knee braces have been developed to lessen loads in the degenerative
compartment while subsequently reducing knee pain in patients with
unicompartmental arthritis. The Rocky Mountain Musculoskeletal
Research Lab study, An in vivo analysis of the effectiveness of the
osteoarthritic knee brace during heel strike and midstance of gait,
by Richard D. Komistek, PhD, et al., demonstrated that articular
separation of a degenerated knee compartment can be achieved at
heel-strike and mid-stance of gait with the Thruster knee brace with
subsequent subjective relief of knee pain in 92% of patients tested.
1. Komistek, Richard D. Ph.D., Director, Center for Musculoskeletal Research, Nadaud, Matthew C. MD; Dennis,
Douglas, A. MD; Anderle, Matthew R.; Kubo, Matthew B. “In Vivo Three Dimensional Determination of OA Brace
Effectiveness: A Multiple Brace Analysis.” American Academy of Orthopedic Surgeons, February 2005.
Part # Description
ED312000 DUO Custom Short, Medial,
Custom
ED314000 DUO Custom Short, Lateral,
Custom
ED112000 DUO Custom, Medial,
Custom
ED114000 DUO Custom, Lateral,
Custom
ED114YXX-B DUO, Lateral, XS-XXL
ED112YXX-B DUO, Medial, XS-XXL
ED113YXX-B DUO, Lateral Athletic,
XS-XXL
ED111YXX-B DUO, Medial Athletic,
XS-XXL
ED314YXX-B DUO, Lateral, Short, XS-XXL
ED312YXX-B DUO, Medial, Short, XS-XXL
ED313YXX-B DUO, Lateral Athletic, Short,
XS-XXL
ED311YXX-B DUO, Medial Athletic, Short,
XS-XXL
ED0201XX Kit, Soft Goods, Left Medial
/ Right Lateral, XS-XXL
ED0202XX Kit, Soft Goods, Right
Medial / Left Lateral, XS-XXL
ED0211XX Kit, Soft Goods, Athletic,
Left Medial / Right Lateral,
XS-XXL
ED0212XX Kit, Soft Goods, Athletic,
Right Medial / Left Lateral,
XS-XXL
DUO
A unique design, our DUO (Dynamic Unloading Osteoarthritis) brace is the only dual-upright
dynamic OA brace on the market. This brace creates a load across the joint when the knee is
straight and reduces the load as the knee flexes. Thus, when the patient is bearing weight, the
brace is actively working. DUO reduces force when sitting, making it ideal for patients who need
to wear a brace for daily activities.
• Unicompartmental OA
• Unicompartmental OA / meniscal instabilities with
ligamentous injuries
Features
• Low-profile frame
• Dynamic loading hinge
• Incremental arm adjustments
• Up to 16 degrees of correction can be applied
• Unique strapping design minimizes migration
Custom color
shown
PCL Strap
Option
CE Marking
69
46
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Z-12 Adjustable OA Sizing Chart
Z-12 Adjustable OA
Size #
This dual upright design features an adjustable condyle building up to
an additional 12° of correction into the brace. The Z-12 is for a patient
with an active lifestyle who may need additional support from a dualupright brace due to ligament instability. The adjustable condyle will
allow patients to make minor load adjustments by sliding the loading
lever through seven settings. The Z-12 frame is made of magnesium - our
lightest-weight OA brace.
• Unicompartmental OA / meniscal
instabilities with ligamentous
injuries
SizeThigh Cir.
Standard Calf Cir.
Athletic Calf Cir.
XX = 01 XS 13.5” – 16” (34 – 41cm) 12.5” – 14” (32 – 36cm) 11” – 12.5” (28 – 32cm)
XX = 03 S 16” – 18.75” (41 – 48cm) 14” – 15.5” (36 – 39cm) 12.5” – 14” (32 – 36cm)
XX = 05 M 18.75” – 21.5” (48 – 55cm) 15.5” – 17” (39 – 43cm) 14” – 15.5” (36 – 39cm)
XX = 07 L 21.5” – 24.25” (55 – 62cm) 17” – 18.5” (43 – 47cm) 15.5” – 17” (39 – 43cm)
XX = 09 XL 24.25” – 27” (62 – 69cm) 18.5” – 20” (47 – 51cm) 17” – 18.5” (43 – 41cm)
XX = 11 XXL27” – 29.5” (69 – 75cm) 20” – 21” (51 – 53cm)
18.5” – 20” (47 – 51cm)
below mid-patella.
Features
• Adjustable condyle to increase load adjustment
migration
• Up to 12° of correction from condyle pad
• For specific activities, not all-day wear
Custom color
shown
Part #
AZ115000-A
AZ115300-A
Description
Z-12 Adjustable OA,
Custom Medial, Custom
Z-12 Adjustable OA,
Custom Lateral, Custom
AZ115400-A Z-12 Adjustable OA,
Custom Extended, Custom
AZ115500-A Z-12 Adjustable OA,
Custom Extended, Custom
AZ294YXX-A Z-12 Adjustable OA,
Medial, XS–XXL
Lateral, XS–XXL
Medial Athletic, XS–XXL
Adjustable
Condyle Pad
Lateral Athletic, XS–XXL
Medial Extended, XS–XXL
Lateral Extended, XS–XXL
Z-12 OA
Provides OA pain relief while stabilizing the knee and protecting the ACL, PCL, MCL and LCL.
Features
• Prefabricated version has 3° of correction built into the
frame; custom has up to 8° of correction capability
• Unique strapping design minimizes brace migration
Custom color
shown
AZ298YXX-A Z-12 Adjustable OA, Medial
Extended Athletic, XS–XXL
AZ288YXX-A Z-12 Adjustable OA, Lateral
Extended Athletic, XS–XXL
CE Marking
Part #
Description
AZ115000
Z-12 OA, Medial, Custom
AZ115300
Z-12 OA, Lateral, Custom
AZ115400
Z-12 OA, Extended, Medial, Custom
AZ115500
Z-12 OA, Extended, Lateral, Custom
AZ294YXX Z-12 OA, Medial, XS–XXL
AZ284YXX Z-12 OA, Lateral, XS–XXL
AZ293YXX Z-12 OA, Medial Athletic, XS–XXL
AZ283YXX Z-12 OA, Lateral Athletic, XS–XXL
AZ299YXX Z-12 OA, Medial Extended, XS–XXL
AZ289YXX Z-12 OA, Lateral Extended, XS–XXL
AZ298YXX Z-12 OA, Medial Extended Athletic, XS–XXL
AZ288YXX Z-12 OA, Lateral Extended Athletic, XS–XXL
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
CE Marking
47 70
Ost e o a rt h
hrit
rit is B ra c ing
Part #
Description
MG115000-AAxiom Adjustable OA
Custom, Magnesium, Medial
MG115300-AAxiom Adjustable OA
Custom, Magnesium, Lateral
CK115000-A Axiom Adjustable OA
Custom, Aluminum, Medial
CK115300-A Axiom Adjustable OA
Custom, Aluminum, Lateral
Axiom Adjustable OA
Similar to the Z-12, the dual-upright Axiom Adjustable OA features an adjustable condyle
building up to 12° of correction into the brace. The Axiom frame is slightly longer than the Z-12.
• Unicompartmental OA / meniscal instabilities
with ligamentous injuries
Features
• Adjustable condyle to increase load
adjustment
• Pivoting gastroc strap design helps minimize
brace migration
• Up to 12° of correction from condyle pad
• For specific activities, not all-day wear
Available in custom
colors only
Adjustable
Condyle Pad
Part #
MG115000
MG115300
MG117000
MG117300
CK115000
CK115300
CK117000
CK117300
69
48
Description
Axiom OA Custom
Magnesium, Medial
Axiom OA Custom
Magnesium, Lateral
Axiom OA Custom, Dynamic,
Magnesium, Medial
Magnesium, Lateral
Axiom OA Custom
Aluminum, Medial
Axiom OA Custom
Aluminum, Lateral
Aluminum, Medial
Aluminum, Lateral
Axiom OA
Provides mild to moderate OA pain relief while stabilizing the knee and protecting the ACL,
PCL, MCL and LCL. Magnesium or aluminum material options.
Features
Available in custom
colors only
• The custom frame has up to 8° of correction capability
migration
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Thruster RLF Sizing Chart
Thruster RLF
Size #
Clinically proven to provide pain relief.* This single-upright OA brace
provides the greatest amount of OA correction on the market. The
unique design of the hinge allows for 36° of brace angulation. This allows
the brace to unload knee joints that have excessive tissue. It can be made
to unload the medial or lateral compartment of the knee.
Features
SizeThigh Cir.
Standard Calf Cir.
Athletic Calf Cir.
XX = 01XS 13.5” – 16” (34 – 41cm) 12.5” – 14” (32 – 36cm) 11” – 12.5” (28 – 32cm)
XX = 03S
16” – 18.75” (41 – 48cm) 14” – 15.5” (36 – 39cm) 12.5” – 14” (32 – 36cm)
XX = 05M 18.75” – 21.5” (48 – 55cm) 15.5” – 17” (39 – 43cm) 14” – 15.5” (36 – 39cm)
XX = 07L
21.5” – 24.25” (55 – 62cm) 17” – 18.5” (43 – 47cm) 15.5” – 17” (39 – 43cm)
XX = 09 XL 24.25” – 27” (62 – 69cm) 18.5” – 20” (47 – 51cm) 17” – 18.5” (43 – 41cm)
XX = 11 XXL27” – 29.5” (69 – 75cm) 20” – 21” (51 – 53cm)
18.5” – 20” (47 – 51cm)
XX = 13 3XL**29.5” – 31” (75 – 79cm) 21.5” – 22.75” (55–58cm) 20” – 21” (51–53cm)
below mid-patella.
• Hinge is on involved side of
knee, pulling vs. pushing to
relieve joint pain
• Up to 36° degrees of correction
• Recommended for patients with redundant soft tissue
• Unloads in a 4-point load system
*Komistek, Richard D. Ph.D., Director, Center for Musculoskeletal Research,
Nadaud, Matthew C. MD; Dennis, Douglas, A. MD; Anderle, Matthew R.;
Kubo, Matthew B. “In Vivo Three Dimensional Determination of OA Brace
Effectiveness: A Multiple Brace Analysis.” American Academy of Orthopedic
Surgeons, February 2005.
Custom color
shown
Part #
Description
AG061012 Thruster RLF, Custom
Medial
AG061014 Thruster RLF, Custom
Lateral
TA008YXX–B Thruster RLF, Lateral, XS-3XL
TA009YXX–B Thruster RLF, Medial, XS-3XL
TA018YXX–B Thruster RLF, Lateral Short,
XS-3XL
TA019YXX–B Thruster RLF, Medial Short,
XS-3XL
TA028YXX–B Thruster RLF, Lateral
Athletic, XS-3XL
TA029YXX–B Thruster RLF, Medial
Athletic, XS-3XL
AFO Kit
TK074075
CE Marking
Part #
Legacy Thruster
The Legacy Thruster is a smaller, lightweight single-upright brace. The Legacy Thruster’s hinge
is on the affected side of the knee. This design creates relief by pulling the straps to open the
joint space versus pushing against the opposite side of the knee. This design addresses OA
conditions only, not associated with ligament instability.
Features
• Dial allows incremental force adjustments
• Hinge is on involved side of knee, pulling vs. pushing to
help relieve joint pain
• Unloads in a 4-point load system
• Distal calf section flexes with the muscles of the leg
• Up to 22° of correction can be applied
• For moderate to severe OA patients who require the
brace for all-day use
Custom color
shown
Description
Legacy Thruster
TA419000 Short Medial, Custom
TA418000 Short Lateral, Custom
TA409000 Medial, Custom
TA408000 Lateral, Custom
TA408YXX Lateral, XS-XXL
TA409YXX Medial, XS-XXL
TA418YXX Lateral Short, XS-XXL
TA419YXX Medial Short, XS-XXL
TA428YXX Lateral Athletic, XS-XXL
TA429YXX Medial Athletic, XS-XXL
TA438YXX Lateral Short Athletic,
XS-XXL
TA439YXX Medial Short Athletic,
XS-XXL
Legacy Thruster Soft Goods Kit
TA460000Custom
TR4601XX Medial Left / Lateral Right,
XS-XXL
TA4602XX Medial Right / Lateral Left,
XS-XXL
TA4611XX Short, Medial Left / Lateral
Right, XS-XXL
TA4612XX Short, Medial Right / Lateral
Left, XS-XXL
TA4621XX Athletic, Medial Left / Lateral
Right, XS-XXL
TA4622XX Athletic, Medial Right /
Lateral Left, XS-XXL
TA4631XX Athletic Short, Medial Left /
Lateral Right, XS-XXL
TA4632XX Athletic Short, Medial Right /
Lateral Left, XS-XXL
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
CE Marking
49 70
Ost e o aOrts teo
hritaisrtBhra
ritcis
ing
Bra c ing
OA Impule Push / Pull Sizing Chart
Size # Size Thigh Cir.
Standard Calf Cir.
Athletic Calf Cir.
XX = 01 XS 13.5” – 16” (34 – 41cm) 12.5” – 14” (32 – 36cm) 11” – 12.5”(28 – 32cm)
XX = 03 S 16” – 18.75” (41 – 48cm) 14” – 15.5” (36 – 39cm) 12.5” – 14”(32 – 36cm)
XX = 05 M 18.75” – 21.5” (48 – 55cm) 15.5” – 17” (39 – 43cm) 14” – 15.5”(36 – 39cm)
XX = 07 L 21.5” – 24.25” (55 – 62cm) 17” – 18.5” (43 – 47cm) 15.5” – 17”(39 – 43cm)
XX = 09 XL 24.25” – 27” (62 – 69cm) 18.5” – 20” (47 – 51cm) 17” – 18.5”(43 – 41cm)
XX = 11XXL27” – 29.5” (69 – 75cm) 20” – 21” (51 – 53cm)
18.5” – 20”(47 – 51cm)
XX = 13 3XL 29.5” – 31” (75 – 79cm) 21.5” – 22.75” (55 – 58cm) 20” – 21” (51 – 53cm)
below mid-patella.
Part #
The soft OA Impulse is ideal for patients with mild to moderate
osteoarthritis (OA) and an active lifestyle. The OA Impulse is designed
to give the patient the ability to adjust the amount of OA relief
by adjusting the loading hinge, as well as to provide support and
compression through Bledsoe’s revolutionary TriTechTM material.
The combination of the TriTech material and the patented hinge
technology offers fashion and function in a single OA brace.
Features
Description
RK508YXX OA Impulse, Pull Lateral,
XS-XXL
RK509YXX OA Impulse, Pull Medial,
XS-XXL
RK518YXX OA Impulse, Push Lateral,
XS-XXL
RK519YXX OA Impulse, Push Medial,
XS-XXL
OA Impulse Push / Pull
ADJUSTABLE DIAL
Adjustable Dial
CE Marking
• Front closure allows easy application and removal
• Internal cuffs distribute load over large area,
eliminating pressure points that are common with
unloading brace
• Designed for the active patient
• Combines Bledsoe’s proven pull technology with
our revolutionary TriTech material
• Lightweight, weighing just under 14 oz* (.4 kg)
• Adjustable dial - no tools needed
• Not recommended for contact sports such as
football, rugby, etc.
*the weight of a medium size brace
Pull Technology
Part # Description
251XX
252XX
X2K-OA w/ Adjustable
Hinge, Left
X2K-OA w/ Adjustable
Hinge, Right
CE Marking
X2K-OA Knee Brace
Breg X2K-OA knee brace is designed for OA patients who are suffering from osteoarthritis of
the knee requiring a brace. The brace provides control of varus / valgus forces associated with
unicompartmental osteoarthritis of the knee. Note: X2K OA knee brace requires the use of a hex
key (included) for off-loading adjustments.
• Chondral injuries / defect and / or procedures
Features
• Gel condyle pad, contoured straps, and cushioned
enlarged tibia frame pad provide all day comfort,
support and suspension
• Enhanced adjustable hinge – 12 mm of travel (on
loading side only)
• 6 mm of travel on opposing side
• Retractable opposing hinge feature
• Siliconized strap padding
• Over-sized tibial frame pad
69
50
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
O s te oart
Osh
terit
oart
is Bra
h ri tciisng
B r a c i ng
X2K / Women’s X2K / CounterForce Plus / X2K-OA
X2K CounterForce Knee Brace
X2K CounterForce knee brace provides control of varus / algus forces
for patients with unicompartmental osteoarthritis of the knee. Each
brace is designed with a varus or valgus force, and since the unique
hinge system on the brace is fully adjustable, the patient or clinician has
the option of adding load / force. Note: X2K CounterForce knee brace
requires the use of a hex key (included) for off-loading adjustments.
Size #
Knee Joint
XX = 10 XS
Size
13” – 15.5” (33 – 39 cm)
11” – 12.75” (30 – 32 cm)
XX = 20 S
15.5” – 18” (39 – 46 cm)
12.75” – 14.5” (32 – 37 cm)
XX = 30 M
18” – 19.5” (46 – 50 cm)
14.5” – 15.25” (37 – 39 cm)
XX = 35 M+
19.5” – 21” (50 – 53 cm)
15.25” – 16.25” (39 – 41 cm)
XX = 40 L
21” – 24” (53 – 61 cm)
16.25” – 18” (41 – 46 cm)
XX = 50 XL
24” – 27” (61 – 69 cm)
18” – 19.75” (46 – 50 cm)
XX = 60 XXL
27” – 31” (69 – 79 cm)
19.75” – 22” (50 – 56 cm)
Features
• Enhanced adjustable hinge – 12 mm of travel
• Enhanced comfort with gel condyle pads, cushioned
straps, and frame pads for all day comfort
• Siliconized strap padding (straps 1 & 2)
• Available in shorter length, Women’s version
Part # Description
20003
20009
20015
7006X
X2K CounterForce Plus Custom
X2K High-Performance (HP)
CounterForce Plus Custom
X2K Women’s CounterForce
Plus Custom
X2K CounterForce Plus Refurbish Kit, S – XXL*
* Refurb kit includes 2 regular condyle pads,
2 stop sets, frame pads with hook and loop
pieces, straps and instructions. X = 2 for Small,
3 for M / M+, 4 for L, 5 for XL, 6 for XXL
CE Marking
Compact X2K CounterForce Knee Brace
Offering the same fundamental design as the standard X2K, the Compact X2K frame is slightly
shorter in overall length, providing a more proportional and comfortable fit for patients 5’6” and
under (Available in HP = High Performance). Note: Compact X2K CounterForce requires the use
of a hex key (included) for off-loading adjustments.
Features
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Part # Description
20021
Compact X2K CounterForce
Plus Custom
20053
Compact X2K High
Performance (HP) CounterForce
Plus Custom
7506X
Compact X2K CounterForce
Plus Refurbish Kit, S – XXL*
* Refurbish kits include 2 regular condyle pads,
2 gel pads, 2 stop sets, black frame pads with
straps, strap tabs, hex key and instructions.
X = 2 for S, 3 for M / M+, 4 for L, 5 for XL,
6 for XXL
CE Marking
51 70
Ost e o aOrts teo
hritaisrtBhra
ritcis
ing
Bra c ing
Fusion
FUSI BRACE
SIZING
CHART
X2K / /Women’s
X2K
/ CounterForce
Plus / X2K-OA
X2K-OA Women’s Knee Brace
Size #
Size
Knee Joint
XX = 10
XS
13” – 15.5” (33 – 39 cm)
11” – 12.75” (30 – 32 cm)
XX = 20
S
15.5” – 18” (39 – 46 cm)
12.75” – 14.5” (32 – 37 cm)
XX = 30
M
18” – 19.5” (46 – 50 cm)
14.5” – 15.25” (37 – 39 cm)
XX = 35
M+
19.5” – 21” (50 – 53 cm)
15.25” – 16.25” (39 – 41 cm)
XX = 40
L
21” – 24” (53 – 61 cm)
16.25” – 18” (41 – 46 cm)
XX = 50
XL
24” – 27” (61 – 69 cm)
18” – 19.75” (46 – 50 cm)
XX = 60
XXL
27” – 31” (69 – 79 cm)
19.75” – 22” (50 – 56 cm)
Women’s X2K-OA frame is compact and lightweight for a more
comfortable fit for women. It provides control of varus / valgus forces
for patients with unicompartmental osteoarthritis of the knee. Note:
X2K-OA Women’s knee brace requires the use of a hex key (included)
for off-loading adjustments.
Features
• Enhanced comfort with gel condyle pads,
cushioned straps, and frame pads for all day
comfort
• Available in size XS
Part # Description
255XX X2K-OA Women’s w/
Adjustable Hinge, Left
256XX X2K-OA Women’s w/
Adjustable Hinge, Right
7007X X2K-OA Women’s Refurbish Kit*
XS-XXL
X = 1 for XS, 2 for S, 3 for M / M+, 4 for L,
5 for XL, 6 for XXL
CE Marking
Compact X2K-OA Knee Brace
Part # Description
253XX
254XX
7506X
Compact X2K-OA
Compact X2K-OA
Compact X2K-OA Refurbish
Kit, XS – XXL*
X = 1 for XS, 2 for S, 3 for M / M+, 4 for L,
5 for XL, 6 for XXL
CE Marking
69
52
Offering the same fundamental design as the standard X2K-OA, the Compact X2K-OA frame is
slightly shorter in overall length, providing a more proportional and comfortable fit for patients
5’6” and under (Available in HP = High Performance).
Features
• Available in size XS
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Bracing
Soft Knee
Crossover knee
brace shown
69
So f t K n e e B ra cing
TriTech™
A significant leap in innovation, our revolutionary TriTech material has radically altered the
definition of high tech performance fabrics. We’ve combined our newest material with the
comfort and durability you have come to expect. Our line of braces with TriTech material doesn’t
just look different.
1
Low profile. Thin is better.
TriTech is half as thick as the competition.
TriTech is 2 mm while the competition is
greater than 4 mm.
1
2
Breathable. Cool.
3
Better compression. Better support.
TriTech keeps you cooler when you break a
sweat. It’s so breathable you can see
through it.
2
Increased spandex provides more compression
and support, while reducing brace migration.
3
3D Neoprene™
Provides greater compression support.
Our 3D Neoprene is 3/8” (.95 cm) thick and
latex-free. The 3D dot pattern adds uniform stretch
throughout the garment.
54
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
S oft K nee B r a c i ng
Crossover
Crossover
Our Crossover brace features three designs to accommodate a wide
variety of patients. Our classic pull-on design offers the most uniform
fit. The front closure wraparound design allows for ease of application
without removing shoes and is ideal for patients with limited flexibility
and reach. The hybrid Crossover FT features a pull-on calf and front
closure thigh, allowing for an adjustable fit for patients with atypical legs.
• Mild and moderate ACL, PCL,
MCL, and LCL sprains
• Menisci instabilities
• Patellar instabilities
• Mild osteoarthritis
Size #
Size
Thigh Circumference
Calf Circumference
XX = 01
XS
13.5” – 16”
(34 – 41 cm)
12.5” – 14” (32 – 36 cm)
XX = 03
S
16” – 18.75”
(41 – 48 cm)
14” – 15.5” (36 – 39 cm)
XX = 05
M
18.75” – 21.5” (48 – 55 cm)
15.5” – 17” (39 – 43 cm)
XX = 07
L
21.5” – 24.25” (55 – 62 cm)
17” – 18.5” (43 – 47 cm)
XX = 09
XL
24.25” – 27”
(62 – 69 cm)
18.5” – 20” (47 – 51 cm)
XX = 11
XXL
27” – 29.5”
(69 – 75 cm)
20” – 21”
(51 – 53 cm)
Prefabricated: Measure 6” (15 cm) above mid-patella while standing.
Custom: Measure 2” (5 cm), 4” (10 cm), 6” (15 cm) and 8” (20 cm) above and below
mid-patella, and at knee center, while standing.
Part #
Features
• Removable and adjustable patellar buttress can be
positioned and trimmed for multiple applications
• Pull tabs ease application
• Mesh popliteal for patient comfort
Description
Crossover Pull-On
AG010561 STD, TriTech, Custom
AG010558STD, 3D NEO, Custom
AG010567Short, TriTech, Custom
AG010564Short, 3D NEO, Custom
RK4250XXSTD, TriTech, XS-XXL
RK3250XXSTD, 3D NEO, XS-XXL
RK4150XXShort, TriTech, XS-XXL
RK3150XXShort, 3D NEO, XS-XXL
Crossover
Pull-On
CE Marking
Part #
Description
Crossover Front Thigh
AG010563STD, TriTech, Custom
AG010560 STD, 3D Neoprene, Custom
AG010569Short, TriTech, Custom
AG010566 Short, 3D Neoprene, Custom
RK4230XXSTD, TriTech, XS-XXL
RK3230XX STD, 3D Neoprene, XS-XXL
RK4130XXShort, TriTech, XS-XXL
RK3130XX Short, 3D Neoprene, XS-XXL
Crossover FT
Crossover FT
Short
Crossover
ROM
CE Marking
Part #
Description
Crossover Front Closure
AG010562 STD, TriTech, Custom
AG010559 STD, 3D Neoprene, Custom
AG010568 Short, TriTech, Custom
AG010565 Short, 3D Neoprene, Custom
AG010571 STD, ROM, TriTech, Custom
AG010570 STD, ROM, 3D Neoprene,
Custom
RK4240XX STD, TriTech, XS-XXL
RK3240XX STD, 3D Neoprene, XS-XXL
RK0663XX Sport Hinges w/ Straps,
XS-XXL
RK4140XX Short, TriTech, XS-XXL
RK3140XX Short, 3D Neoprene, XS-XXL
RK4200XX STD, ROM, TriTech, XS-XXL
RK3200XX Standard, ROM, 3D NEO,
XS-XXL
CE Marking
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
55
Roadrunner / Shortrunner
Size #
Size
Thigh Circumference
X = 1
XS
12” – 15” (30 – 38 cm)
X = 2
S
15” – 18” (38 – 46 cm)
X = 3
M
18” – 21”
(46 – 53 cm)
X = 4
L
21” – 24”
(53 – 61 cm)
X = 5
XL
24” – 27”
(61 – 69 cm)
X = 6
XXL
27” – 30” (69 – 79 cm)
RoadRunner™ Knee Brace
The RoadRunner provides control and support for patients with ligament injuries and instabilities
and is frequently used for post-op treatment and mild OA. Measures 16” in length.
• Most ACL, PCL, MCL, LCL injuries and instabilities
• Meniscal injuries
• Mild OA
instabilities
Circumference taken 6” (15 cm) above mid patella
Features
• Available in Airmesh and Neoprene
• Polycentric hinges with adjustable flexion and
extension stops
• Sleeve and wraparound versions available
Part # Description
Airmesh
1411X
RoadRunner, Airmesh Pull-on
1414X
RoadRunner, Airmesh, Open
Back Pull-on
1415X
RoadRunner, Airmesh,
Open Back, Wraparound
Neoprene
0694X
RoadRunner, Neoprene Pull-on
0696X
RoadRunner, Neoprene,
Open Back, Pull-on
0697X
Open Back, Pull-on w/
Adjustable Horseshoe
0700X
2182X
RoadRunner, Neoprene, Patella
Stabilizer, Open Back, Pull-on
Hinge Cover
73562
Hinge Cover, Airmesh
73561
Hinge Cover, Neoprene
CE Marking
ShortRunner™ Knee Brace
Part # Description
Airmesh
2172X
ShortRunner, Airmesh Pull-on
2173X
ShortRunner, Airmesh, Open
Back Pull-on
2175X
ShortRunner, Airmesh,
Neoprene
0674X
ShortRunner, Neoprene Pull-on
0676X
ShortRunner, Neoprene,
Open Back Pull-on
0677X
Open Back, Pull-on w/
0680X
2183X
ShortRunner, Neoprene, Patella Stabilizer, Open Back, Pull-on
Hinge Cover
73562
Hinge Cover, Airmesh
73561
Hinge Cover, Neoprene
The ShortRunner provides control and support for ligament injuries and instabilities and may be
used for post-op treatment and mild OA. Measures 13” in length.
• Mild OA
instabilities
Features
• Available in Airmesh and Neoprene
extension stops
CE Marking
56
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Economy Hinged Knee
Economy Hinged Knee Brace
Size #
Size
Thigh Circumference
X = 1
XS
12” – 15” (30 – 38 cm)
X = 2
S
15” – 18” (38 – 46 cm)
X = 3
M
18” – 21”
(46 – 53 cm)
X = 4
L
21” – 24”
(53 – 61 cm)
• Mild OA
instabilities
X = 5
XL
24” – 27”
(61 – 69 cm)
X = 6
XXL
27” – 30” (69 – 79 cm)
Features
Part #
The Economy Hinged Knee is designed for patients with mild medial / lateral instabilities of
the knee and features hinges that are contained in a pocket, making it the brace of choice
for wrestling and many other contact activities with low loads. Hinges are removable for
maintenance.
• Available in Airmesh or Neoprene
• Full circumferential straps
• Pull-on and wraparound versions available
• Cost effective method for bracing the knee
Description
Airmesh
2170X
Economy Hinged Knee,
Airmesh, Pull-on
2171X
Airmesh, Open Back, Pull-on
1123X
Airmesh, Open Back,
Wraparound
Neoprene 0670X
Neoprene Pull-on
0672X
Neoprene, Open Back, Pull-on
0673X
Neoprene, Open Back w/ Adjustable Horseshoe Pull-on
1121X
Neoprene, Open Back,
Wraparound
CE Marking
Airmesh® and Neoprene
Airmesh
Airmesh is a revolutionary 3-D, latex-free
fabric that is half the weight of its Neoprene
counterpart. It provides exceptional comfort by
wicking moisture away from the body, while also
allowing for enhanced breathability. Airmesh is
recommended for patients who are required to
wear a brace for extended periods of time.
Neoprene
Breg’s soft goods are made from the highest
quality Neoprene, allowing them to hold their
shape longer than most competitors’ products.
Elastic piping along the top and bottom of
our knee supports increases durability and
improves fit.
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
57
Hinged Knee Brace
Size #
Size
Thigh Circumference
Calf Circumference
XX = 01
XS
13.5” – 16”
(34 – 41 cm)
12.5” – 14” (32 – 36 cm)
XX = 03
S
16” – 18.75” (41 – 48 cm)
14” – 15.5” (36 – 39 cm)
XX = 05
M
18.75” – 21.5”(48 – 55 cm)
15.5” – 17” (39 – 43 cm)
XX = 07
L
21.5” – 24.25”(55 – 62 cm)
17” – 18.5” (43 – 47 cm)
XX = 09
XL
24.25” – 27” (62 – 69 cm)
18.5” – 20” (47 – 51 cm)
XX = 11
XXL
27” – 29.5”
20” – 21”
(69 – 75 cm)
(51 – 53 cm)
Prefabricated: Measure 6” (15 cm) above mid-patella while standing.
Custom: Measure 2” (5 cm), 4” (10 cm), 6” (15 cm) and 8” (20 cm) above and
below mid-patella, and at knee center, while standing.
Part #
Hinged Knee Brace
Ideal for moderate levels of activity. The Hinged Knee brace provides
mild MCL and LCL support in a low-profile design. The classic pull-on
design offers a uniform fit. An adjustable horseshoe buttress can be
positioned and trimmed for multiple applications. The front thigh (FT)
version is a hybrid with pull-on calf and wraparound thigh allowing for
adjustability for atypical legs. The FT also has an adjustable horseshoe
patella buttress. The front closure (FC) wraparound design allows
for the greatest adjustability in fit and is ideal for those with limited
flexibility. The FC version does not offer the patellar buttress.
Description
• Sore knee ligaments
• Strained knee ligaments
• Sprained knee ligaments
• Patella tracking support (not FC)
Hinged Knee Pull-On
RK1003XX TriTech, XS-XXL
RK1623XX 3D Neoprene, XS-XXL
Features
• Removable polycentric hinges (extension
stops available upon request)
• Adjustable horseshoe buttress
CE Marking
Part #
Description
Hinged Knee Front Thigh
Pull-On
TriTech
CE Marking
Part #
Pull-On
3D Neoprene
Description
Hinged Knee Front Closure
Front Thigh
TriTech
58
Front Thigh
3D Neoprene
To order:
Front Closure
TriTech
Front Closure
3D Neoprene
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Cool Sport Elite Knee Brace Sizing Chart
Cool Sport Elite
The Cool Sport Elite Knee Brace is designed for moderate knee ligament instabilities. It features
medial / lateral ROM hinges that provide flexion and extension control. Made of a spacer fabric
material, the design allows for maximum breathability and comfort.
• Mild OA
instabilities
Features
extension stops
• Comfortable stretch fabric over popliteal space for
comfort
See chart on page 229 for further part number
information
Cool Sport Hinged Knee Brace
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 2
XS
11.5” – 13” (29 – 33 cm)
X = 3
S
13” – 14.5” (33 – 37 cm)
X = 4
M
14.5” – 16”
(37 – 40 cm)
X = 5
L
16” – 17.5”
(40 – 44 cm)
X = 6
XL
17.5” – 19”
(44 – 48 cm)
X = 7
XXL
19” – 20.5” (48 – 52 cm)
X = 8
3XL
20.5” – 22” (52 – 55 cm)
Circumference taken at knee joint
Part #
106745X 106746X Description
Cool Sport Elite Knee,
XS - XXXL
Cool Sport Elite A / O Knee (Wraparound), XS - XXXL
Cool Sport Hinged Knee Brace Sizing Chart
The Cool Sport Hinged Knee Brace is designed for mild / moderate ligament instabilities of
the knee and features single axis medial / lateral hinges that provide stability. The honeycomb
material is designed for breathability and comfort.
• Mild OA
instabilities
Features
• Adjustable circle or U-shaped buttress for patella
control
• Hinges covered for sport applications
• Dual circumferential control straps provide migration
control
information
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 2
XS
11.5” – 13” (29 – 33 cm)
X = 3
S
13” – 14.5” (33 – 37 cm)
X = 4
M
14.5” – 16”
(37 – 40 cm)
X = 5
L
16” – 17.5”
(40 – 44 cm)
X = 6
XL
17.5” – 19”
(44 – 48 cm)
X = 7
XXL
19” – 20.5” (48 – 52 cm)
X = 8
3XL
20.5” – 22” (52 – 55 cm)
Part #
106744X Description
Cool Sport Hinged Knee,
XS - XXXL
59
Hinged Knee Brace Sizing Chart
Hinged Knee Brace
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 2
XS
11.5” – 13” (29 – 33 cm)
X = 3
S
13” – 14.5” (33 – 37 cm)
X = 4
M
14.5” – 16”
(37 – 40 cm)
X = 5
L
16” – 17.5”
(40 – 44 cm)
X = 6
XL
17.5” – 19”
(44 – 48 cm)
X = 7
XXL
19” – 20.5” (48 – 52 cm)
The Hinged Knee Brace is designed for mild ligament instabilities of the knee and features
medial / lateral hinges that provide stability. The circular buttress provides patella control.
• Mild OA
instabilities
Part #
13171X Features
• High quality material provides gentle warmth and
compression
• Circle buttress provides patella control
• Medial and lateral hinges for extra stability
• Dual straps provide extra compression and migration
control
Description
Hinged Knee Brace,
XS – XXL
Hinged Knee Open Back Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 2
XS
12” – 13” (30 – 33 cm)
X = 3
S
13” – 14” (33 – 35 cm)
X = 4
M
14” – 15”
(35 – 38 cm)
X = 5
L
15” – 17”
(38 – 43 cm)
X = 6
XL
17” – 19”
(43 – 48 cm)
X = 7
XXL
19” – 21” (48 – 53 cm)
Part #
13761X Description
Hinged Knee Open Back,
XS – XXL
60
Hinged Knee Open Back
The Hinged Knee Open Back is designed for mild ligament instabilities of the knee and contains
medial and lateral hinges for stability. The Neoprene hinged knee sleeve offers compression and
warmth while the open back feature allows freedom of movement in the popliteal space.
instabilities
Features
• High quality, stretchable Neoprene provides warmth
and compression
• Open back to reduce bunching and pinching
• Medial and lateral hinges for extra stability
• Dual offset straps provide a secure fit and migration
control
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Select Hinged Knee Braces Sizing Chart
Select Hinged Knee Brace
Size #
Classic pull-on design in a light-duty economy brace.
• Patellar support
Features
• Removable single point aluminum hinges
• Neoprene material for support and compression
• Open popliteal for patient comfort
Size
Thigh Circumference
XX = 01 XS
13.5” – 16” (34 – 41 cm)
XX = 03 S
16” – 18.75” (41 – 48 cm)
XX = 05 M
18.75” – 21.5” (48 – 55 cm)
XX = 07 L
21.5” – 24.25” (55 – 62 cm)
XX = 09 XL
24.25” – 27” (62 – 69 cm)
XX = 11 XXL
27” – 29.5” (69 – 75 cm)
Prefabricated: Measure 6” (15 cm) above mid-patella
while standing.
Part #
RK1663XX
Description
Select Hinged Knee,
Neoprene, XS-XXL
Select Hinged Knee FC
Front closure wraparound design for easy patient application in a light-duty economy brace.
Part #
RK1763XX
Description
Select Hinged Knee Front
Closure, Neoprene, XS-XXL
Features
• Removable single point aluminum hinges
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
61
CUSTOMER
FOCUSED
Working with patients and health care providers, we develop
and bring to market products that exceed their needs. We have
a deep understanding of the market to help clinicians efficiently
manage their practices and patients get back to doing what they
love. The FreeRunner (shown at right) is the result of our market
insights to deliver a “best-in-class” Patelloremoral knee brace.
Bracing
Patellofemoral
FreeRunner knee
brace shown
69
Pa t e l l o f em o ra l B ra c ing
FreeRunner Knee Brace
Size #
Size
Leg Circumference
X = 05
XXS
11.5” – 13.5” X = 10
XS
13.5” – 15.25” (34 – 38 cm)
X = 20
S
15.25” – 17.25” (38 – 44 cm)
X = 30
M
17.25” – 19.25” (44 – 49 cm)
X = 40
L
19.25” – 21.5”
(49 – 55 cm)
X = 50
XL
21.5” – 24.5” (55 – 62 cm)
X = 60
XXL
24.5” – 27.5” (62 – 70 cm)
(29 – 34 cm)
FreeRunner™ Knee Brace
The FreeRunner knee brace is the premier soft good for patellofemoral stabilization. It
is designed for patients who have patellofemoral discomfort resulting from maltracking,
subluxation or other patellofemoral injuries. It combines a patent pending offset CAM hinge
for dynamic support and introduces innovative Smart-Zone™ compression fabrics, for a low
profile and ultra lightweight silhouette. The difference in patellofemoral bracing is dynamic; now
athletes and patients can focus on the game and not the brace.
• Patella dislocation / subluxation
• Chronic patellar maltracking
• Patellar tendonitis
• Mild chondromalacia
• Runner’s Knee
• Patellofemoral pain syndrome
• Post lateral release
Circumference taken 4” above mid patella
Part # Description
100379-1XX
100379-2XX
FreeRunner, LT
FreeRunner, RT
Features
• Dynamic stabilization. Compression in full extension
for support and relaxation in full flexion for unhindered
ROM
• Smart-Zone compression fabric; moderate compression
for anatomic support and light compression for a nonbinding fit
• Lateral buttress with superior and inferior control strap
for a personalized fit and stabilization
• Migration control with elastic banding and silicone
strips
• Breathable and lightweight, just 7 oz
• Condyle pads for increased comfort
• A high strength and tear-resistant pocket system made
of nylon hinges and foam hinge pockets
CE Marking
Scan the QR Code to learn
what’s different about the
FreeRunner Knee Brace.
breg.com/fr
breg.com/frtechnology
Learn about the FreeRunner Knee Brace
at www.breg.com.
FreeSport™ Knee Brace Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Leg Circumference
X = 05
XXS
11.5” - 13.5”
X = 10
XS
13.5” - 15.25” 34 – 38 cm
X = 20
S
15.25” - 17.25”38 – 44 cm
X = 30
M
17.25” - 19.25”44 – 49 cm
X = 40
L
19.25” - 21.50”49 – 55 cm
X = 50
XL
21.50” - 24.50”55 – 62 cm
X = 60
XXL
24.50” - 27.50”62 – 70 cm
29 – 34 cm
FreeSport™ Knee Brace
FreeSport knee braces are innovative soft goods designed for mild to moderate patellofemoral
support. They are constructed with the unique Smart-Zone™ compression fabric that delivers a
low profile and ultra-lightweight silhouette. They contain a lateral buttress that offers a comfortable
and supportive fit and are available in both a sleeve and wraparound design. The FreeSport braces
provide compression and stability so patients can maintain their activities of choice.
• Patellar maltracking
• Runner’s Knee
Circumference taken 4” above mid patella
Features
Part #
100462-1XX
100462-2XX
100463-0XX
• Smart-Zone compression fabric; moderate compression
for anatomic support and light compression for a nonbinding fit
• Lateral buttress with superior and inferior control strap
for a personalized fit and stabilization
• Migration control with dual elastic banding and silicone
strips
• Wrap-around design is universal Right / Left
• Breathable and lightweight
• A high strength and tear-resistant pocket system made
of nylon hinges and foam hinge pockets
Description
FreeSport Sleeve, LT
FreeSport Sleeve, RT
FreeSport Wrap Universal
FreeSport Sleeve
FreeSport Wrap
64
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Pate l lofe mor a l B r a c i ng
20.50 Design
Between 20° and 50° of flexion, the patella is at risk to abnormal tracking, subluxation, and
dislocation. The 20.50 Patellofemoral Brace dynamically supports the patella through this range
of flexion by increasing pressure of the bladder and underlying buttress against the lateral
border of the patella as the knee moves between 20° and 50°. The buttress is dependent on
position of the hinge and frame. When the frame is extended, the straps of the buttress are
most taut and offer the most amount of pressure and control against the patella, inhibiting
subluxation.
20.50 Patellofemoral
20.50 Size Chart
Specifically designed for patients with recurrent patella subluxations
and dislocations, the buttress offers the most support between 20° and
50° of knee flexion. This dual upright brace comes prefabricated in a
12” (30 cm) magnesium frame, and can be customized to a 14” (36 cm)
aluminum frame.
• Injuries / Hereditary diseases
to the soft tissues of the
quadriceps complex
• Subluxations / Dislocations to
the quadriceps complex
Features
Size #
Size
Thigh Circumference
Calf Circumference
XX = 01
XS
13.5” – 16”
(34 – 41 cm)
11” – 12.5”
(28 – 32 cm)
XX = 03
S
16” – 18.75”
(41 – 48 cm)
12.5” – 14”
(32 – 36 cm)
XX = 05
M
18.75” – 21.5” (48 – 55 cm)
14” – 15.5”
(36 – 39 cm)
XX = 07
L
21.5” – 24.25” (55 – 62 cm)
15.5” – 17”
(39 – 43 cm)
XX = 09
XL
24.25” – 27”
(62 – 69 cm)
17” – 18.5”
(43 – 47 cm)
XX = 11
XXL
27” – 29.5”
(69 – 75 cm)
18.5” – 20”
(47 – 51 cm)
Thigh circumference measure 6” (15 cm) above mid-patella.
Calf circumference measure 6” (15 cm) below mid-patella.
• Dynamic hinge design applies increased lateral
pressure between 20° and 50° of knee flexion
• Pneumatic air bladder over a trimmable lateral buttress
• Lightweight magnesium
• Pneumatic patellar pad allows patients to adjust for
their desired level of support
• Pivoting straps aid in preventing brace migration
• Quick-release buckles disconnect
• Custom: Fabricated from FitKit measurements, laser
scan or cast mold
Part #
Description
20.50 Patellofemoral
AG060050Custom
AG060054 OA, Custom
AG060052 Extended, Custom
AG060055 Extended, OA, Custom
PF010YXX Standard, XS-XXL
AG060053 Kit, Strap, Custom
AG060051 Kit, Pad, Custom
PF041YXX Kit, Strap, PF
PF040YXX Kit, Pad, PF
Custom color
shown
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
65
KNEESoft
SIZING
CHART
PTO
Knee
/ High Performance
Size #
Size
Thigh Circumference
X = 1
XS
12” – 15” (30 – 38 cm)
X = 2
S
15” – 18” (38 – 46 cm)
X = 3
M
18” – 21”
(46 – 53 cm)
X = 4
L
21” – 24”
(53 – 61 cm)
X = 5
XL
24” – 27”
(61 – 69 cm)
X = 6
XXL
27” – 30” (69 – 79 cm)
Part # Description
Airmesh
1419X PTO, Airmesh, Left
1418X PTO, Airmesh, Right
1423X PTO, Airmesh, Open Back, Left
1422X PTO, Airmesh, Open Back, Right
Neoprene
1417X PTO, Neoprene, Left
1416X PTO, Neoprene, Right
1421X PTO, Neoprene, Open Back, Left
1420X PTO, Neoprene, Open Back,
Right
PTO Soft Knee Brace (Patellar Tracking Orthosis)
The PTO is designed to align the knee for patients with maltracking or patella tracking
conditions. The PTO adjusts the amount of compression applied from the lateral pressure plate
by forming a soft tissue wall that controls patellar subluxation.
• Patella subluxation
• Patella dislocation
• Patella tendonitis
• Post patellar realignment
Features
• Available in Airmesh or Neoprene, shown in Airmesh
• Open back or closed back options available
• Dynamic function for normal gait
CE Marking
PTO High Performance Knee Brace
Part # Description
Neoprene High Performance 1425X PTO, Neoprene, High
Performance, Left
1424X PTO, Neoprene, High
Performance, Right
Performance, Open Back, Left
Performance, Open Back, Right
Airmesh High Performance 1427X PTO, Airmesh, High
Performance, Left
1426X PTO, Airmesh, High
Performance, Right
Performance, Open Back, Left
Performance, Open Back, Right
The Breg PTO High Performance combines exceptional patellar tracking functionality with the
added benefit of increased medial and lateral stability provided by aluminum hinge bars. This
brace is ideal for active individuals and athletes.
• Patella dislocation
• Patella tendonitis
• Post patellar realignment
Features
• Available in Airmesh or Neoprene, shown in Neoprene
• Open back or closed back options available
• Available with aluminum high performance hinge bars
• Dynamic function for normal gait
• Removable hinge bars
Accessories
7181X PTO High Performance
Sports Cover
7179X PTO HP Replacement Bar Kit,
Left
7180X PTO HP Replacement Bar Kit,
Right
(Only PTO HP bars are removable)
CE Marking
66
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Crossover PT / Hinged LPS / LPS
Crossover PT
Size #
Designed for high performance, the Crossover PT provides lateral support of the patella. The
hybrid design, with a pull-on calf and front-closure thigh, allows patients easy adjustment and
placement of the patellar buttress.
• Patellofemoral disorders
• Lateral patellar subluxation
• Dislocations
• Lateral patellofemoral malalignment
• Mild MCL and LCL support
Features
3D Neoprene
• Pneumatic patellar pad allows patients to adjust for
their desired level of support
• Heavy-duty polycentric hinges adjust for range-ofmotion control using extension stops provided
• MCL and LCL support is also provided
Hinged LPS
For moderate levels of activity, the Hinged LPS provides lateral patellar support as well as mild
MCL and LCL support.
• Patella tracking support
• Mild MCL and LCL support
Size
Thigh Circumference
XX = 01 XS
13.5” – 16” (34 – 41 cm)
XX = 03 S
16” – 18.75” (41 – 48 cm)
XX = 05 M
18.75” – 21.5” (48 – 55 cm)
XX = 07 L
21.5” – 24.25” (55 – 62 cm)
XX = 09 XL
24.25” – 27” (62 – 69 cm)
XX = 11 XXL
27” – 29.5” (69 – 75 cm)
Measure 6” (15 cm) above mid-patella while standing
Part #
Description
RK022YXX Crossover PT, Tritech, XS-XXL
RK012YXX Crossover PT, 3D Neoprene,
XS-XXL
Part #
Description
RK173YXX Hinged LPS, TriTech, XS-XXL
RK183YXX Hinged LPS, 3D Neoprene,
XS-XXL
CE Marking
Features
• Low-profile polycentric hinges can be removed for
laundering (extension stops available upon request)
• Removable and adjustable patellar buttress can be
positioned and trimmed for multiple applications
• Lateral pull strap adds patellar support
3D Neoprene
Lateral Patella Stabilizer
Low profile sleeve provides lateral support of the patella.
• Dislocations
Features
Part #
SA621YXX
SA611YXX
Description
Lateral Patella Stabilizer,
TriTech, XS-XXL
Lateral Patella Stabilizer,
3D Neoprene, XS-XXL
CE Marking
• Tubular lateral “J” buttress provides patellar
stabilization
• Angular strapping adds stability
• Medial pile design ensures maximum adjustability
• Two medial and two lateral flexible spiral stays
3D Neoprene
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
67
Lateral Stabilizer
Size #
Size
Thigh Circumference
X = 1
XS
12” – 15” (30 – 38 cm)
X = 2
S
15” – 18” (38 – 46 cm)
X = 3
M
18” – 21”
(46 – 53 cm)
X = 4
L
21” – 24”
(53 – 61 cm)
X = 5
XL
24” – 27”
(61 – 69 cm)
X = 6
XXL
27” – 30” (69 – 79 cm)
Lateral Stabilizer with Hinge Soft Knee Brace
The Lateral Stabilizer with Hinge offers a strong tubular, lateral buttress that is for lateral
stabilization of the patella and is commonly used by patients with patellofemoral conditions. The
ultra low profile hinge helps address valgus movement.
• Lateral patella subluxation
Features
• Available in Airmesh and Neoprene, shown in Airmesh
• Low profile design allows for improved patient
compliance
• J-shaped buttress provides lateral patellar stabilization
• Inferior and superior straps provide additional
compression
Part # Description
Airmesh
2012X
Lateral Stabilizer with Hinge, Airmesh Left*
2014X
Lateral Stabilizer with Hinge, Airmesh Right*
Neoprene
2015X
Lateral Stabilizer with Hinge, Neoprene Left*
2017X
Lateral Stabilizer with Hinge, Neoprene Right*
* Hinges are narrower on XS and S
Lateral Stabilizer Soft Knee Brace
The Lateral Stabilizer offers a strong tubular, lateral buttress that is for lateral stabilization of the
patella and is commonly used by patients with patellofemoral conditions.
Part # Description
• Lateral patella subluxation
Airmesh
1104X
Lateral Stabilizer, Airmesh, Left
1105X
Lateral Stabilizer, Airmesh,
Right
Neoprene
0708X
Lateral Stabilizer, Neoprene,
Left
0707X
Lateral Stabilizer, Neoprene,
Right
Features
• Available in Airmesh and Neoprene, shown in
Neoprene
• Low profile design allows for improved patient
compliance
• J-shaped buttress provides lateral patellar stabilization
• Inferior and superior straps provide additional
compression
CE Marking
Performance Lateral Support
The Performance Lateral Support offers compression and mild support for patella instability.
Size #
Size
Thigh Circumference
X = 2
XS
12” – 13” (30 – 33 cm)
X = 3
S
13” – 14” (33 – 35 cm)
X = 4
M
14” – 15”
(35 – 40 cm)
X = 5
L
15” – 17”
(40 – 43 cm)
• Mild knee sprains
• Chondromalacia
• Mild patellofemoral osteoarthritis
• Osgood-Schlatter disease
X = 6
XL
17” – 19”
(43 – 48 cm)
Features
X = 7
XXL
19” – 21” (48 – 53 cm)
Part #
13271X
Description
Performance Lateral
Support, XS – XXL
• Open patella with circle buttress (removable)
• Two medial and lateral stays with an anterior panel
• “J” buttress and dynamic patellar pull
information
CE Marking
68
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Adjustable Horseshoe / Adjustable Donut
The removable horseshoe buttress can be positioned to stabilize the patella from a medial,
lateral, inferior or superior position.
Features
• Straps above and below knee
• Medial and lateral stays help prevent migration
• Also available with an open back
Size #
Size
Thigh Circumference
X = 1
XS
12” – 15” (30 – 38 cm)
X = 2
S
15” – 18” (38 – 46 cm)
X = 3
M
18” – 21”
(46 – 53 cm)
X = 4
L
21” – 24”
(53 – 61 cm)
X = 5
XL
24” – 27”
(61 – 69 cm)
X = 6
XXL
27” – 30” (69 – 79 cm)
Part # Description
0711X
0713X
Adjustable Horseshoe,
Open Back
CE Marking
Adjustable Donut Soft Knee Brace
The Adjustable Donut is a low profile and cost-effective alternative to other patella supports.
The tubular patella donut can be trimmed to provide patellar support from any direction.
Features
• Low profile knee brace
• Donut can be trimmed to provide customized
support
Part # Description
0711X
0713X
Adjustable Horseshoe,
Open Back
CE Marking
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
69
Patella Stabilizers Size Chart
Size #
Size
Thigh Circumference
XX = 01 XS
13.5” – 16” (34 – 41 cm)
XX = 03 S
16” – 18.75” (41 – 48 cm)
XX = 05 M
18.75” – 21.5” (48 – 55 cm)
XX = 07 L
21.5” – 24.25” (55 – 62 cm)
XX = 09 XL
24.25” – 27” (62 – 69 cm)
XX = 11 XXL
27” – 29.5” (69 – 75 cm)
Select Lateral Patella Stabilizer
Economy sleeve provides lateral support of the patella. Neoprene material for support and
compression.
• Dislocations
Part #
Description
SA631YXX Select Lateral Patella
Stabilizer, Neoprene, XS-XXL
CE Marking
Part #
Description
SA6340XX Select Reinforced Patella Stabilizer, Horseshoe,
Neoprene, XS-XXL
SA6150XX Select Reinforced Patella Stabilizer, Donut, Neoprene,
XS-XXL
Select Reinforced Patella Stabilizer
Economy sleeve provides patellar support. Neoprene material for support and compression.
• Stabilize and improve patella tracking
Features
• Prefabricated, XS – XXL
• With horseshoe or donut buttress
Part #
SA6240XX
SA6140XX
Description
Reinforced Patella Stabilier,
TriTech, XS-XXL
Reinforced Patella Stabilier,
3D Neoprene, XS-XXL
Reinforced Patella Stabilizer
Low profile sleeve provides support of the patella.
• Stabilize and improve patella tracking
Features
• Sewn-in tubular horseshoe buttress
• Adjustable circumferential straps provide stability
and compression
• Two medial and two lateral flexible spiral stays
• Prefabricated, XS – XXL
• TriTech or 3D Neoprene
CE Marking
3D Neoprene
70
Tritech
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Patella Stabilizer
Patella Stabilizer Soft Knee Brace
The Patella Stabilizer features a fixed tubular U-shaped buttress for patients with mild instability
of the patella.
• Chondromalacia
Features
• Fixed U-shaped buttress
• Lightweight 3 mm Neoprene
Size
Thigh Circumference
X = 1
XS
12” – 15” (30 – 38 cm)
X = 2
S
15” – 18” (38 – 46 cm)
X = 3
M
18” – 21”
(46 – 53 cm)
X = 4
L
21” – 24”
(53 – 61 cm)
X = 5
XL
24” – 27”
(61 – 69 cm)
X = 6
XXL
27” – 30” (69 – 79 cm)
Part # Description
0723X
Patella Stabilizer
CE Marking
Patella Tendon Strap
The Patella Tendon Strap provides support for patients with patellar tendonitis.
• Patellar tendonitis (known as “Jumper’s knee”)
• Chondromalacia
Features
• Strap does not impede circulation or restrict mobility
• Strap functions dynamically as knee flexes and extends
• Easy to apply and adjust
Size #
Size
Knee Circumference
X = 1
XS
9” – 10.5” (22 – 26 cm)
X = 2
S
10.5” – 12” (26 – 30 cm)
X = 3
M
12” – 13.5” (30 – 34 cm)
X = 4
L
13” – 14.5” (34 – 36 cm)
X = 5
XL
14.5” – 16” (36 – 40 cm)
Circumference taken at joint line (distal to the patella)
Part # Description
9653X
CE Marking
Tendon Strap
Tendon Strap Size Chart
Buttress eases the tension of chronic inflammation of the patellar tendon. May also be used on
the arm to relieve the pain of “tennis elbow.”
• Chondromalacia
Features
• Padded buttress relieves point specific pain
• Sharkskin material reduces migration
• Prefabricated, XS – XL
Size #
Size
Circumference Below the Patella
XX = 01 XS
10” – 11” (25 – 28 cm)
XX = 03 S
11” – 12” (28 – 30 cm)
XX = 05 M
12” – 13” (30 – 33 cm)
XX = 07 L
13” – 15” (33 – 38 cm)
XX = 09 XL
15” – 17” (38 – 43 cm)
Part #
Description
SA6050XX Tendon Strap, XS-XL
CE Marking
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
71
PF Unloader
Size #
Size
Circ. below Patella
X = 1
XS
Less than 10”
X = 2
S
10” – 12.5”
X = 3
M
12.5” – 14.5”
X = 4
L
14.5” – 16.5”
X = 5
XL
16.5” – 18”
X = 6
XXL
18” – 21”
PF Unloader
The PF Unloader knee band provides support for patients with patellar tendonitis.
• Chondromalacia
Features
• Strap does not impede circulation or restrict mobility
• Strap functions dynamically as knee flexes and extends
• Easy to apply and adjust
Part # Description
1194X
PF Unloader
CE Marking
Hi-Performance Knit Support
Size #
Size
Thigh Circumference
X = 1
XS
15” – 16 1 / 8”
X = 2
S
16 1 / 8” – 17 3 / 8”
X = 3
M
17 3 / 8” – 18.5”
X = 4
L
18.5” – 19.75”
X = 5
XL
19.75” – 20 7 / 8”
(50 – 53 cm)
X = 6
XXL
20 7 / 8” – 22”
(53 – 56 cm)
(38 – 41 cm)
(41 – 44 cm)
(44 – 47 cm)
(47 – 50 cm)
The Hi-Performance Knit Support provides compression, warmth, and patella stabilization. It
features three-dimensional knitting for a breathable, comfortable fit and a contoured silicone
patella donut for support.
• Chondromalacia
Circumference taken 5.5” (14 cm) above mid patella
Part # Description
2804X
Features
• Breathable three-dimensional knit
• Silicone patella donut
• Medial and lateral stays to help prevent migration
CE Marking
Knee Support
Size #
Size
Thigh Circumference
X = 1
XS
12” – 15” (30 – 38 cm)
X = 2
S
15” – 18” (38 – 46 cm)
X = 3
M
18” – 21”
(46 – 53 cm)
X = 4
L
21” – 24”
(53 – 61 cm)
X = 5
XL
24” – 27”
(61 – 69 cm)
X = 6
XXL
27” – 30” (69 – 79 cm)
Part # Description
0702X
Knee Support, Neoprene
084X0
Knee Support, Neoprene,
Padded
086X0
Padded, Open Back
0704X
Open Patella
085X0
Padded, Open Patella
087X0
Open Patella, Open Back
Knee Support
The Knee Support provides compression and warmth. Also available with additional padding
over patella.
• Chondromalacia
Features
• Available with additional padding over the front
of the knee
• Open patella and open back options available
CE Marking
72
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Padded Knee Support Size Chart
Padded Knee Support
Low profile 13” (33 cm) basic sleeve with anterior pad for additional support.
Size # Size
Thigh Circumference
XX = 01
XS
13.5” – 16” (34 – 41 cm)
XX = 03 S
16” – 18.75” (41 – 48 cm)
• For sore, strained or sprained knee ligaments
XX = 05 M
18.75” – 21.5” (48 – 55 cm)
Features
XX = 07 L
21.5” – 24.25” (55 – 62 cm)
XX = 09 XL
24.25” – 27” (62 – 69 cm)
XX = 11 XXL
27” – 29.5” (69 – 75 cm)
• Patella cut-out
• Anterior pad provides additional support and
compression
• Optional horseshoe buttress
Part #
SA6270XX
SA6170XX
TriTech
Padded Knee Support,
TriTech, XS–XXL
Padded Knee Support,
3D Neoprene, XS–XXL
3D Neoprene
CE Marking
Adjustable Horseshoe Buttress Size Chart
Low profile 13” (33 cm) sleeve with adjustable horseshoe patellar buttress.
Size # Size
Thigh Circumference
XX = 01 XS
13.5” – 16” (34 – 41 cm)
• For sore, strained or sprained knee ligaments and
patella tracking support
XX = 03 S
16” – 18.75” (41 – 48 cm)
XX = 05 M
18.75” – 21.5” (48 – 55 cm)
Features
XX = 07 L
21.5” – 24.25” (55 – 62 cm)
• Adjustable horseshoe buttress can be positioned and
trimmed for multiple applications
compression
XX = 09 XL
24.25” – 27” (62 – 69 cm)
XX = 11 XXL
27” – 29.5” (69 – 75 cm)
TriTech
Description
Part #
Description
SA6280XX Adjustable Horseshoe
Buttress, TriTech, XS–XXL
SA6180XX Adjustable Horseshoe
Buttress, 3D Neoprene,
XS–XXL
3D Neoprene
CE Marking
Patella Donut
Patella Donut Size Chart
Low profile 13” (33 cm) sleeve with adjustable horseshoe patellar buttress.
Size # Size
Thigh Circumference
XX = 01 XS
13.5” – 16” (34 – 41 cm)
XX = 03 S
16” – 18.75” (41 – 48 cm)
XX = 05 M
18.75” – 21.5” (48 – 55 cm)
XX = 07 L
21.5” – 24.25” (55 – 62 cm)
XX = 09 XL
24.25” – 27” (62 – 69 cm)
XX = 11 XXL
27” – 29.5” (69 – 75 cm)
Features
• Sewn-in tubular donut buttress
compression
Part #
Description
SA6260XX Patella Donut, TriTech,
XS–XXL
SA6160XX Patella Donut, 3D Neoprene,
XS–XXL
3D Neoprene
CE Marking
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
73
Padded Sleeve Size Chart
Size # Size
Thigh Circumference
XX = 01 XS
9.75” – 11” (25 cm – 28 cm)
XX = 03 S
11” – 12.25” (28 cm – 31 cm)
XX = 05 M
12.25” – 13.5” (31 cm – 34 cm)
XX = 07 L
13.5” – 14.75” (34 cm – 37 cm)
XX = 09 XL
14.75” – 16” (37 cm – 41 cm)
XX = 11 XXL
16” – 17.5” (41 cm – 44 cm)
Padded Sleeve
Padded sleeve provides cushion and protection. Durable foam construction is designed to
withstand up to the toughest of conditions.
• Protection from contusions, bone bruises,
Osgood-Schlatter disease, tendonitis and bursitis.
Features
• Foam pad protects the patella and patellar tendon
• Neoprene anterior for compression
• Soft TriTech™ material posterior for breathability and
freedom of movement
• Low-profile seams minimize irritation
Measure 5” above mid-patella
Part #
Description
AE0610XX Padded Sleeve, XS-3XL
Knee Support, Patella Donut, Select Knee
Knee Support
Low profile 13” (33 cm) length with 3D Neoprene material for support, compression and warmth.
Size # Size
Thigh Circumference
XX = 01
XS
13.5” – 16” (34 – 41 cm)
XX = 03
S
16” – 18.75” (41 – 48 cm)
XX = 05
M
18.75” – 21.5” (48 – 55 cm)
XX = 07
L
21.5” – 24.25” (55 – 62 cm)
XX = 09
XL
24.25” – 27” (62 – 69 cm)
XX = 11
XXL
27” – 29.5” (69 – 75 cm)
Measure 6” (15 cm) above mid-patella while standing.
Part #
Description
SA6090XX Knee Support, 3D Neoprene,
XS-XXL
Select Patella Donut
Economy sleeve with sewn-in patellar donut.
CE Marking
Part #
patella tracking support.
Features
Description
• Sewn-in tubular donut buttress
SA6360XX Select Patella Donut,
Neoprene, XS-XXL
CE Marking
Select Knee Support
Economy sleeve made of neoprene for support, compression, and warmth.
Part #
Description
SA6370XX Select Knee Support,
w / Patella Cutout, Neoprene,
XS-XXL
SA6390XX Select Knee Support, Closed Patella, Neoprene, XS-XXL
patella tracking support.
CE Marking
Open Patella
Version
74
Closed Patella
Version
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Knee Sleeve Open Patella Sizing Chart
Knee Sleeve Open Patella
The knee sleeve delivers compression and warmth with an open patella feature for mild support.
• Chondromalacia
information
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 2
XS
12” – 13”
(30 – 33 cm)
X = 3
S
13” – 14”
(33 – 35 cm)
X = 4
M
14” – 15”
(35 – 40 cm)
X = 5
L
15” – 17”
(40 – 43 cm)
X = 6
XL
17” – 19”
(43 – 48 cm)
X = 7
XXL
19” – 21”
(48 – 53 cm)
Part #
Description
13061X Knee Sleeve Open Patella,
XS – XXL
Knee Support Universal Horseshoe
The Knee Support Universal Horseshoe provides compression and warmth. The universal
horseshoe allows additional support for the patella.
Part #
Description
133000
Knee Support Universal
Horseshoe
• Chondromalacia
information
Thigh Support
Breg’s Thigh Support offers warmth, compression and support for hamstring, quadriceps or
groin injuries.
• Sprains and strains of the hamstring, quadriceps and
groin muscles
Features
• Offered in six sizes, ranging from 8.25” to 10.375” in
length
Thigh Support
Size #
Size
Thigh Circumference
X = 1
XS
17” – 19”
(43 – 48 cm)
X = 2
S
19” – 20”
(48 – 51 cm)
X = 3
M
20” – 22”
(51 – 56 cm)
X = 4
L
22” – 25”
(56 – 64 cm)
X = 5
XL
25” – 28”
(64 – 71 cm)
X = 6
XXL
28” – 31”
(71 – 79 cm)
Circumference taken at mid thigh
Length increases with size from 8.25” – 10.375”
Part # Description
1114X
Thigh Support
CE Marking
.25” Horseshoe Pads (12-pack)
These soft felt horseshoe pads can be repositioned for customized patella support.
•Patellar tendonitis
•Chondromalacia
Part # Description
131000 .25” Horseshoe Pads,
12-pack
Features
•Easily removable and repositionable
•Latex free
•5 (h) X 5.5 (w)
•Available for use on the following knee braces:
o Knee Support Universal Horseshoe
o Lateral Stabilizing Support
o Knee Sleeve Open Patella
o Hinged Knee Sleeve Circle Buttress
information
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
75
DO IT RIGHT
We strive to produce high quality work the first time. This is
a cultural value that guides our actions and is apparent in our
products and services.
Bracing
Hip
T Scope Hip
brace shown
18
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
17
Breg braces and Tony Schneider.
They make the difference between
RIDING THE BENCH
and playing with
CONFIDENCE.
Tony Schneider
Breg Sales Representative,
RSW Medical
“Tony is extremely valuable. He helps keep our athletes in
top condition and on the field.”
Scott Bierscheid, ATC, Collegiate Head Athletic Trainer
“Breg has made great technical advancements in bracing athletic injuries,”
says certified athletic trainer Scott Bierscheid. “Their braces fit perfectly, provide
outstanding protection, and our players appreciate the comfort. Tony is extremely
knowledgeable in this area and makes excellent recommendations. Together, they
help get our players back on the field. And that makes me — and the head coach —
very happy.”
For more information go to www.breg.com or call Breg today at 800-897-BREG (2734).
No fee was paid for this testimonial.
BREG STORY
TonyTo Schneider
Order:
To Order:
Breg (800)
Breg (800)
897-2734
321-0607
|
Bledsoe
|
Bledsoe
(888) (888)
253-3763
253-3763
Pos t- O p Hi p B r a c i ng
Hip Bracing Sizing Chart
T Scope Post-Op Hip Brace
®
The Breg T Scope Post-Op Hip brace delivers a patient-centric design to provide unprecedented
comfort, simplicity and support during post-operative hip rehabilitation. Developed in
conjunction with industry-leading physicians specializing in injuries, instabilities, and arthroscopic
surgery of the hip, the T Scope Post-Op Hip brace incorporates Breg’s premium and time-tested
technologies. It features Breg’s telescoping design for a fast, universal fit; the patented T Scope
Range-of-Motion hinge with quick-adjusting stops; a “Quick Lock” to lock out brace positions
with the push of a button; and a unique waist compression lacing system that gives patients an
easy “one-handed pull” to provide an intimate fit and offer additional back support. Padding
throughout the brace, and thoughtful details, like cushioned hand protection when using
crutches and easy to use features, help ensure patient compliance.
• Hip arthroscopy
• Femular Acetabular Impingement (FAI)
• Gluteus medius repairs
• Hamstring repairs
• Hip labral repair and resection
• Hip capsulotomy
• Loose / Foreign body removal
• Psoas release
• Microfracture procedures
Size Waist Circumference
Small
24” – 31”
Standard 31” – 60”
Part # Description
08910 08911 08912 08913 08914 08915 08916 08917 08918 08919 08920 T Scope Hip, Left
T Scope Hip, Right
T Scope Hip Small, Left
T Scope Hip Small, Right
T Scope Hip Full Kit, Left
T Scope Hip Full Kit, Right
T Scope Hip Full Kit Small, Left
T Scope Hip Full Kit Small, Right
T Scope Hip Surgical Pad Kit
Universal size on boots
T Scope Hip Surgical Boots
Universal size on boots
T Scope Hip Surgical Pillow
CE Marking
Features
• Easy to use ROM hinge with quick-adjusting flexion and
extension stops
• Easy to use Quick Lock allows the brace to be locked
out at -10°, 0°, 10°, 20° and 30° of hip flexion with the
push of a button
• Stiff telescoping bars limit hip abduction and adduction
(15° abduction built in)
• Semi-rigid cuffs help maintain control of the femur
• Telescoping waist and thigh sleeves for sizing a wide
range of patients
• Removable waist belt that can double as an SI belt for
back support following recovery
• Comfortable padding throughout the brace, including
pads on the lateral (outside) side of the hinge and cuff
to protect patient’s hands while using crutches
Product Specs
• Small size fits waist sizes from 24”to 31”; Regular size fits waist sizes from 31” to 60”
• Telescoping waist and thigh cuffs allow brace to fit patients from 5’ to 6’4”
• Weighs 1.9 lbs
• Thigh strap will accommodate up to a 35” thigh circumference
• The Surgical Pad Kit, including Surgical Boots and Surgical Pillow, is available as part of the Full
Kit or sold separately; these items are used both as part of the hip arthroscopy procedure and
for post-operative rehabilitation
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
79
Po st -O p H i p B ra c ing
Philippon Hip
SizeMeasurements
Short
Under 5’4” (under 163 cm)
Regular 5’4” and taller (163 cm and taller)
Part #
Philippon Hip
Designed to allow controlled hip flexion in 15° increments from -30° to 105°. Can be locked in
any position from -30° to 60°.
Description
• Post op and non surgical use
• Hip instability
• Joint revisions
• Joint reconstruction
• Stable hip fractures
• ROM control
Philippon Hip
AT090Y05 Post-op, Regular
AT090105 Hip Brace, Philippon,
Regular, Left
AT090205 Hip Brace, Philippon,
Regular, Right AT090Y15 Post-op, Short
AT090115 Hip Brace, Philippon, Short,
Left
AT090215 Hip Brace, Philippon, Short,
Right AT093Y05 Post-Op Package (Philippon, Positioning Kit &
Post Pad), Regular
AT093105 Hip Brace, Philippon, W/P&P,
Regular, Left
AT093205 Hip Brace, Philippon, W/P&P,
Regular, Right
AT093Y15 Post-Op Package (Philippon, Positioning Kit &
Post Pad),Short
AT093115 Hip Brace, Philippon, W/P&P, Short, Left
AT093215 Hip Brace, Philippon, W/P&P, Short, Right
AT091005 Positioning Kit, Universal
AT092005 Positioning Kit w/ Post Pad,
Universal
AT092000 Post Pad, Universal
Features
• Optional KAF Positioning Kit and Post Pad protects
patients during and after hip surgery
• Malleable arms bend for abduction purposes
• Low profile design
• Malleable waist and leg cuffs
CE Marking
KAF Positioning Kit
Post-Op Simple Hinge
80
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Pos t- O p Hi p B r a c i ng
Centron Hip Size Chart
Centron Hip™
SizeHip
The Centron Hip is a lightweight, effective hip abduction orthosis for hip
stabilization after a revision, total prosthetic replacement of the hip or
hip dislocation. The universal components can be ordered separately or
as a complete assembled product.
• Chronic dislocation stabilization
• Arthroscopic hip repairs
• Total hip revisions
• Hip joint surgeries
• Hip joint injuries
• ROM control
Waist
19.5” – 24” (50 – 61 cm) 16.5” – 21” (42 – 79 cm)
SM
26” – 32” (66 – 81 cm)
22” – 28” (56 – 71 cm)
15” – 19” (38 – 48 cm)
MD 32” – 38” (81 – 97 cm)
28” – 34” (71 – 86 cm)
18” – 22” (46 – 56 cm)
34” – 40” (86 – 102 cm)
21” – 25” (53 – 64 cm)
LG
38” – 44” (97 – 112 cm)
44” – 50” (112 – 127 cm) 40” – 46” (102 – 117 cm) 24” – 28” (61 – 71 cm)
XXL 50” – 56” (127 –142 cm) 46” – 52” (117 – 132 cm) 24” – 28” (61 – 71 cm)
3XL 56” – 62” (142 – 157 cm) 52” –58” (132 – 147 cm)
27” – 31” (69 – 79 cm)
Part #
Description
CEN-SIZE
Centron Hip Abduction, Complete
HIP-PEL-PED1 Centron Hip Abduction,
Pelvic, Pediatric
HIP-PEL-SIZE
Centron Hip Abduction, Pelvic
HIP-THI-PED1 Centron Hip Abduction, Thigh Cuff, Pediatric HIP-THI-SIZE
Centron Hip Abduction, Thigh Cuff HIP-JNT-SHIM Centron, Joint, Shim Kit,
1/4” Outset
HIP-JNT
Centron, Joint, Std
Upper, Std Lower Bar
HIP-JNT-LLB
Centron, Joint, Std
Upper, Long Lower Bar
HIP-JNT-LUB-LLBCentron, Joint, Long
HIP-JNT-LUB-XLBCentron, Joint, Long
Upper, Xlong Lower Bar
HIP-JNT-SUB
Centron, Joint, Short
HIP-JNT-SUB-LLBCentron, Joint, Short
HIP-JNT-SUB-SLBCentron, Joint, Short
Upper, Short Lower Bar
HIP-JNT-XLB
Centron, Joint, Std
Upper, Xlong Lower Bar
HIP-JNT-XUB-XLBCentron, Joint, Xlong
• Universal left or right
• Infinite abduction degrees
• Front and rear circumferential sizing
Thigh Cuff
11.25” – 14.25” (29 – 36 cm)
XL
Features
Pelvic Girdle
Thigh
XS
Hip Joint
CE Marking
Simple Pelvic
Simple Pelvic Size Chart
Designed to allow controlled hip flexion in 15° increments from -30°.
Malleable arms can be formed for slight abduction.
• Arthroscopic hip repairs
• Total hip revisions
• Hip joint surgeries
• Hip joint injuries
• ROM control
Size #
Size
Leg Length
ILIAC Circumference
Thigh Circumference
XX = 01
S
22”-26” (56-66 cm)
38” Max (97 cm)
26”
(66 cm)
XX = 03
M
26”-30” (66-76 cm)
45” Max (114 cm)
30”
(76 cm)
XX = 05
L
30”-34” (76-86 cm)
55” Max (140 cm)
34” Max (86cm)
Features
• Pelvic Attachment easily converts to HKAFO with
Original Post-Op Knee and Hi Top Boot
Part #
AT0131XXBB
AT0132XXBB
AT0101XXBB
AT0102XXBB
Description
Simple Pelvic, Left
Simple Pelvic, Right
Pelvic Attachment, Left
Pelvic Attachment, Right
CE Marking
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
81
ADVANCED DESIGN
The Genesis is an ultra-lightweight full shell walker. The hard shell
exterior and breathable inner liner provides comfort as well as
stabilization to the foot and ankle. The tread design has an extremely
low heel height – similar to a standard shoe – designed to promote a
natural gait from heel strike to toe off.
•
Ankle
Bracing
Foot
Genesis Full Shell
Walker shown
Our range of motion boot
GOES TO 30˚
Our range of caring goes
MUCH FARTHER.
Holly Degner Tata has a chronic pain condition,
Reflexive Sympathetic Dystrophy (RSD).
After two surgeries in four months, the Breg Controlled Range of Motion walker boot
was critical in her regaining mobility. According to Holly, Breg’s customer service was also
outstanding: “They’ve been incredibly kind and responsive and supportive. Over the years,
I’ve dealt with many medical companies and Breg is one of the very best.” Today, Holly is
doing well and heading to New York City for a chronic-pain walkathon in which she will, we’re
pleased to report, walk.
BREG STORY
Holly Degner Tata
Wal ke r / An kle / F oot B r a c i ng
Walking Boot Design: A Gait Analysis Study
Fabian E. Pollo, PhD, Tracy L. Gowling, Robert W. Jackson, MD
This study investigated the effect of various short-leg walking boot
designs on walking. Four commercially available walking boots
and a synthetic walking cast were tested using three-dimensional
gait analysis to determine their effect on a normal individual’s gait
pattern. Temporal-spatial parameters and lower limb kinematics and
kinetics were analyzed for 10 normal subjects. The synthetic walking
cast was the most different when compared with the shoe condition
with respect to all the parameters tested. The Bledsoe walking boot
was the only boot that was not significantly different from the shoe
condition for all parameters tested.
their synthetic cast counterpart. Third, walking boots allow both the
injured limb and the boot to be cleaned when necessary. Finally, as
demonstrated in this study, walking boots have a less adverse effect
on kinematic and kinetic gait patterns than a synthetic walking cast.
Results: Walking boots offer several advantages over a synthetic
walking cast. First, walking boots can be removed easily to allow
range-of-motion exercises and direct visualization of the injured area.
Second, the cost of these walking boots has reached levels well below
This work was supported by a grant from Bledsoe Brace Systems Inc.
Lower Heel Height
Computer-Designed
Rocker
Because these boots can be worn for long periods of time, their
effects on gait patterns at other joints can become an important issue.
Fabian E. Pollo, PhD Tracy L. Gowling Robert W. Jackson, MD.
“Walking Boot Design: A Gait Analysis Study”. From the Department
of Orthopedic Surgery, Baylor University Medical Center, Dallas, Texas.
Reprint requests: Fabian Pollo, PhD, Dept. of Orthopedic Surgery,
Baylor University Medical Center, Dallas, TX 75246
Narrow Heel
Natural Stance
Aluminum Arms
Bledsoe Boot: Computer
designed rocker bottom makes
for a smooth transition at every
stance of the gait cycle
Heel Strike
Mid-Stance
To order:
Swing Phase
Toe Off
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
85
Wa l ke r / A nk le / Fo o t Bra c ing
Genesis Full Shell Walker Size Chart
Size #
Size Men’s Shoe Size Women’s Shoe Size
XX = 01
XS
1
2
XX = 03 S
2 – 4
3–5
XX = 05 M
5 – 7
6–8
XX = 07 L
8 – 10
9 – 11
XX = 09 XL
11 – 14
12 – 15
Genesis Full Shell Walker
The Genesis Walker is the lightest full shell pneumatic walker on the market. It has been
computer engineered to provide strength where required while eliminating extra weight. Similar
to popular athletic shoes, the Genesis Walker uses a dynamic air chamber in the heel of the
tread which actively absorbs the shock of heel strike and allows for a more comfortable walking
experience.
• Ankle sprains and strains
• Forefoot sprains
• Stable foot fractures
• Distal tibial fractures
Part #
Description
BL5150XX Genesis 3-Strap, XS-XL
BL5140XX Genesis 4-Strap, XS-XL
Features
• Built-in air pump
• Durable hard shell design
• Trim-able shell
• Narrow heel width
• Dynamic air stride technology
• Dual air chambers
• Scalloped no-slip tread
CE Marking
ProGait Plus, ProGait Size Chart
Size #
XX = 01 XS
1 – 2.5
1 – 3.5
XX = 03 S
2.5 – 5.5
3.5 – 6
XX = 05 M
5.5 – 9
6 – 9.5
XX = 07 L
9 – 12.5
9.5 – 13
XX = 09 XL
12.5 - 17
13+
Part #
AL5320XX
AL5740XX
AL5520XX
AL5750XX
ProGait Plus
The ProGait Plus walker boot has all of the features and quality you have come to expect from
Bledsoe. The pneumatic quick-pimp liner enhances patient comfort. The Optional EZ Set Hinge
allows for fast and easy range of motion adjustments. The strong and durable aluminum shell
provides a thick foam innersole to cushion the foot.
Description
ProGait Plus, XS-XL, Black
EZ Set Hinge, XS-XL, Black
Mid-Calf, XS-XL, Black
Mid-Calf, EZ Set Hinge,
XS-XL, Black
Features
• Pneumatic quick-pump liner encompasses the forefoot,
ankle, and leg for complete immobilization and
increased patient comfort
• Push-button release eases patient doffing
• Bulb placement prevents self-inflation, common with
competitor models
CE Marking
Optional EZ Set
Hinge
Part #
Description
AL032000
ProGait, XXS
AL0320XXBB ProGait, XS-XL
AL232000
W/ Air, XXS
AL2320XXBB W/ Air, XS-XL
AL0740XXBB W/ EZ Set Hinge, XS-XL
AL2740XXBB W/ EZ Set Hinge w/ Air,
XS-XL
AL0520XXBB Mid-Calf, XS-XL
AL2520XXBB Mid-Calf w/ Air, XS-XL
AL0750XXBB Mid-Calf w/ EZ Set Hinge,
XS-XL
AL2750XXBB Mid-Calf w/ EZ Set Hinge,
w/ Air, XS-XL
CE Marking
86
Optional EZ Set Hinge
Easy-to-adjust hinge allows for range of motion. It can
also be used to fix the foot in dorsiflexion or plantar
flexion.
ProGait™
The ProGait is our classic walker boot. it has a strong and durable shell with thick foam innersole
cushions the foot. Full bootie encloses the foot. Pivoting forefoot straps and adjustable calf
straps for ideal placement.
Features
• Basic breathable foam bootie
• Liner can be trimmed if needed
Optional EZ Set Hinge
Easy-to-adjust hinge allows for range of motion. It can
also be used to fix the foot in dorsiflexion or plantar
flexion.
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
ProGait Lift Sizing Chart
ProGait Lift
Size #
Our classic walker boot with heel wedges. Achilles lift places the foot in a plantar flexed position
using wedges in the heel. As the condition improves, wedges are removed, gently stretching the
Achilles tendon and relieving tension on the tendon during rehab without casting.
Features
• Includes two 10° heel wedges secured to the frame of
the boot
• Plus liner with pneumatic quick pump or basic
breathable foam bootie
Flatform Plus / Flatform
XX = 03 S
2.5 – 5.5
3.5 – 6
XX = 05 M
5.5 – 9
6 – 9.5
XX = 07 L
9 – 12.5
9.5 – 13
XX = 09 XL
12.5 - 17
13+
Part #
Description
BL0120XX ProGait Lift, S-XL
BL5120XX Plus Black w/ Print, S-XL
CE Marking
Flatform Plus / Flatform Sizing Chart
Our classic walker boot with flat innersole design helps to prevent dorsiflexion of the foot.
Strong and durable aluminum shell with thick foam innersole cushions the foot. Full bootie
encloses the foot. Pivoting forefoot straps and adjustable calf straps for ideal placement.
Features
ankle and leg for complete immobilization and
• Push release button eases patient doffing
competitor models
• Breathable foam bootie
Flatform
Size #
XX = 01 XS
1 – 2.5
1 – 3.5
XX = 03 S
2.5 – 5.5
3.5 – 6
XX = 05 M
5.5 – 9
6 – 9.5
XX = 07 L
9 – 12.5
9.5 – 13
XX = 09 XL
12.5 - 17
13+
Part #
Description
Flatform Plus
AL5430XX
Black, XS-XL
AL5431XX
Mid-Calf, Black, XS-XL
Flatform
AL0430XXBB Flatform, XS-XL
AL2430XXBB W/ Air, XS-XL
AL0431XX
Mid-Calf, XS-XL
AL2431XX
Mid-Calf w/ Air, XS-XL
CE Marking
Flatform Plus
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
87
J Walker Plus / J Walke / AdjustaFit
Size # Size Men’s Shoe Size Women’s Shoe Size
X = 1
XS
1 – 2.5
1 – 3.5
X = 3
S
2.5 – 5.5
3.5 – 6
X = 5
M
5.5 – 9
6 – 9.5
9 – 12.5
X = 7 L
9.5 – 13
X = 9
13+
XL
12.5 - 17
Description
BL51000X
J Walker Plus, XS-XL
BL51001X
J Walker Plus, Wide, XS-XL
BL51100X
J Walker Plus, Midcalf,
XS-XL
BL51101X
J Walker Plus, Midcalf,
Wide, XS-XL
BL01000X
J Walker, XS-XL
BL21000X
J Walker, w/ Air, XS-XL
BL01100X
J Walker, Mid Calf, XS-XL
BL21100X
J Walker, Mid Calf w/ Air,
XS-XL
BL01001X
J Walker, Wide, XS-XL
BL21001X
J Walker, Wide w/ Air,
XS-XL
BL01101X
J Walker, Wide Mid Calf,
XS-XL
BL21101X
J Walker, Wide Mid Calf
w/ Air, XS-XL
J Walker Plus / J Walker
The J Walker is an economical boot with all the basic features. The J Walker Plus includes a
pneumatic quick-pump liner for enhanced patient comfort. Both boots are made of strong,
durable aluminum shell with foam innersole cushions the foot. Full bootie encloses the foot and
pivoting forefoot straps for increased comfort.
Part #
Features
J Walker
ankle, and leg for complete immobilization and
• Push-button release eases patient doffing
competitor models
J Walker Plus
CE Marking
Part #
Description
AL05300X
AdjustaFit, XS-XL
AL25300X
AdjustaFit, w/ Air, XS-XL
AL05400X
AdjustaFit, Pre-Assembled,
XS-XL
AL25400X
AdjustaFit, Pre-Assembled
w/ Air, XS-XL
AL05600X
AdjustaFit, LC Mid-Calf,
XS-XL
AL25600X
AdjustaFit, LC Mid-Calf
w/ Air, XS-XL
AL05360X
AdjustaFit, Wide, XS-XL
AL25360X
AdjustaFit, Wide w/ Air,
XS-XL
AL05460X
AdjustaFit, Wide Pre
Assembled, XS-XL
AL25460X
AdjustaFit, Wide Pre
Assembled w/ Air, XS-XL
AL05660X
AdjustaFit, Wide Mid-Calf,
XS-XL
AL25660X
AdjustaFit, Wide Mid-Calf
w/ Air, XS-XL
AdjustaFit
Standard Bledsoe boot design with calf cuff and forefoot pad.
Features
• Breathable foam calf cuff
CE Marking
88
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Achilles Boot / Hi Top / Lo Top
Achilles Boot
Our Hi Top boot with heel wedges places the foot in a plantar-flexed position using wedges in
the heel. As the condition improves, wedges are removed, gently stretching the Achilles tendon
and relieving tension on the tendon during rehab.
• Immediate application following Achilles injury
• Reconstruction of Achilles tendon
• Sever’s Disease
Features
• Includes four 10° heel wedges secured to the frame of
the boot
• Optional patella tendon bearing plate
• Calf cuff and forefoot pad design
1 – 2.5
1 – 3.5
X = 3 S
2.5 – 5.5
3.5 – 6
X = 5 M
5.5 – 9
6 – 9.5
X
= 7 L
9 – 12.5
9.5 – 13
X = 9 XL
12.5 - 17
13+
Part #
Description
AL03601XBB Achilles Boot, S-XL
AL23601XBB Achilles Boot, w/ Air, S-XL
CE Marking
Part #
Description
Hi-Top
AL03600XBB Hi Top w/ Cuff, XS-XL
AL23600XBB Hi Top w/ Cuff and w/ Air,
XS-XL
AL03602XBB Hi Top w/ Bootie, XS-XL
AL23602XBB Hi Top w/ Bootie and
w/ Air, XS-XL
AL07200XBB Hi Top w/ Cuff and EZ Set,
Hinge, XS-XL
AL27200XBB Hi Top w/ Cuff EZ Set,
Hinge, w/ Air, XS-XL
AL07202XBB Hi Top w/ Bootie and
EZ Set, Hinge, XS-XL
AL27202XBB Hi Top w/ Bootie EZ Set,
Heel Wedges
Hi Top
Hi Top / Lo Top
High density foam for longer wear, this is one of our most durable fracture boots. Two inches
(5 cm) taller than our standard boot makes it ideal for taller patients and patients requiring
patellar tendon bearing.
•Ankle sprains and strains
•Forefoot sprains
•Stable foot fractures
•Distal tibial fractures
Hi Top
X = 1 XS
Lo-Top
AL08500XBB Lo Top w/ Cuff, XS-XL
AL28500XBB Lo Top w/ Cuff and w/ Air,
XS-XL
AL08502XBB Lo Top w/ Bootie, XS-XL
AL28502XBB Lo Top w/ Bootie and
w/ Air, XS-XL
AL07000XBB Lo Top w/ Cuff and EZ Set
Hinge, XS-XL
AL27000XBB Lo Top w/ Cuff EZ Set
Hinge w/Air, XS-XL
AL07002XBB Lo Top w/ Bootie and
EZ Set Hinge, XS-XL
AL27002XBB Lo Top w/ Bootie EZ Set
Boot Accessories
AL0375XX
Boot Covers Package
(Night, Rain, & Cold
Covers), S-XL
AL037000–B Night Cover, N / A
AL03800X–B Rain Cover, S-XL
AL03900X–B Cold Cover, S-XL
AL0270XX
Heel Pad For Boots
w/ Cuff, XS-XL
AL0270XX
Heel Pad For Boots
w / Bootie, XS-XL
Lo Top
CE Marking
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
89
Conformer / Charcot Conformer
Size
Men’s Shoe Size
Women’s Shoe Size
XX = 04
4 – 5.5
5 – 6.5
XX = 06
6 – 7.5
7 – 8.5
XX = 08
8 – 9.5
9 – 10.5
XX = 10
10 – 11.5
11 – 12.5
XX = 12
12 – 13.5
13 – 14.5
XX = 14
14 – 15.5
15 – 16.5
Conformer
Outperforms the Total Contact Cast in reducing pressure — 30% less peak pressure.*
Technologically advanced Auto-mold™ foam holds shape to the buttress of the foot and
prevents movement that can break down the skin.
• Sensate and non-sensate patients
• Ulcerative / pre-ulcerative conditions
• Diabetic patients
• Ankle joint instability
Features
Part #
Description
AL041YXX
Conformer, 4-5,6-7,8-9,
10-11,12-13,14-15
AL241YXX
Conformer w/ Air, 4-5,6-7,
8-9,10-11, 12-13,14-15
• Dual density mid-sole foam promotes perimeter
loading
• Molded inner liner encases the foot and lower leg
• Diabetic sock included
*Pollo, Fabian PhD, Brodsky, James MD, Crenshaw, Stephanie
M.S., Kirksey, Chris B.S., “Plantar Pressures in Fiberglass Total
Contact Casts vs. a New Diabetic Walking Boot” Foot and Ankle
International, January 2003
CE Marking
Part #
Description
Al042YXX
Charcot Conformer, 4-5,
6-7,8-9,10-11,12-13,14-15
Al242YXX
Charcot Conformer w/ Air
and Ankle Pad, 4-5, 6-7,
8-9,10-11,12-13,14-15
Charcot Conformer
Two inches (5 cm) taller than standard Conformer, the Charcot Conformer provides additional
off-loading of the foot with the use of a patella tendon bearing plate.
• Sensate and non-sensate patients
• Ulcerative / pre-ulcerative conditions
• Diabetic patients
• Ankle joint instability
• Charcot
CE Marking
Features
• Pneumatic patella tendon bearing adjustment for
comfort and optimal offloading
• Dual density mid sole foam promotes perimeter loading
• Molded inner liner encases the foot and lower leg
• Diabetic sock included
Bunion Boot
Bunion Boot Size Chart
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 3
S
2. 5 - 5.5
3.5 - 6
X=5
M
5.5 - 9
6 - 9.5
X=7
L
9 - 12.5
9.5 - 13
Pad-and-band holds the toe in position with constant gentle pressure. Soft Auto-mold™ sole
cushions the foot while reducing unnecessary movement and flat innersole maintains neutral
joint position.
• Post-operative of Hallux Abducto Valgus (HAV) surgery
Features
Part #
AL05800X
AL25800X
Description
Bunion Boot, S-L
Bunion Boot w/ Air and
Ankle Pad, S-L
• Pneumatic forefoot pad reduces swelling
• Bunion sock provided keeps great toe separate
• Fits left or right
CE Marking
90
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Vectra Air Basic Sizing Chart
Vectra Air Basic Walker Boot
®
The Vectra Air Basic provides overall support of the lower leg with similar features as Breg’s
Premium Air walker boots, but with more basic features include medial and lateral air bladders,
high strength plastic uprights, and breathable Airmesh liner.
• Soft tissue injuries of the lower leg
• Moderate to severe ankle sprains
• Syndesmosis (high ankle) sprain
• Forefoot / midfoot / hindfoot pain and injuries
• Stable foot and / or ankle fractures
• Post ORIF and surgical stabilization after tendon /
ligament repairs
• Metatarsal fracture
• Other acute or post-operative use (i.e. bunionectomy)
Features
• Unique fold-over, integrated air pump and release valve
eliminates any unnecessary tibial pressure points
• Medial and lateral air bladders provide enhanced
stabilization
• Dual-Axis rocker bottom encourages a more natural gait
• Breathable Airmesh liner with durable, high strength
plastic uprights and removable heel clip
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 1
XS
< 2.5
< 3.5
X = 2
S
2.5 – 5.5
3.5 – 6
X = 3
M
5.5 – 9
6 – 9.5
X = 4
L
9 – 12.5
9.5 – 13
X = 5
XL
12.5 – 17
13+
Measurements according to shoe size
Part # Description
9760X
Vectra Air Basic, Tall, XS – XL
9770X
Vectra Air Basic, Short, XS – XL
Accessories
70097
Tall Liner Kit, X-Small
70098
Tall Liner Kit, Small
70099
Tall Liner Kit, Medium
70101
Tall Liner Kit, Large
70102
Tall Liner Kit, X-Large
70103
Short Liner Kit, X-Small
70104
Short Liner Kit, Small
70105
Short Liner Kit, Medium
70106
Short Liner Kit, Large
70107
Short Liner Kit, X-Large
777X0
Heel Clip
778X0
Insole / Foam footbed
CE Marking
Vectra Basic Walker Boot
The Vectra Basic provides overall support of the lower leg with similar features as Breg’s Premium
walker boots, but with more basic features high strength plastic uprights and breathable Airmesh
liner.
ligament repairs
Features
• Lightweight walker boot with a very low profile footbed
height
• Dual-Axis rocker bottom encourages a more natural gait
• Breathable Airmesh liner with durable, high strength
plastic uprights and removable heel clip
• Wide footbed accommodates swelling and post-op
bandages
Vectra Air Basic Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 1
XS
< 2.5
< 3.5
X = 2
S
2.5 – 5.5
3.5 – 6
X = 3
M
5.5 – 9
6 – 9.5
X = 4
L
9 – 12.5
9.5 – 13
X = 5
XL
12.5 – 17
13+
Part # Description
9750X
9740X
Vectra Basic, Tall
Vectra Basic, Short
Accessories
773X0
774X0
777X0
778X0
Vectra Premium, Tall Liner Kit
Vectra Premium, Short Liner Kit
Heel Clip
Insole / Foam footbed
CE Marking
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
91
17
Vectra Lite Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 1
XS
< 2.5
< 3.5
X = 2
S
2.5 – 5.5
3.5 – 6
X = 3
M
5.5 – 9
6 – 9.5
X = 4
L
9 – 12.5
9.5 – 13
X = 5
XL
12.5 – 17
13.5 +
Vectra Lite Walker Boot
The Vectra Lite provides similar benefits for overall support and swelling management of the
lower leg as other Vectra Products, but in an economical walker boot. The Lite walker boot
features a breathable foam liner, nylon uprights, and an open heel with heel clip option.
ligament repairs
Part # Description
2841X
Vectra Lite, Tall
2843X
Vectra Lite, Short
Accessories
775X0
Vectra Lite, Tall Liner Kit
776X0
Vectra Lite, Short Liner Kit
777X0
Heel Clip
778X0
Insole / Foam Footbed
Features
• Breathable open-celled liner with plastic uprights
• Dual-Axis rocker bottom encourages a more natural
gait
bandages
• Open heel with heel clip option
CE Marking
Shell Air Ankle Walker Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 2
S
4 – 7
5–8
X = 3
M
7.5 – 11
8.5 – 12
X = 4
L
11.5+
12.5 +
Measurements according to shoe size.
Part # Description
0001X
0002X
Shell Air Ankle Walker Tall
Shell Air Ankle Walker Short
00025
00026
00027
Replacement Bulb
Replacement Sock Short
Replacement Sock Tall
Accessories
CE Marking
18
92
Shell Air Ankle Walker Boot
The Shell Air Ankle Walker offers the same support, comfort and compliance as Breg’s Vectra
product line with the added convenience of a lightweight, durable, semi-rigid shell.
• Acute ankle sprains
• Soft tissue injuries
• Syndesmosis (high ankle) sprains
• Stress fracture of lower leg / ankle
• Forefoot / midfoot / hindfoot injury
• Stable foot and / or stable ankle fractures
• Post ORIF and surgical stabilization
• Post tendon / ligament repairs
• Tarsal, metatarsal and phalange fractures
• Post bunion surgery, Achilles tendon ruptures and / or
repairs
Features
• Three piece shell design adjusts to fit a wide variety of
patients
• Medial and lateral air bladders provide enhanced
stabilization
• Rocker sole encourages a more natural gait
• Includes complimentary moisture wicking walker sock
and detachable toe cover. The sock is a synthetic knit
material made with acrylic yarn and is latex free
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Walker CROM Sizing Chart
Controlled Range of Motion Walker Boot (CROM)
The Controlled Range of Motion (CROM) Walker offers range of motion from 0º - 30º of
dorsiflexion and plantar flexion in 10º increments. The rocker bottom makes for a near normal
gait. Ideal for Achilles tendon repairs.
• Acute trauma or post-operative use
ligament repairs (i.e. Achilles tendon)
Features
• Cushioned insole and heel for increased comfort
• Straps can be individually placed along uprights
• Malleable aluminum uprights for a customized fit
Integrity Fracture Walker Boot Air
The Integrity Fracture Walker offers support and comfort for the lower leg, but in an economical
walker boot. The walking boot comes in both tall and short versions and is offered in fives sizes
XS-XL.
• Swelling
• Forefoot / midfoot / hindfoot pain and injury
repairs
Features
• Rigid uprights for security and stability
• Circumferential strapping encapsulates the extremity
• Low heel height allows for normal gait
• Energy absorbing heel helps minimize heel strike force
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 2
S
4 – 7
5 – 8.5
X = 3
M
7.5 – 10
9 – 11
X = 4
L
10.5 – 12
11.5 – 13
Part #
Description
100315-0X0 Walker CROM
CE Marking
Integrity Fracture Walker Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 1
XS
2 – 4
3 – 5.5
X = 2
S
4.5 – 7
6–8
X = 3
M
7.5 – 10.5
8.5 – 11.5
X = 4
L
11 – 12.5
12 – 13.5
X = 5
XL
13+
14+
Part #
Description
100002-0X0
100004-0X0
Integrity Fracture Walker
Boot, Tall Air
Boot, Short Air
CE Marking
93
17
Integrity Fracture Walker Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 1
XS
2 – 4
3 – 5.5
X = 2
S
4.5 – 7
6–8
X = 3
M
7.5 – 10.5
8.5 – 11.5
X = 4
L
11 – 12.5
12 – 13.5
X = 5
XL
13+
14+
Part #
Description
100001-0X0
100003-0X0
Boot, Tall
Boot, Short
CE Marking
Integrity Fracture Walker Boot
The Integrity Fracture Walker offers support and comfort for the lower leg, but in an economical
walker boot. The walking boot comes in both tall and short versions and is offered in fives sizes
XS-XL.
• Swelling
repairs
Features
• Rigid uprights for security and stability
• Circumferential strapping encapsulates the extremity
• Low heel height allows for normal gait
• Energy absorbing heel helps minimize heel strike force
• Integrity Fracture Walker Air Replacement Liner
Accessories
Part #
Description
100005-0X0
100007-0X0
100006-0X0
100008-0X0
Integrity Fracture Walker Air
Replacement Liner, Tall
Integrity Fracture Walker Air
Replacement Liner, Short
Replacement Liner, Tall
Replacement Liner, Short
CE Marking
18
94
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Pin Cam Walker Sizing Chart
Pin Cam Walker Boot
The Pin Cam Walker provides support and range of motion control with (ROM) settings between
45º plantar flexion and 45º dorsiflexion in 7.5º increments. Ideal for patients who have had
Achilles tendon repairs.
• Acute trauma or post-operative use
ligament repairs (i.e. Achilles tendon)
Features
• Range of motion from 45° of plantar flexion and 45° of
dorsiflexion
• 7.5° increments
• Cushioned insole and heel for increased comfort
• Straps can be individually placed along uprights
• Malleable aluminum uprights for a customized fit
Fixed Ankle Walker Boot
The Fixed Ankle Walker offers the same support, comfort and compliance as Breg’s Vectra
product line yet is our most economical walker.
• Post ORIF & surgical stabilization
• Post bunion surgery, Achilles tendon ruptures and /
or repairs
Features
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 2
S
4 – 7
5 – 8.5
X = 3
M
7.5 – 10
9 – 11
X = 4
L
10.5 – 12
11.5 – 13
Part # Description
0955X
Pin Cam Walker
CE Marking
Fixed Ankle Walker Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 1
XS
3.5
4.5
X = 2
S
4–7
5–8.5
X = 3
M
7.5–10
9–11
X = 4
L
10.5–12
11.5–13
X = 5
XL
12.5+
13.5 +
Part # Description
0006X
0007X
Fixed Ankle Walker Tall
Fixed Ankle Walker Short
CE Marking
• Breathable liner with malleable aluminum uprights
• Rocker sole encourages a more natural gait
• Cushioned heel and additional strap provided for
padding to the Achilles
bandages
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
95
17
Mini Walker Nylon Struts Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Kids Shoe Size
X = 2
S
<5 – 6
X = 3
M
7–8
X = 4
L
9 – 11 +
Mini Walker (Nylon)
The Mini Walker boot provides a more comfortable alternative to casting for active kids. The
lightweight frame offers comfort and support with a rocker sole that facilitates a more natural
gait. It has durable plastic uprights and a foam liner that can be washed.
Part # Description
7703X
Mini Walker Nylon Struts
CE Marking
Features
• Sizes provide a more comfortable alternative to casting
• Lightweight nylon struts
• Deluxe foam liner can be washed when necessary
• Durable design for active kids on the go
Mini Walker Alum. Struts Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Kids Shoe Size
X = 2
S / M
<5 – 8
X = 4
L
9 – 12
X = 5
XL
13 +
Part # Description
7700X
Mini Walker Aluminum Struts
uprights, S / M, L, XL
CE Marking
18
96
Mini Walker (Aluminum)
Features
• Lightweight aluminum struts
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Wee Walker / Wee Walker Air Sizing Chart
Wee Walker / Wee Walker Air
The original child’s walker boot, designed to fit children as young as
one year.
Size
Age in Years
Foot Length
Leg Length
S – M
1 – 2
Up to 6”
(15 cm) Up to 9” (23 cm)
L
2.5 – 6
6” – 7.5”
(15 – 19 cm)
Up to 11” (28 cm)
XL
6.5 – 9.5
7.5” – 8.5” (19 – 22 cm) Up to 14” (36 cm)
• Sprains and strains of the ankle
• Sprains and strains of the foot
Features
• Durable aluminum tough enough for average kids
• Heel height, width and rocker bottom designed for
small children
• Forefoot straps immobilize the ankle
• Built-in pneumatic system (Wee Walker Air only)
Part #
AL185003BB
AL185007BB
AL185009BB
BL585003
BL585007
BL585009
AL137000–B
Description
Wee Walker, S – M
Wee Walker, L
Wee Walker, XL
Wee Walker w/ Air, S – M
Wee Walker w/ Air, L
Wee Walker w/ Air, XL
Night Cover
CE Marking
Achilles Wedge
Achilles Wedge Sizing Chart
Breg’s Achilles Wedge is designed to comfortably place the foot in plantar flexion to offload the
Achilles tendon during rehab. The Achilles Wedge provides customized height adjustments and
is available for all walkers except ROM walkers, Vectra Lite (unless a Heel Clip is used with the
Vectra Lite) and the Integrity Walkers.
• Achilles tendon rehabilitation (for use with Breg
Walkers only)
Features
Size
X = 2
XS / S Walkers
X = 3
M / L Walkers
X = 4
XL Walkers
Part # Description
0009X
• Four interlocking wedges that maintain an angle of
plantar flexion at 5°, 10°, 15°, or 20°
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Size #
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Achilles Wedge
CE Marking
97
17
Ultra Ankle Zoom Sizing Chart
Ultra Zoom® Ankle Brace
Size MenWomen
S / M
6 – 10
7–11
L / XL
10 +
11 +
The Ultra Zoom is one of the most advanced braces on the market for supporting the ankle joint.
Made from revolutionary Performathane® soft shell technology, the Ultra Zoom provides the
perfect balance between comfort and support.
• Sub-acute ankle sprains
• Chronic ankle instabilities
• Prophylactic use
Part # Description
10222
10224
10232
10234
Ultra Ankle Zoom, S / M
Ultra Ankle Zoom, L / XL
Ultra Zoom White, S / M
Ultra Zoom White, L / XL
Features
• Super low profile Performathane soft shell technology
• Provides balance between comfort and support
• Forms to ankle for enhanced comfort and protection
• Heat moldable shell
CE Marking
Ultra High-5 Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 2
S
5 – 9
6–10
X = 3
M
9.5 – 12 10.5 – 13
X = 4
L
12.5 +
Ultra High-5® Ankle Brace
The Ultra High-5 is innovatively designed using anti-rotation and anti-inversion support
technology to help recover from high or low ankle injuries. The Ultra High-5 moves with your
ankle, not against it, maintaining long term support through continued use.
13.5 +
• High ankle sprains
Part # Description
1021X
Features
Ultra Ankle High-5, S – L
• Patented hinged-cuff technology restricts excessive
twisting and turning
• Self molding foot plate enhances ankle control and
comfort
• Lightweight, semi-rigid, heat moldable shell
• Bilateral free motion hinge
CE Marking
Ultra CTS™ Ankle Brace
Ultra CTS Ankle Brace Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 2
S / M
6 – 10
7 - 11
X = 4
L / XL
10 +
11 +
Part # Description
10242
10244
Ultra CTS Ankle Brace, S / M
Ultra CTS Ankle Brace, L / XL
CE Marking
98
The Ultra CTS Ankle Brace is the first custom-treatment system that transforms from acute ankle
brace to low profile activity brace – and back again. The new PerformaFit removable upright
facilitates treatment and rehabilitation. Just attach the upright for acute injury and detach to
return to activity. Comfortable Performathane technology custom forms to the injured ankle and
constantly reforms with edema reduction.
• Tibia / Fibula stabilization
Features
• Provides the perfect transition from a walking boot to
an ankle brace for continued support
• Hinged-cuff technology restricts excessive inversion
and rotation
• PerformaFit removable upright provides custom
treatment
• Heat moldable footplate
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Lace Up Ankle Sizing Chart
Lace Up Ankle Brace
The Lace Up Ankle brace provides inversion and eversion control without compromising
comfort. With its low profile design, durable construction and bilateral figure 8 strapping, the
Lace Up Ankle is an excellent alternative to athletic tape.
Features
• Low profile
• Bilateral, figure 8 strapping
• Made of ballistic nylon
• Lace up design
• Breathable tongue
• Padding over Achilles tendon
• Fits either left or right ankle
Lace Up Ankle Brace with Tibia Strap
The Lace Up Ankle with Tibia Strap provides additional inversion and eversion control without
compromising comfort. With its low profile design, durable construction and bilateral figure
8 strapping, the Lace Up Ankle with Tibia Strap is an excellent alternative to athletic tape.
Features
• Designed to support the ankle
• Durable, non-stretch ballistic nylon and elastic cuff
closure
• Figure 8 strapping with heel lock eliminates taping
• Ultra low-profile with seamless footbed
Size Size
Men
Women
X = 0
XXS
< 6
<5
X = 1
XS
6 – 7
5–6
X = 2
S
7.5 – 9
6.5 – 8
X = 3
M
9.5 – 11
8.5 – 10
X = 4
L
11.5 – 13
10.5 – 12
X = 5
XL
13.5 – 15
12.5 – 14
X = 6
XXL
15.5 +
N/A
Part # Description
9706X
Lace Up Ankle
X = See size chart
CE Marking
Lace Up Ankle with Tibia Strap
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 0
XXS
2 – 3
3–4
X = 1
XS
3 – 5
4–6
X = 2
S
6 – 7
7–9
X = 3
M
8 – 10
10 – 11
X = 4
L
11 – 12
12 – 13
X = 5
XL
13 – 14
14 +
X = 6
XXL
15 +
N/A
Part # Description
9017X
Lace Up Ankle with
Tibia Strap
X = See size chart
CE Marking
Lace Up Ankle Brace with Stays
The Lace Up Ankle with Stays provides additional inversion and eversion control
without compromising comfort. With its low profile design, durable construction and
bilateral figure 8 strapping, the Lace Up Ankle with Stays is an excellent alternative to
athletic tape.
Features
• Designed to support and protect ankles
• Durable, non-stretch ballistic nylon with stays and
elastic cuff closure
• Figure 8 strapping with heel lock eliminates taping
• Ultra low profile with seamless footbed
Lace Up Ankle with Stays Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 0
XXS
2 – 3
3–4
X = 1
XS
3 – 5
4–6
X = 2
S
6 – 7
7–9
X = 3
M
8 – 10
10 – 11
X = 4
L
11 – 12
12 – 13
X = 5
XL
13 – 14
14 +
Measurements according to Shoe Size
Part # Description
9017X
Lace Up Ankle with Stays
X = See size chart
CE Marking
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
99
Wraptor Ankle / Hinged Wraptor
Size #
Size
Men’s shoe size Women’s shoe size
XX = 01 XS
6 – 7
7–8
XX = 03 S
8 – 9
9 – 10
XX = 05 M
9 - 11
10 – 12
XX = 07 L
11 – 13
12 – 14
XX = 09 XL
14+
15+
XX = 11 XXL
14 W+
15W+
Wraptor Ankle Stabilizer
Figure 8 strapping design mimics traditional taping without gapping. High ankle strap provides
additional support and secures medial and lateral stirrup straps.
• Chronic and acute ankle sprains
• Abnormal eversion and inversion control
• Protective sportswear
Features
• Breathable Spacermesh lining wicks moisture away from
the skin
• Sharkskin material at the base of the foot reduces brace
slippage
• Latex-free Neoprene at the heel reduces irritation on
the Achilles tendon
For wider feet, move up a size.
For narrower feet, move down a size.
Part #
Description
SA7025XX
w/ Standard Laces, Black,
XS-XXL
SA7020XX
w/ Speed Lacers, Black,
XS-XXL
SA7020XX–M Wraptor Ankle Stabilizer
w/ Speed Lacers, White,
XS-XXL
XX= See size chart above
Hinged Wraptor
Part #
SA7023XX
SA7024XX
Description
Hinged Wraptor, Regular
Laces w/ Hinge, XS-XXL
Hinged Wraptor, Speed
Laces w/ Hinge, XS-XXL
Similar to the Wraptor Ankle Stabilizer with rigid thermoplastic stirrups for additional support and
stabilization.
• Chronic and acute ankle sprains
• Abnormal eversion and inversion control
• Protective sportswear
XX= See size chart above
Features
• Breathable Spacermesh lining wicks moisture away from
the skin
• Sharkskin material at the base of the foot reduces brace
slippage
• Latex-free Neoprene at the heel reduces irritation on
the Achilles tendon
• Rigid stirrups
Ankle Brace Lock Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 1
XS
< 5
<6
X = 2
S
5.5 – 7
6.5 – 8
X = 3
M
7.5 – 9
8.5 – 10
X = 4
L
9.5 – 11
10.5 – 12
X = 5
XL
11.5 – 13
12.5 +
X = 6
XXL
13.5+
Part # Description
1017X
Ankle Brace Lock (ABL)
X = See size chart
The Ankle Brace Lock (ABL) is ideal for providing support for patients with mild to moderate
inversion and eversion injuries and chronic ankle instabilities. The body of the ABL is made of a
breathable, stretch nylon / lycra weave, allowing it to fit in a compact-style shoe. Two no-stretch
stirrup straps provide extra support.
• Mild to moderate inversion and eversion injuries
Features
• Low profile
• Breathable, stretch nylon / lycra material
• Two no-stretch stirrup straps
• Universal right or left
• XS – XXL sizes
CE Marking
18
100
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Axiom Ankle Size Chart
Axiom Ankle
Size #
Rigid ankle foot orthosis provides low / high ankle protection and prevents inversion and
eversion without inhibiting inversion mobility.
• Inversion and eversion control
• Chronically unstable ankles
• Grade 1 and 2 acutely sprained ankles
• Mild to moderate posterior tibial tendon dysfunctions
(PTTD)
Features
XX = 03 S
Up to 7.5
Up to 9
XX = 05 M
8 – 11.5
9.5 – 13
XX = 07 L
12+
13+
Part #
Description
Axiom Ankle
AS020YXX
Axiom Ankle, S-L
• Anatomical design maintains ankle congruency
and prevents pistoning
• Full foot plate eliminates pressure points
• Posterior calf adjustment fits a wide range of calf
circumferences
Ultimate Ankle Brace
Ultimate Ankle Brace Sizing Chart
Rigid ankle foot orthosis attaches to the shoe for total ankle control. Fully adjustable footplate
and uprights allow pivot points to center on the malleolus to support natural anatomical
movement.
• Inversion and eversion control
• Chronically unstable ankles
• Grade 1 and grade 2 acutely sprained ankles
• High ankle support
• Mild to moderate posterior tibial tendon dysfunction
(PTTD)
Features
• Durable aluminum material
• Adjustable and formable medial and lateral uprights
• Dual tibial straps for high ankle support
INNER ANKLE
OUTER ANKLE
(Medial Malleolus)
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(Lateral Malleolus)
Men’s Shoe Size
Range
10 - 15
7 - 12
4-9
Ladies’ Shoe Size
Range
7
11 - 16
5
8 - 13
3
5 - 10
NOTE: This device is intended for sale
by or on the order of a Physician
or other Medical Professional
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Size
Men’s Shoe Size
Women’s Shoe Size
S
Up to 7.5
Up to 9
M8-11.5
9.5-13
L12+
13+
Prefabricated or semi-custom for optional fit.
Part #
Description
AS130252 Ultimate Ankle, Left, S, Red
AS130353 Ultimate Ankle, Left, S,
Orange
AS150454 Ultimate Ankle, Left, M,
Yellow
AS150555 Ultimate Ankle, Left, M,
Green
AS170656 Ultimate Ankle, Left, L, Blue
AS170757 Ultimate Ankle, Left, L, Purple
AS230252 Ultimate Ankle, Right, S, Red
AS230353 Ultimate Ankle, Right, S,
Orange
AS250454 Ultimate Ankle, Right, M,
Yellow
AS250555 Ultimate Ankle, Right, M,
Green
AS270656 Ultimate Ankle, Right, L, Blue
AS270757 Ultimate Ankle, Right, L,
Purple
101
17
Part #
Description
97007
97008
Ankle Stirrup Plus
Ankle Stirrup
Ankle Stirrup Plus & Ankle Stirrup
The Ankle Stirrup Plus provides rigid support with shells that support the ankle joint while
allowing normal rehabilitation.
Features
• Ideal ankle stabilization for both acute and chronic
ankle injuries
• Adjustable heel pad, vertical side straps and swivel
straps provide easy application
• Lightweight shell conforms to the ankle with minimal
bulk in the shoe
• Ankle Stirrup Plus designed with a foam liner (shown)
• Ankle Stirrup designed with a terry cloth liner
• Universally sized
Part #
Description
174000
Ankle Stabilizer Stirrup
The Ankle Stabilizer Stirrup provides medial / lateral support with shells that support the ankle
joint for rehabilitation.
Features
• Medial / lateral rigid shell
• Performance lining
• Foam trilaminate material comfortably supports the
ankle
Part # Description
01401
Ankle Sprain Kit
CE Marking
Ankle Sprain Kit
The Ankle Sprain Kit is a collection of great Breg products for managing an injured ankle all in
one box. This kit can aid from the initial injury through rehabilitation.
• Acute inversion and eversion ankle injuries
• Chronic instability
Features
• KoolAir Ankle Stirrup (Regular) for support and
protection of injured ankle
• Cold Therapy Ice Pack
• Latex Free Elastic Bandage for circumferential
compression
• Latex Free Exercise Band for ankle rehabilitation
exercises
• Application Instructions with important patient
information
18
102
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
KoolAir Ankle with Valve
The KoolAir Ankle with Valve combines air and foam with a bladder that can be inflated to
desired compression levels for maximum comfort. The KoolAir Ankle with Valve Universal
provides 9” of support to the ankle while the Regular provides 10” of support.
Part # Description
11186
KoolAir Ankle w / Valve
(Regular)
11187
KoolAir Ankle w / Valve
(Universal)
Features
• Bladder can be inflated to desired compression level
• Bladder combines air and foam for maximum patient
comfort
• Re-engineered shell is lighter in weight but stronger,
conforms to ankle with minimal bulk
• Anatomically contoured universal shell fits either left or
right ankle
• Adjustable heel pad, vertical side straps and swivel
straps provide easy application
KoolAir Ankle Stirrup
The KoolAir Ankle Stirrup uses an air and gel bladder to provide rigid support and compression
to help support and protect patients with unstable or injured ankles. The KoolAir Ankle Stirrup
Universal provides 9” of support to the ankle while the Regular provides 10” of support.
Part # Description
11180
11181
71680
KoolAir Ankle Stirrup (Universal)
KoolAir Ankle Stirrup (Regular)
Air-Gel Replacement
CE Marking
Features
• Optional cold therapy
• Fits both left and right ankles
• Adjustable heel pad
M-Brace
Traditional stirrup design enhances circulation and reduces swelling. Easily fits into most shoes.
Features
• Air insert includes air tube for optimal fit and
compression
• Gel insert can be removed and chilled for cold therapy
Black Gel
White Gel
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Part #
Description
ES040005M-Brace Air, Universal,
Black
ES050005
M-Brace Air-Gel, Universal,
Black
ES042005
M-Brace Air (20 Pack),
Universal, Black
ES052005
M-Brace Air-Gel (20 Pack), Universal, Black
ES045005
M-Brace Air (50 Pack),
Universal, Black
ES055005
M-Brace Air-Gel (50 Pack), Universal, Black
ES040005–M M-Brace Air, Universal,
White
ES050005–M M-Brace Air-Gel, Universal,
White
ES042005–M M-Brace Air (20 Pack),
Universal, White
ES052005–M M-Brace Air-Gel (20 Pack), Universal, White
103
17
Performance Knit Ankle Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Ankle Circumference
X = 3
S
6.25” – 8.25”
X = 4
M
8.25” – 10.25”
X = 5
L
10.25” – 12.25”
X = 6
XL
12.25” – 14.25”
Performance Knit Ankle
The Performance Knit Ankle Sleeve is a lightweight and durable brace. This ankle sleeve
provides compression, stability and comfort so that patients can get back in the game or back to
normal daily activity.
• Tendonitis
Measurements according to ankle circumference
Part #
34000X
34001X
Description
Features
Performance Knit Ankle,
Right, S – XL
Performance Knit Ankle,
Left, S – XL
• Performance support that provides compression,
stability and control
• Anatomically contoured viscoelastic inserts on the
medial and lateral sides of the ankle
• Dual inserts promote enhanced proprioception and
assist in joint stabilization
• Provides graduated compression
Performance Knit Ankle Tall Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 20
S
7” – 9” (17 – 22 cm)
X = 30
M
9” – 11”
(22 – 28 cm)
X = 40
L
11” – 13”
(28 – 33 cm)
Performance Knit Ankle Tall
The Performance Knit Ankle Tall is a lightweight and durable brace that provides compression,
stability and comfort so that patients can get back in the game or back to normal daily activity.
• Tendonitis
Circumference taken at malleoli
Part #
Features
Description
• Anatomically contoured viscoelastic inserts promote
enhanced proprioception and assist in joint stabilization
• Knit construction is breathable and reduces heat
retention
• Silicone heel pad for impact resistance
• Provides graduated compression though mid-foot
100194-0X Performance Knit Ankle Tall,
S–L
Performance Knit Achilles
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 2
XS
7” – 9”
(17 – 22 cm)
X = 3
S
7” – 9”
(17 – 22 cm)
X = 4
M
9” – 11”
(22 – 28 cm)
X = 5
L
11” – 13”
(28 – 33 cm)
X = 6
XL
13” – 15”
(33 – 38 cm)
Part #
Description
17121X
17122X
Performance Knit Achilles,
Right, S – XL
Performance Knit Achilles,
Left, S – XL
The Performance Knit Achilles is a lightweight and durable brace that provides compression,
stability and comfort. The extended support and anterior closure provide enhanced stability for
the lower leg and ankle.
• Tendonitis
• Achilles injuries
Features
• Anatomically contoured inserts promote enhanced
proprioception and joint stabilization
retention
information
18
104
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Silicone Elastic Ankle Support
The Silicone Elastic Ankle Support provides compression featuring a viscoelastic silicone
contoured insert.
Features
• Compression ankle support featuring a viscoelastic
silicone contoured insert
• 7” sleeve
• Contains latex
Size #
Size
Ankle Circumference
X = 1
XS
Up to 7.5”
X = 2
S
7.5” – 8.3”
X = 3
M
8.3” – 9.25”
X = 4
L
9.25” – 10”
X = 5
XL
10” – 10.75”
X = 6
XXL
10.75” – 11.3”
Part # Description
9700X
Pullover Nylon Anklet
Pullover Nylon Sizing Chart
Features
• Multidirectional stretch
• Lightweight compression
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 3
S
7” – 9” (17 - 22 cm)
X = 4
M
9” – 11”
(22 - 28 cm)
X = 5
L
11” – 13”
(28 - 33 cm)
X = 6
XL
13” – 15”
(33 - 38 cm)
Part #
Description
17090XPullover Nylon Anklet, S – XL
Elastic Ankle Support
Elastic Ankle Support Sizing Chart
The Elastic Ankle Support utilizes a pull on design with open heel for mild compression and
support.
Size #
Size
Ankle Circumference
X = 2
S
7” - 8”
• Sub-acute ankle sprains and strains
• Edema
X = 3
M
8.25” - 9”
X = 4
L
9.25” - 10”
Features
X = 5
XL
10.25” - 11”
X = 6
XXL
11.25” - 12”
• Designed to give two different degrees of tension in a
single piece of elastic material
• Spiral construction for a smooth, comfortable fit
Part # Description
9701X
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Elastic Ankle Support, S – XXL
105
17
Po st -O p
Plantar Fasciitis Night Splint
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 2
S
< 7
< 7.5
X = 3
M
7.5 – 10
8 – 10.5
X = 4
L
10.5 +
11 +
The Plantar Fasciitis Night Splint features adjustable bilateral straps for controlled application of
a prolonged stretch.
• Plantar fasciitis
• Plantar flexion contracture
• Achilles tendonitis
Part # Description
Features
1117XPlantar Fasciitis Night Splint
• Lightweight
• Extra thick liner
• Quick release buckles
• Extra long, padded strapping
• Slip resistant sole
• Toe wedge
CE Marking
Plantar Fasciitis Soft Night Splint
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 2
S
3 – 5
5–7
X = 3
M
5.5 – 6.5
7.5 – 8.5
X = 4
L
7 – 8
9 – 10
X = 5
XL
8.5 – 11
11 – 13
X = 6
XXL
12 +
14 +
The Plantar Fasciitis Soft Night Splint provides a consistent 90° angle stretch for night time
support for patients with plantar fasciitis.
Features
• Allows the patient to apply a consistent 90° angle
stretch of the plantar fascia by holding the foot in the
gentle dorsiflexion position
• Soft padded cover provides patient comfort and
protection against irritation to the skin
• Removable foam wedge insert included
• Fits either the left or right foot
Part # Description
1130X
Plantar Fasciitis Soft Night
Splint
Dorsal Night Splint Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 2
S / M
5 – 9
6–9
X = 4
L / XL
9.5 – 14
10.5 – 15
Part # Description
1144X
Dorsal Night Splint
18
106
Dorsal Night Splint
Designed to help provide support while sleeping for patients with plantar fasciitis and Achilles
tendonitis.
Features
• Lightweight, low profile design increases comfort and
compliance
• Slips onto the foot and is easily adjusted with hook
closure
• Fits either left or right foot
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
P os t - O p
Padded Night Splint
Padded Night Splint
Size #
Prevents tears in fibrous tissue that occur after a night of rest, breaking the night time healing /
morning pain cycle.
• Plantar flexion
• Contractures and heel spurs
XX = 03 S
0 – 3.5
0 – 4.5
XX = 05 M
3.5 – 6.5
4.5 – 7
XX = 07 L
6.5 – 9.5
7 – 10
XX = 09 XL
9.5 – 12.5
10 – 13
XX = 11 XXL
12.5+
13+
Part #
Features
• Padded footplate keeps the foot in a dorsiflexed
position
• Soft foam for nighttime wear
Night Splint
Description
SA9025XXPadded Night Splint, PF,
S-XXL
Night Splint
Prevents tears in fibrous tissue that occur after a night of rest, breaking the night time healing /
morning pain cycle.
• Plantar flexion
• Contractures and heel spurs
Features
Size #
XX = 03 S
0 – 7
0 – 7.5
XX = 05 M
7.5 – 10
8 – 10.5
XX = 07 L
10+
11+
Part #
Description
SA9020XX Night Splint, S-L
• Angled polyethylene shell keeps the foot in a
dorsiflexed position
• Straps tension for increased support
• Removable and washable liner
PFS Strap
PFS Strap
Reduces plantar fasciitis pain through continuous elastic tension and pressure.
• Plantar flexion contractures
Features
• Easily fits into most shoes
• Can be worn day and night. Includes patient exercise
program
Size #
XX = 03 S
0 – 8
0 – 8.5
XX = 05 M
8.5 – 11
9 – 11.5
XX = 07 L
11.5+
12+
Part #
Description
ES007YXX PFS Strap, S-L
ES008YXX 10 Pack, S-L
Plantar Fasciitis Wrap
Plantar Fasciitis Wrap Night Splint
The Plantar Fasciitis Wrap provides support for patients with plantar fasciitis, is low profile and
fits inside most shoes for daily wear.
Features
Size
Ankle Circumference
X = 2
S
11”
X = 3
M
12”
X = 4
L
13”
Part # Description
1136X
• Easy application
• Allows stretching and exercise
• Wrap support provides elastic tension
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Size #
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
107
17
Po st -O p
Post-Op Shoe Square Toe Sizing Chart
X = 2
S
6 – 8
4–6
X = 3
M
8.5 – 10
6.5 – 8
X = 4
L
10.5 – 12
8.5 – 10
X = 5
XL
12.5 – 14
N/A
Post-Op Shoe Square Toe
The Post-Op Shoe Square Toe provides protection of the foot relating to post-op and trauma
applications. The square toe design acts as a bumper and provides additional room and
protection for the patient.
• Post-op / post trauma applications
Features
• Post surgical foot protection
• Square toe feature provides added protection
• Forefoot closure allows for a wide range of adjustments
• Adjustable ankle strap and padded heel
• Rocker sole provides traction and comfort
Part # Description
1135X
Post-Op Shoe Square Toe,
Mens
1103X
Womens
11031
Pediatric
Post-Op Shoe Deluxe Sizing Chart
X = 2
S
6 – 8
4–6
X = 3
M
8.5 – 10
6.5 – 8
X = 4
L
10.5 – 12
8.5 – 10
X = 5
XL
12.5 – 14
N/A
Post-Op Shoe Deluxe
The Post-Op Shoe Deluxe provides protection of the foot in post-op and trauma applications. It
is ideal for patients looking for both comfort and support of a shoe with a heel.
Features
• Rubber outer sole helps absorb shock
• Unique walking sole helps maintain normal gait
• Padded, shaped heel allows for better fit and comfort
• Fits left or right foot
Part # Description
1142X
1133X
11026
Post-Op Shoe Deluxe, Mens
Post-Op Shoe Deluxe, Womens
Post-Op Shoe Deluxe, Pediatric
Post-Op Shoe Adj Heel Sizing Chart
X = 1
XS
N / A
2–4
X = 2
S
7 – 9
4–6
X = 3
M
9 – 11
6–8
X = 4
L
11 – 13
10 +
X = 5
XL
13 +
N/A
Part # Description
Post-Op Shoe Adjustable Heel
The Post-Op Shoe Adjustable Heel provides protection of the foot in post-op and post trauma
applications.
Features
• Back has adjustable hook and loop for snug fit
• Soft foam outer liner for patient comfort
• Removable hook and loop fastener
1140X
Post-Op Shoe Adjustable Heel, Mens
1129X
Post-Op Shoe Adjustable Heel, Womens
18
108
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
P os t - O p
Darco
MedSurg™
Post-Op
Shoe
Darco
Med-Surg
Post-Op
Shoe Sizing Chart
Darco MedSurg™ Post-Op Shoe
Size # Size
Size
Size Women’s
Shoe Size
# Men’s
Size ShoeMen
Women
The Darco MedSurg Post-Op Shoe provides protection of the foot in post-op and post trauma
applications.
Features
X = 2 X =
S 2
6 S
– 8
6 – 8
M3
X = 3 X =
8.5
M– 10
4 – 64 – 6
8 –8
8.5 – 106.5 –6.5
L 4
X = 4 X =
10.5
8.5 –8.5
10 – 10
L – 12 10.5 – 12
XL
X = 5 X =
5
12.5
N / AN / A
XL – 14 12.5 – 14
• Patented metatarsal shank provides control of forefoot
motion and protection after osteotomies
• Reinforced padded heel
• Breathable mesh upper
• Extra long straps to accommodate dressings
• Comes in navy blue only
Post-Op Shoe
Part #
Description
100344-0X0Med-Surg Darco Post-Op
Shoe, Mens
100347-0X0 Med-Surg Darco Post-Op
Shoe, Womens
Post-Op Shoe
Protects foot after surgery.
Features
• Also available in a pediatric size
• Trimmable straps for easy application
• Large opening to accommodate dressings and swelling
Size #
X = 3
S
6 – 8
4–6
X = 5
M
8 – 10
6–8
X = 7
L
10 – 12
8 – 10
X = 9
XL
12+
10 – 12
Part #
Description
SA90000X Post-Op Shoe , Men’s, S-XL
SA90050X Post-Op Shoe, Women’s, S-L
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
109
17
Po st -O p
Closed Toe Cast Boot Sizing Chart
Closed Toe Cast Boot
Size #
Size
Boot Length
X = 2
S
9.37”
X = 3
M
11”
X = 4
L
12.62”
• Casted lower leg fractures
X = 5
XL
13.5”
Features
The Closed Toe Cast Boot is made of durable canvas with hook and loop closures.
• Closed toe helps protect from external elements
• Carpeted inner sole to help reduce wear
• D-ring closure near the toe area for a secure fit
• Upper strap stretches for a firm, comfortable fit
• Slip resistant, non-scuff rocker sole
Length Measured from cast heel to toe
Part # Description
1148X Closed Toe Cast Boot
Cast Boot Flexible Sole Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Length
X = 2
S
9.3”
X = 3
M
10.3”
X = 4
L
11”
X = 5
XL
12”
Length measured from cast heel to toe
Part # Description
1139X
Cast Boot Fexible Sole
110
Cast Boot Flexible Sole
The Cast Boot Flexible Sole is made of durable canvas that provides protection of lower leg
casts. It has a carpeted inner sole to help reduce wear while the upper strap stretches for a
comfortable fit.
Features
• Heavy duty canvas
• Carpeted inner sole to help reduce wear
• D-ring closure near the toe area for secure fit
• Upper strap stretches for a comfortable fit
• Slip resistant
• Hook and loop closure
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
P os t - O p
Cast Boot Sizing Chart
Cast Boot
Size #
Size
Length
X = 1
XS
7.375”
X = 2
S
9”
X = 3
M
10.5”
X = 4
L
12.25”
Features
X = 5
XL
13.375”
The durable, canvas Cast Boot features a rocker sole that allows for a natural gait during
ambulation. This sandal style boot is made of durable canvas with a semi-rigid sole to protect
lower leg casts.
• Strong canvas construction
• Non-slip, rocker sole
• Trimmable straps
• Adjustable heel strap
Length measured from cast heel to toe
Part # Description
1138X
Cast Boot
CE Marking
Cast Shoe
Cast Shoe
Protects cast from dirt and wear.
Size #
X = 1
XS
7.25” (18 cm)
3.5” (9 cm)
X = 3
S
9.2” (23 cm)
4.2” (11 cm)
Features
X = 5
M
11” (28 cm)
4.75” (12 cm)
X = 7
L
12.5” (32 cm)
5” (13 cm)
X = 9
XL
13.5” (34 cm)
6” (15 cm)
• Non-skid sole
Part #
Description
SA90100X Cast Shoe, XS-XL
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
111
Part #
Description
11462
11463
11464
11472
11473
11474
Bunion Splint, Left, S
Bunion Splint, Left, M
Bunion Splint, Left, L
Bunion Splint, Right, S
Bunion Splint, Right, M
Bunion Splint, Right, L
Bunion Splint
The Bunion Splint helps maintain ideal hallux positioning and constant metatarsophalangeal
alignment for patients with bunion discomfort.
• Bunion management
• Hallux valgus post-op
• Hammer toe post-op
Features
Part #
006250
006251 99-00021
99-00022 • Constructed entirely of hook and loop materials for
maximum application versatility
• Conforms to any foot contour
• Adjustable hallux positioning
• Thin, lightweight, and washable
Description
Budin Splint-One Toe, Univ
Budin Splint-Two Toe, Univ
Budin Splint-Three Toe, Right
Budin Splint-Three Toe, Left
Budin Splint
Budin Toe Splints help align toes with elastic bands that gently guide deformed toes into place.
Encourages flexing and extension of toes to prevent fixation and rigidity.
• Used to align crooked, overlapping or flexible hammer
toes
• Ideal for post-op use
Features
Adjustable Heel Lifts Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 2
S
N / A
< 7.5
X = 3
M
< 11
8+
X = 4
L
11.5 +
N/A
• Soft, cotton-elastic band uses constant pressure
• Dual-layer foam padding cushions and protects ball of
foot
• Fits easily into most shoes
• Washable and reusable
Adjustable Heel Lifts
Part #
Description
1145X
Adjustable Heel Lifts
The Adjustable Heel Lifts allow you to add up to 3 / 8”of lift, or peel away one or two layers to
create a 1 / 4” or 1 / 8” lift. Resilient rubber layers maintain their corrective lift while still helping
to absorb shock at heel strike.
• Leg length discrepency
Anti-Shox Orthotics Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 3
S
8 - 9
5-6
X = 4
M
10 - 11
7-8
X = 5
L
12 - 13
9 - 10
X = 6
XL
14 - 15
11 - 12
Part #
14172X
14173X
Description
Anti-Shox Conform Orthotics,
5 / 16”, Women’s, S – XL
Anti-Shox Conform Orthotics,
5 / 16”, Men’s, S – XL
18
112
Features
• Three easily removable layers to adjust height from
3 / 8” to 1 / 4” or 1 / 8”
• Excellent durability and patient comfort
• Non-slip construction
Anti-Shox® Conform Orthotics
Anti-Shox Orthotics are comfortable, lightweight orthotics that absorb shock and mold to your
feet for comfort and protection.
• For diabetic and arthritic patients
• Plantar pain
Features
• Soft, blue impact zones for comfort
• Gel / urethane base for support
• Accommodates pressures points
• 5 / 16” thick
• Sold in pairs
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Viscoelastic Insoles Sizing Chart
Viscoelastic Insoles
The Viscoelastic Insoles extend the entire length of the foot in order to dampen impact loads
and reduce discomfort. The insoles provide shock absorption on the foot, ankle, knee and hip.
They are made of a high quality silicone that is durable, comfortable and easy to clean.
• Plantar pain
• Forefoot and toe disformities
• Pressure redistribution
Features
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 3
S
5 – 6
5.5 – 7
X = 4
M
6.5 – 7.5
7.5 – 9
X = 5
L
8 – 9
9.5 – 10
X = 6
XL
9.5 – 10.5
10.5 – 11.5
X = 7
XXL
11 – 12.5
12 – 13.5
X = 8
3XL
13 – 15
14 – 15
• Durable silicone construction
• Cushioned impact zone for comfort
• Fits into most shoes
• Sold in pairs
Part #
Description
14150X
Viscoelastic Insoles,
S-3XL
Silicone Heel Cups
The molded silicone provides shock absorption upon heel strike and helps minimize vibration
loads to joints. The soft blue center helps reduce the impact on pain-sensitive areas.
• Heel spurs
• Heel cushioning and shock absorption
Features
• Soft, blue center
• Sold in pairs
• S – L sizes
• Contains latex
Ankle Foot Orthosis
The Ankle Foot Orthosis is lightweight AFO intended to aid ambulation for patients who suffer
mild to moderate neurological deficit resulting in foot drop. The anatomically correct shape
will fit inside most lace-up shoes. It is made of a durable, thermoplastic may be custom fit and
reshaped for individual comfort.
Silicone Heel Cups Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Men
Women
X = 2
S
N / A
4 – 8.5
X = 3
M
7 – 10.5
9+
X = 4
L
11 +
N/A
Part #
Description
1109X
Silicone Heel Cups
SA90300X Silicone Heel Cups
Ankle Foot Orthosis
Size #
Size
Ankle Circumference
X = 3
S
11”
X = 4
M
12”
• Foot Drop
• Peripheral Neuropathic Disorders
• Post Surgical Achilles Tendon Repair
X = 5
L
13”
X = 6
XL
13” +
Features
Part # Description
• Lightweight yet rigid support
• Easily modified with cast scissors and / or heat gun
• Fits in most shoes
• Universal, Right or Left
10321X Ankle Foot Orthosis, Right,
S-XL
10322X Ankle Foot Orthosis, Left,
S-XL
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
113
17
Part #
142933
142934
142935
Description
Metatarsal Pads, 3/16”, S
Metatarsal Pads, 3/16”, M
Metatarsal Pads, 3/16”, L
Metatarsal Pads 3/16”
The Metatarsal Pads comfortably reduce pressure at the forefoot and metatarsal head. These
cushions can easily fit into most shoes.
• Metatarsal and forefoot injuries
• Bursitis
• Metatarsalgia
• Morton’s neuroma
Features
• Relieves pressure on the metatarsals
• Extra small 3/6” pad for very small modifications
• Adhesive backing to keep in place
• Sold in pairs
Part #
007616
007617
007618
Description
Metatarsal Pads, 1/4”, S
Metatarsal Pads, 5/16”, M
Metatarsal Pads, 3/8”, L
Metatarsal Pad
The Metatarsal Pads comfortably reduce pressure at the forefoot and metatarsal head. These
cushions can easily fit into most shoes.
• Metatarsal and forefoot injuries
• Bursitis
• Metatarsalgia
• Morton’s neuroma
Features
Part #
008460
008431
008459
11074
008461
006798
008176
006282
11073
008027
006797
99-00152
006280
99-00153
006281
• Relieves pressure on the metatarsals
• Foam pad in three sizes (S, M, L)
• Sold individually
Description
Heel Pads, 2 x 1/2”
Heel Pads, 2.5 x 1/2”
Heel Pads
Elevates and cushions the heel from impact. The felt pad fits into most shoes and provides
added shock absorption from activities of daily living.
• Heel spur syndrome
• Bursitis
• Tarsal tunnel syndrome
Features
• Durable felt construction
• Three different heights for individual fit and need
• Sold in pairs
Longitudinal Metatarsal Arch Pad
Part #
Description
006286Longitudinal Metatarsal
Arch Pad, XS
Arch Pad, S
Arch Pad, M
Arch Pad, L
Arch Pad, XL
18
114
The Longitudinal Metatarsal Arch pad supports flat or weak arches. This soft cushion allows the
foot to exercise and flex, which helps strengthen the arch.
• Soft support for fallen or flat arches
• Pes Planus (PP) / flat feet
Features
• Provides a combination of metatarsal and scaphoid
support
• Brings the forefoot into normal alignment to relieve
pressure
• Sold in pairs
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Bracing
Spine
Horizon 631 shown
Customized bracing for
OPTIMAL
SUPPORT
Fusion® XT OA Plus
Knee Brace
The physical demands of working in the construction
business can wreak havoc on the knees.
So when Craig Wagner’s orthopedic surgeon suggested that he use a knee brace to help
his range of motion and alleviate discomfort caused by osteoarthritis, he sought out the
Fusion® XT OA Plus knee brace. In only a month’s time, Craig noticed a considerable difference
since wearing his custom-made brace. “It seemed to immediately change the way I stood on my legs, and
after walking around in the house for a few minutes, it made the discomfort on the inside of my knee joint
dissipate,” he said.
“After returning to work, where I need to use my legs all day on construction projects, I noticed that I
needed to make more of an adjustment to help unload the medial side of my knee. Since then, and after
taking a difficult mountain hike, it appears that the brace is taking care of unloading downward pressure on
the problem area.
“I’m pleased with the results and have increased confidence in my mobility due to lack of a nagging,
painful knee.”
Delivering custom patient solutions: that’s part of Breg 360° Customer Care.
©2014 Breg, Inc. All rights reserved. Fusion is a registered trademark of Breg, Inc.
BREG STORY
Craig Wagner
S pi ne B r a c i ng
Part #
Horizon™ 627 Lumbar
With one of the lowest profile designs of all Horizon products, the Horizon 627 Lumbar provides
excellent support and stability. Using the widely praised SlickTrack™ tightening system, the
Horizon 627 creates circumferential compression proven to increase trunk stability for patients
recovering from surgery or injury. The Horizon 627 is one-size adjustable and comfortably fits
waists from 24-70 inches. Like all Horizon braces, the Horizon 627 Lumbar can be stepped down
to the Horizon PRO for treatment of recurring back conditions.
Description
100053-000 Horizon 627 Lumbar
CE Marking
Features
• Stability and control
• Integrated anterior support
• Adjustable one size fits all
• Post-operative support
• Deconditioned trunk musculature
• Post laminectomy syndrome
• Decompressive procedures
• Degenerative disc disease
• Bulging or herniated disc
• Fracture management
• Spondylolisthesis
• IDET procedure
• Spinal stenosis
• Sprain / strain
• Facet syndrome
• Radiculopathy
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
• Sacrolitis
• Injections
breg.com/hsdr
Horizon 631 LSO
Providing anterior and posterior motion restriction, the Horizon 631 LSO is the perfect blend of
comfort and support. Designed for acute and chronic low back pain, the Horizon 631 provides
compression for patients recovering from surgery or injury. Its low profile design can be
comfortably worn underneath clothing. The Horizon 631 is one-size adjustable and comfortably
fits waists from 24-70 inches. Like all Horizon braces, the Horizon 631 LSO can be stepped down
to the Horizon PRO for treatment of recurring back conditions.
Part #
Description
100054-000 Horizon 631 LSO
CE Marking
• IDET procedure
• Spinal stenosis
• Sprain / strain
• Facet syndrome
• Radiculopathy
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
• Sacrolitis
• Injections
Features
• Stability and control
Manufactured by
Distributed by
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
117
70
Spi n e B ra ci ng
Part #
Description
100055-000 Horizon 637 LSO
CE Marking
Horizon 637 LSO
The Horizon 637 is excellent for post-operative patients in need of lateral support. The addition
of moveable, rigid side panels provide lateral support and a comfortable environment for
healing. The Horizon 637 provides compression for patients recovering from surgery or injury.
The Horizon 637 is one-size adjustable and comfortably fits waists from 24-70 inches, and can be
stepped down to the Horizon 631 LSO and also the Horizon PRO for treatment of recurring back
conditions.
• IDET procedure
• Spinal stenosis
• Sprain / strain
• Facet syndrome
• Radiculopathy
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
• Sacrolitis
• Injections
Features
• Custom support: firm but flexible back panel
• Ergonomically designed pull tabs
• Modular lateral panels
Part #
Description
100056-000 Horizon 456 TLSO
CE Marking
Horizon 456 TLSO
The Horizon 456 is designed to provide motion restriction, creating a dynamic environment for
healing within the thoracolumbar and lumbar spine. Comfortable and easy to apply and remove,
the Horizon 456 improves patient compliance. The Horizon 456 is one-size adjustable and
comfortably fits waists from 24-70 inches. Like all Horizon braces, the Horizon 456 TLSO can be
stepped down to the Horizon PRO, for treatment of recurring back conditions.
• Decompressive procedures – epidurals
• Post-operative support / pain relief
• Kyphosis secondary to osteoporosis
• Scoliosis with musculoskeletal pain
• Spinal stenosis
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
Horizon Accessories
Part #
Description
1000304-000 Horizon Extension Panel
1000326-000 Therapy Pack (Hot / Cold)
Features
• Adjustable telescoping shoulder straps
• Memory Flex™ shoulder strap configuration
• Wide circumference range
Manufactured by
Distributed by
69
118
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Evergreen Sizing Chart
Evergreen™ TLSO
The Evergreen TLSO provides motion restriction in the thoracic and lumbar spine, treating a
wide variety of indications. The back panel and the shoulder straps provide the stability needed
to create a dynamic environment for healing patients with complex spinal conditions.
• Scoliosis with musculoskeletal discomfort
• Spinal stenosis
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
Features
• Custom support: firm but flexible back panel
• Independent upper and lower tightening
• Four to one mechanical advantage
• Thoracic to lumbar
Evergreen LSO
The Evergreen LSO was designed to treat a variety of indications in the lumbar spine.
Size #
Size
Measurement
XX = 10 XS
21” – 27”
(53 – 67 cm)
XX = 20 S
26” – 32”
(66 – 81 cm)
XX = 30 M
31” – 37”
(79 – 94 cm)
XX = 40 L
36” – 42”
(91 – 107 cm)
XX = 50 XL
41” – 47”
(104 – 119 cm)
XX = 60 XXL
43” – 57”
(117 – 145 cm)
Circumference taken at waist level
Part #
Description
100052-0XX Evergreen 456 TLSO,
XS-XXL
CE Marking
Part #
Description
100049-0XX Evergreen 637 LSO, XS-XXL
CE Marking
• IDET procedure
• Spinal stenosis
• Sprain / strain
• Facet syndrome
• Radiculopathy
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
• Sacrolitis
• Injections
Features
• Supportive side panels
• Breathable mesh fabric
• Coverage from 15” to 57” waistlines
Manufactured by
Distributed by
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
119
70
Spi n e B ra ci ng
Evergreen Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Measurement
XX = 10 X Small
21” – 27”
(53 – 67 cm)
XX = 20 Small
26” – 32”
(66 – 81 cm)
XX = 30 Medium
31” – 37”
(79 – 94 cm)
XX = 40 Large
36” – 42”
(91 – 107 cm)
XX = 50 X Large
41” – 47”
(104 – 119 cm)
XX = 60 XX Large 43” – 57”
(117 – 145 cm)
Evergreen LSO LoPro
The Evergreen LSO LoPro treats a variety of indications, from chronic and acute discomfort to
post-operative patients.
• IDET procedure
• Spinal stenosis
• Sprain / strain
• Facet syndrome
• Radiculopathy
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
• Sacrolitis
• Injections
Part #
Description
100050-0XX Evergreen LSO LP 631,
XS-XXL
CE Marking
Features
• Additional support
• Back panel
• Four to one mechanical advantage
Part # Description
100051-0XX Evergreen Lumbar 637,
XS-XXL
Evergreen Lumbar
The Evergreen Lumbar has a comfortable low profile design for managing chronic and acute low
back discomfort.
• IDET procedure
• Spinal stenosis
• Sprain / strain
• Facet syndrome
• SI dysfunction
• Radiculopathy
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
• Sacrolitis
• Injections
CE Marking
Features
• Comfortable low profile
Manufactured by
Distributed by
69
120
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Evergreen Lumbar Lite Sizing Chart
Size #
Evergreen Lumbar Lite
The Evergreen Lumbar Lite has a comfortable low profile design for managing chronic and acute
low back discomfort.
• IDET procedure
• Spinal stenosis
• Sprain / strain
• Radiculopathy
• Spondylosis
• Sacrolitis
• Injections
Size
Measurement
XX = 10 X Small
21” – 27” (53 – 67 cm)
XX = 20 Small
26” – 32” (66 – 81 cm)
XX = 30 Medium
31” – 37” (79 – 94 cm)
XX = 40 Large
36” – 42” (91 – 107 cm)
XX = 50 X Large
41” – 47” (104 – 119 cm)
XX = 60 XX Large 43” – 57” (117 – 145 cm)
Part #
Description
100321-0XX Evergreen 626 Lumbar Lite,
XS-XXL
Features
CE Marking
Evergreen SI Belt
Evergreen SI Belt Sizing Chart
The Evergreen SI Belt has a comfortable low profile design for managing chronic and acute low
back discomfort.
• Sprain / strain
• Facet syndrome
• SI dysfunction
• Sacrolitis
• Injections
Size #
Size
Hip Measurement
XX = 20 Small
25” – 35”
XX = 30 Medium
35” – 45”
XX = 40 Large
45” – 55”
Circumference taken 1” above widest part of hips
Part #
Features
Description
100317-0XX Evergreen 621 SI, S-L
CE Marking
Manufactured by
Distributed by
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
121
70
Spi n e B ra ci ng
Summit 631 Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Hip Measurement
XX = 20 S
26” – 34” (66 – 86 cm)
XX = 30 M
33” – 42” (84 – 107 cm)
XX = 40 L
41” – 51”
(104 – 130 cm)
XX = 50 XL
50” – 60”
(127 – 152 cm)
Summit™ 631
The Summit 631 limits motion and provides effective compression for the relief of low back
conditions.
• IDET procedure
• Spinal stenosis
• Sprain / strain
• Facet syndrome
• SI dysfunction
• Radiculopathy
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
• Sacrolitis
• Injections
Part #
Description
100069-0XX Summit 631, S – XL
100449-000 Summit 631, Adjustable
CE Marking
Features
• Easy, effective compression
• Conforms to different anatomies
• Only four sizes
Summit 637
Size #
Size
Hip Measurement
XX = 20 S
26” – 34” (66 – 86 cm)
XX = 30 M
33” – 42” (84 – 107 cm)
XX = 40 L
41” – 51”
(104 – 130 cm)
XX = 50 XL
50” – 60”
(127 – 152 cm)
The Summit 637 limits motion and provides effective compression for the relief of low back
conditions.
• IDET procedure
• Spinal stenosis
• Sprain / strain
• Facet syndrome
• SI dysfunction
• Radiculopathy
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
• Sacrolitis
• Injections
Part #
Description
100070-0XX Summit 637, S – XL
CE Marking
Features
• Additional coverage
Manufactured by
Distributed by
69
122
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Size #
Summit 456
The Summit 456 was designed very specifically to return kyphotic patients to a functional
midrange. Restores balance and restores daily living.
• Spinal stenosis
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
Size
Hip Measurement
XX = 20 S
26” – 34” (66 – 86 cm)
XX = 30 M
33” – 42” (84 – 107 cm)
XX = 40 L
41” – 51”
(104 – 130 cm)
50” – 60”
(127 – 152 cm)
XX = 50
XL
Part #
Description
100068-0XX Summit 456, S – XL
CE Marking
Features
• Versatile adjustable posterior support
• Thoracic to lumbar
• Comfortable – easy to don and doff
Summit Accessories
Part #
Description
100327-000 Summit Extension Panel
100326-000 Summit Therapy Pack
(Hot/Cold)
CE Marking
Manufactured by
Distributed by
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
123
70
Spi n e B ra ci ng
Part #
Description
100076-000 Vista 627 Lumbar
Vista® 627 Lumbar
The Vista 627 Lumbar is the foundation for each Vista lower spine product.
CE Marking
• IDET procedure
• Spinal stenosis
• Sprain / strain
• Facet syndrome
• SI dysfunction
• Radiculopathy
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
• Sacrolitis
• Injections
Features
• Adjustable: one size fits all
• Lowest profile design
Part #
Description
100075-000 Vista 631 LSO LoPro
CE Marking
Vista 631 LSO LoPro
The Vista 631 LSO LoPro is the perfect blend of comfort and support, promoting a rapid
recovery and return to mobility.
• IDET procedure
• Spinal stenosis
• Sprain / strain
• Facet syndrome
• SI dysfunction
• Radiculopathy
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
• Sacrolitis
• Injections
Features
• Flexion and extension motion support
• Post-op support
• Modular support
Manufactured by
Distributed by
69
124
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Vista 637 LSO
Designed for post-operative patients in need of additional support, the Vista 637 LSO provides
support and relief for secondary back discomfort.
Features
• Flexion and extension support
and lateral control
• Multiple back panel options
• Deconditioned trunk
musculature
• IDET procedure
• Spinal stenosis
• Sprain / strain
• Facet syndrome
• SI dysfunction
• Radiculopathy
Part #
Description
100074-000 Vista 637 LSO
CE Marking
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
• Sacrolitis
• Injections
Vista 639
The Vista® 639 LSO 4 Panel offers significant support for post-operative relief. It delivers ample
coverage from the symphysis pubis to the xiphoid process coupled with overlapping lateral and
anterior panels for unparalleled support in all three planes of motion.
Part #
Description
100446-000 Vista 639 LSO 4 Panel
CE Marking
(Same as Vista 637)
Features
• Rigid anterior and overlapping lateral panel limit all
three planes of motion
• Easily modified to contour and conform to varying
anatomies.
• Modular support, can step down to a Vista 637, Vista
631 and Vista 627 to provide varying support
Vista 464 TLSO
The Vista 464 TLSO offers patients support throughout the thoracolumbar spine, providing a
versatile system that accommodates appropriate motion restriction throughout the healing
process.
Part #
Description
100077-000 Vista 464 TLSO
CE Marking
• Spinal stenosis
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
Vista Accessories
Part #
Description
100328-000 Vista LS Extension Panel
100326-000 Therapy Pack
100333-000 Vista 464 Upgrade Kit
Features
• Three shoulder strap configurations
• Height adjustment technology
• Wide circumference range
Manufactured by
Distributed by
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
125
70
Spi n e B ra ci ng
QuikDraw PRO, RAP, LSO, & TLSO Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Measurement
XX = 10 XX Small
21” – 27” (38 – 53 cm)
XX = 20 Small
26” – 32” (66 – 81 cm)
XX = 30 Medium
31” – 37” (79 – 94 cm)
XX = 40 Large
36” – 42” (91 – 107 cm)
XX = 50 X-Large
41” – 47” (104 – 119 cm)
XX = 60 XX Large
46” – 57” (117 – 145 cm)
QuikDraw™ PRO
The QuikDraw PRO provides powerful compression in a lightweight belt.
• Insidious low back pain
• Chronic low back pain
• IDET procedure
• Spinal stenosis
• Sprain / strain
• Facet syndrome
• SI dysfunction
• Radiculopathy
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
• Sacrolitis
Part #
Description
100060-0XXQuikDraw PRO, Black,
XXS – XXL
CE Marking
Features
• Easy, effective compression
• Only six sizes
Part #
Description
100063-0XXQuikDraw RAP, Black,
XXS – XXL
QuikDraw RAP
The QuikDraw RAP quickly restores functional mobility by providing powerful compression for
immediate relief.
CE Marking
• IDET procedure
• Spinal stenosis
• Sprain / strain
• Facet syndrome
• SI dysfunction
• Radiculopathy
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
• Sacrolitis
• Injections
Accessories
Part #
Description
100057-000 Cold Therapy Pack
100059-000 Black Extention Panel
100066-030 Regular RAP Replacement
Pad
100066-040 Large RAP Replacement
Pad
Features
• Flexion and extension motion support
• Post-op support
• Rapid return to activity
Manufactured by
Distributed by
69
126
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Contour Complete / TLSO Complete Sizing Chart
Contour™ Complete
The Contour Complete is designed for restricting motion in the lumbar spine. The brace is
effective and comfortable, using the patented QuikDraw with Rigid Anterior Panel (RAP) as the
platform.
• IDET procedure
• Spinal stenosis
• Sprain / strain
• Facet syndrome
• SI dysfunction
• Radiculopathy
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
• Sacrolitis
• Injections
Size #
Size
Measurement
XX = 10
XX Small
21” – 27”
(38 – 53 cm)
XX = 20
Small
26” – 32”
(66 – 81 cm)
XX = 30
Medium
31” – 37”
(79 – 94 cm)
XX = 40
Large
36” – 42”
(91 – 107 cm)
XX = 50
X-Large
41” – 47”
(104 – 119 cm)
XX = 60
XX Large
46” – 57”
(117 – 145 cm)
Part #
Description
100043-0XX Contour Complete, Black,
XS – XXL
CE Marking
Contour Accessories
Part #
Description
Features
• Built on the QuikDraw PRO
• Additional posterior support
• Multiple orthotic options
• Modular system
• Adjustable to fit different anatomies
Contour TLSO Complete
The Contour TLSO completes the QuikDraw Bracing System by providing superior motion
restriction for the thoracic and lumbar regions of the spine.
100037-000
100038-000
100059-000
Contour LSO Back Panel,
Black, 12”
Contour LSO Back Panel,
Black, 15”
Back Extension Panel, Black
Part #
Description
100088-0XX Contour TLSO Complete, Black, M – XXL
• Insidious low back pain
• Chronic low back pain
• IDET procedure
• Spinal stenosis
Features
• Sprain / strain
• Effective motion restriction
• Facet syndrome
• Three configurations:
• SI dysfunction
- Shoulder straps and chest panel
• Radiculopathy
- Shoulder straps only
• Spondylosis
- Sternal pad kit
• Severe DJD
• Multiple adjustment points
• Sacrolitis
CE Marking
Manufactured by
Distributed by
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
127
70
Spi n e B ra ci ng
Aspen LSO Sizing Chart
Size
Measurement
Back Panel Cut-Out
Short / Small 26” – 39” (66 – 99 cm)
13”
8”
Short / Large 36” – 49” (91 – 125 cm) 13”
8”
Tall / Small
32” – 47” (81 – 119 cm) 16”
10”
Tall / Large
44” – 59” (112 – 150 cm) 16”
10”
Part #
Aspen® LSO
The Aspen Lumbosacral Bracing System™ offers the practitioner multiple orthotic options that
provide a high degree of immobilization, unparalleled comfort, and the ability to self-adjust to
patients.
• Post-operative support spinal stenosis
• Sprain / strain
• Facet syndrome
• SI dysfunction
• Radiculopathy
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
• Sacrolitis
• Injections
• IDET procedure
Description
100024-020 Aspen LSO, Short / Small
100024-040 Aspen LSO, Short / Large
100009-020 Aspen LSO, Tall / Small
100009-040 Aspen LSO, Tall / Large
100029-020 Aspen LSO, Short / Small, Replacement Pads
100029-040 Aspen LSO, Short / Large, Replacement Pads
100030-020 Aspen LSO, Tall / Small, Replacement Pads
100030-040 Aspen LSO, Tall / Large, Replacement Pads
CE Marking
Features
• Customized support
• Large lumbar window
• Easy LeverLatch™ closure
• Rigid layer of support
Aspen LSO LoPro
Aspen LSO LoPro Sizing Chart
Size
Measurement
Back Panel Cut-Out
Small
26” – 39” (66 – 99 cm)
16”
10”
Large
36” – 49” (91 – 125 cm)
16”
10”
16”
10”
X-Large 46” – 62” (117 – 158 cm)
Part #
Aspen LSO LoPro braces provide pain relief, stabilization and comfort for patient compliance
that leads to better patient outcomes. The Aspen “Low Profile” LSO provides immediate pain
relief and comfortable support.
• Post-operative support spinal stenosis
• Sprain / strain
• Facet syndrome
• SI dysfunction
• Radiculopathy
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
• Sacrolitis
• Injections
• IDET procedure
Description
100027-020 Aspen LSO LoPro, Small
100027-040 Aspen LSO LoPro, Large
100027-050 Aspen LSO LoPro, X-Large
100028-020 Aspen LSO LoPro, Small, Replacement Pads
100028-040 Aspen LSO LoPro, Large, Replacement Pads
100028-050 Aspen LSO, X-Large, Replacement Pads
CE Marking
Features
• Customized support
• Large lumbar window
• Easy LeverLatch closure
• Rigid layer of support
Manufactured by
Distributed by
69
128
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Aspen TLSO Sizing Chart
Aspen TLSO
Size
The Aspen Thoracolumbosacral Orthosis provides superior motion restriction, increased
comfort, and better patient outcomes.
13”8”
Short / Large 36” – 49” (91 – 125 cm) 13”8”
32” – 47” (81 – 119 cm) 16”10”
Tall / Large 44” – 59” (112 – 150 cm) 16”10”
Part #
100031-020
100031-040
100032-020
100032-040
100034-020
100034-040
100035-020
100035-040
Features
• Additional options:
- Full TLSO
- Over the shoulder
- Hyperextension
Description
Aspen TLSO, Short / Small
Aspen TLSO, Short / Large
Aspen TLSO, Tall / Small
Aspen TLSO, Tall / Large
Aspen TLSO Replacement
Pads, Short / Small
Pads, Short / Large
Pads, Tall / Small
Pads, Tall / Large
CE Marking
Manufactured by
CASH Orthosis
Back Panel Cut-Out
Short / Small 26” – 39” (66 – 99 cm)
Tall / Small
• Spinal stenosis
• Spondylosis
• Severe DJD
Measurement
The Cruciform Anterior Spinal Hyperextension (CASH) Orthosis is fully adjustable in height and
width, features wide straps and is available with horizontal or vertical posterior pad.
Aspen TLSO Accessories
Part #
Description
100036-010
100036-020
100036-040
Upgrade Kit, Extra Short ∙
13” Chest Panel
Upgrade Kit, Short ∙ 15.5”
Chest Panel
Upgrade Kit, Tall ∙ 17.5”
Chest Panel
Part #
Description
• Spinal stenosis
• Stable compression fractures of T7-L2
• Osteoporosis
• Kyphosis osteoarthritis
Features
• Wide straps
• 36” belt
019300
019350
019301
019302
CASH Orthosis, Standard
CASH Orthosis, Hinged
Long Vertical Bar
Long Posterior Strap
(107 cm / 42”)
Distributed by
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
129
70
Spi n e B ra ci ng
Back Booster Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Measurement
X=2
XS
26” – 30” (66 – 76 cm)
X=3
S
30” – 34” (76 – 86 cm)
X=4
M
34” – 38” (86 – 96 cm)
X=5
L
38” – 42” (96 – 106 cm)
X=6
XL
42” – 46” (106 – 117 cm)
X=9
XXL
46” – 50” (117 – 127 cm)
Back Booster
The Back Booster is a simple and economical way to manage chronic and acute lower back
discomfort. It’s low profile, breathable and provides gentle support to encourage alignment and
stabilization.
• Low back pain
• Low back sprains / strains
Features
Measurement taken at hip circumference
• Breathable, durable material
• Dual hook and loop fastening for adjustments and
optimal support
Part # Description
01260X Back Booster, XS - XXL
Back Support with Side Pulls Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Waist Measurement
X = 1
XS
20” – 24”
X = 2
S
24” – 30”
X = 3
M
30” – 36”
X = 4
L
36” – 42”
X = 5
XL
42” – 50”
X = 6
XXL
50” – 56”
Back Support with Side Pulls
Durable elastic construction with a unique compression molded lumbar pad provides excellent
support. The additional side pulls allow for greater support and comfort.
• Low back pain
• Lumbar disc injury
Features
• Durable construction with side pulls for added support
• Compression molded lumbar pad
Part # Description
0733X Back Support w/ side pulls,
XS - XXL
CE Marking
Basic Lumbar Support Sizing Chart
Basic Lumbar Support
The Basic Lumbar Support provides compression for lumbar stabilization. The durable, elastic
construction offers side pulls for added support. A Neoprene pocket includes a rigid foam pad
for support and lumbar stabilization.
Size #
Size
Waist Measurement
X = 1
XS
20” – 24”
X = 2
S
24” – 30”
X = 3
M
30” – 36”
X = 4
L
36” – 42”
X = 5
XL
42” – 50”
• Low back pain
• Lumbar disc injury
X = 6
XXL
50” – 56”
Features
• Durable construction
• Double side pulls for added support
Part # Description
1015X Basic Lumbar Support, XS - XXL
CE Marking
Rigid Panel
69
130
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Back Support with Pocket Sizing Chart
Size #
Back Support with Pocket
The Back Support with Pocket provide compression for lumbar stabilization. The durable
construction provides double-pull side panels for added support.
• Low back pain
Features
• Durable flexible construction with double-pull side
panels for additional support
• Specially constructed pocket accommodates moldable
insert or cold therapy packs
• 9” in back tapering to 6” in front
• Posterior accessory sold separately
Size
24” – 26” XX = 12 S
26” – 30” XX = 13 M
30” – 34”
XX = 14 L
34” – 38”
XX = 15 XL
38” – 42”
XX = 16 XXL
42” – 46”
XX = 17 3XL
46” – 50”
XX = 18 4XL
50” – 54”
Circumference measurement taken at waist
Part # Description
070XX
Back Support Panel Accessory
Waist Measurement
XX = 11 XS
Back Support with Pocket,
XS - 4XL
Features
• Moldable insert for additional support
• Constructed of a thermoplasic material
• Foam padded interface for patient comfort
• Applicable for Back Support with Pocket
Part # Description
07010
Clavicle Support
The Clavicle Support is ideal for patients with clavicle fractures and postural problems. It
contains fully padded foam straps for excellent patient comfort. Hook and loop closure allows
for easy adjustment while movable D-rings lead to optimal patient fit. Two sizes, S / M and fits
most patients.
• Clavicular fractures
• Postural problems
Features
• Comfortable foam padded straps
• Movable D-rings for proper fit
Clavicle Support Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 6
S / M
< 40” (40” and below)
X = 7
L / XL
> 40” (above 40”)
Measurement taken at chest level
Part # Description
1129X
Clavicle Support
CE Marking
Clavicle Support Sizing Chart
Clavicle Support
Soft support provides immobilization of the clavicle with easy anterior patient adjustment.
Size #
Size
Chest Measurement
XX = 01 XS
20” – 24” (51 – 61 cm)
XX = 03 S
24” – 30” (61 – 76 cm)
• Clavicular fractures
• AC separations
• Postural problems
XX = 05 M
30 – 36” (76 – 91 cm)
XX = 07 L
36” – 42” (91 – 107 cm)
Features
XX = 09 XL
42” – 48” (107 – 122 cm)
• Urethane foam-contoured straps for fit and comfort
• Easy-touch closures are fully adjustable
• Tension is easily adjusted with rear buckles
Part #
Description
SA3010XX Clavicle Support, XS – XL
CE Marking
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
131
70
Spi n e B ra ci ng
OrthoLux ® Sizing Chart
SizeHip
Waist
Rib
SM
MD
LG
XL
2X
3X
4X
28 - 34"
71 - 86 cm
30 - 37"
76 - 94 cm
34 - 42"
86 - 107 cm
38 - 45"
97 - 114 cm
43 - 51"
109 - 130 cm
47 - 55"
119 - 140 cm
53 - 61"
135 - 155 cm
28 - 34"
71 - 86 cm
30 - 36"
76 - 91 cm
34 - 40"
86 - 102 cm
38 - 45"
97 - 114 cm
43 - 51"
109 - 130 cm
47 - 55"
119 - 140 cm
53 - 61"
135 - 155 cm
29 - 35"
74 - 89 cm
32 - 39"
81 - 99 cm
36 - 42"
91 - 107 cm
39 - 47"
99 - 119 cm
45 - 52"
114 - 132 cm
51 - 56"
130 - 142 cm
57 - 63"
145 - 160 cm
Anterior
LP/PL
MP/PM
SP PS
6 1/2"
17 cm
7 1/4"
18 cm
7 1/4"
18 cm
7 1/2"
19 cm
7 1/2"
19 cm
7 3/4"
20 cm
7 3/4"
20 cm
8"
20 cm
8 3/4"
22 cm
8 3/4"
22 cm
9 1/2"
24 cm
9 1/2"
24 cm
10"
25 cm
10"
25 cm
9 1/2"
24 cm
10 1/2"
27cm
10 1/2"
27cm
11 1/2"
29 cm
11 1/2"
29 cm
11 1/2"
29 cm
11 1/2"
29 cm
Posterior
LSMLSO TLSO
12 1/2"
32 cm
12 1/2"
32 cm
13"
33 cm
13"
33 cm
13 3/4"
35 cm
14 1/4"
36 cm
14 1/4"
36 cm
16
42
16
42
16
42
16
42
18
47
18
47
18
48
3/8"
cm
1/2"
cm
1/2"
cm
1/2"
cm
1/2"
cm
1/2"
cm
3/4"
cm
18 3/4"
48 cm
19 3/4"
50 cm
19 3/4"
50 cm
19 3/4"
50 cm
20"
51 cm
20"
51 cm
20"
51 cm
OrthoLux®
The OrthoLux is a semi-customizable, prefabricated clamshell brace that provides superior
anterior, posterior and lateral spinal motion restriction, while maintaining patient comfort.
Available in three posterior and anterior heights, the OrthoLux can be ordered to fit the majority
of patient profiles with precision. The anterior insert is pre-drilled and Extender ready. The
OrthoLux SR, available on the LSO, is the same great OrthoLux with an open spinal relief in the
posterior panel – allowing greater breathability and increased access to the lumbar spine.
Features
Fabric posterior and anterior panels with
kydex inserts
• Maximum support
• Patient comfort
• Heat moldable
• Chronic back pain
• Compression fracture
• Degenerative Disc Disease
• Herniated / bulging disc
• Kyphosis
• Ligament strain / sprain
• Osteoporosis
• Post-Laminectomy
• Spinal stabilization
• Spinal Stenosis
Lateral control panels
• Rigid support
• Pre-molded
• Padded for comfort
D-Ring closure straps
• Easy compression
• Patient-friendly
Variations
Tri-laminate fabric
• Breathable
• Moisture wicking
• Washable
Posterior profile:
• LSM, LSO, TLSO
Anterior profile:
• LP – Low-profile
• MP – Mid-profile
• SP – Standard profile
• PL – Pendulous low
• PM – Pendulous mid
• PS – Pendulous
standard
Lordosis:
• 15°
CE Marking
OrthoLux LSM
OrthoLux LSO
OrthoLux TLSO
OrthoLux Part Number Configuration Matrix
Product
ORT OSR
Style
LSMLSOTLSO
Sex
U
Size
SM MD LG XL XX 3X 4X
ORT – Ortholux
OSR – Ortholux with Spinal Relief (posterior hole)
**Only available in LSO
Profile
LP PL MP PM SP PS
LP – Low profile
PL – Pendulous low
MP –Mid profile
PM –Mendulous mid
SP – Standard profile
Lordosis
15
15 –
Degree of Lordosis
PS – Pendulous standard
Explanation for building a part number:
These products are linear, building left to right. You choose one option from each box and
separate them with hyphens. Example part number: ORT-LSO-U-LG-SP-15
69
132
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
VertaLux ® Sizing Chart
VertaLux®
The VertaLux is a hybrid spinal brace that combines a tri-laminate anterior panel, containing
a rigid polymer insert, with a molded posterior rigid frame to provide comfortable motion
restriction. The VertaLux also features patient-friendly pull straps with D-rings for application of
comfortable compression. The VertaLux comes standard with an open spinal relief cutout in the
posterior shell, molded polyethylene lateral tongues, and an Extender-ready, pre-drilled anterior
insert.
Features
Molded posterior shell
• Maximum support
• Conforms to spine
• Chronic back pain
• Compression fracture
• Degenerative Disc Disease
• Herniated / bulging disc
• Kyphosis
• Ligament strain / sprain
• Osteoporosis
• Post-Laminectomy
• Spinal stabilization
• Spinal Stenosis
• Spondylolysis
Waist
Rib
SM
MD
LG
XL
2X
3X
4X
28 - 34"
71 - 86 cm
30 - 37"
76 - 94 cm
34 - 42"
86 - 107 cm
38 - 45"
97 - 114 cm
43 - 51"
109 - 130 cm
47 - 55"
119 - 140 cm
53 - 61"
135 - 155 cm
28 - 34"
71 - 86 cm
30 - 36"
76 - 91 cm
34 - 40"
86 - 102 cm
38 - 45"
97 - 114 cm
43 - 51"
109 - 130 cm
47 - 55"
119 - 140 cm
53 - 61"
135 - 155 cm
29 - 35"
74 - 89 cm
32 - 39"
81 - 99 cm
36 - 42"
91 - 107 cm
39 - 47"
99 - 119 cm
45 - 52"
114 - 132 cm
51 - 56"
130 - 142 cm
57 - 63"
145 - 160 cm
Anterior
Fabric anterior panel with kydex insert
• Heat moldable
• Patient comfort
D-Ring closure straps
• Easy compression
Tri-laminate fabric
• Breathable
• Washable
Variations
SizeHip
Posterior profile:
• LSM, LSO, TLSO
Anterior profile:
• MP – Mid-profile
• PL – Pendulous low
• PM – Pendulous mid
• PS – Pendulous
standard
Lordosis:
• 15°
LP / PL
MP / PM
SP / PS
6 1 / 2"
17 cm
7 1 / 4"
18 cm
7 1 / 4"
18 cm
7 1 / 2"
19 cm
7 1 / 2"
19 cm
7 3 / 4"
20 cm
7 3 / 4"
20 cm
8"
20 cm
8 3 / 4"
22 cm
8 3 / 4"
22 cm
9 1 / 2"
24 cm
9 1 / 2"
24 cm
10"
25 cm
10"
25 cm
9 1 / 2"
24 cm
10 1 / 2"
27 cm
10 1 / 2"
27 cm
11 1 / 2"
29 cm
11 1 / 2"
29 cm
11 1 / 2"
29 cm
11 1 / 2"
29 cm
Posterior
LSMLSO TLSO
12 3 / 4”
32 cm
13 1 / 8”
33 cm
13 7 / 8”
35 cm
14 1 / 4”
36 cm
14 3 / 4”
37 cm
14 3 / 4”
37 cm
14 3 / 4”
37 cm
14
37
15
38
15
40
16
41
16
43
16
43
16
43
3 / 4”
cm
1 / 8”
cm
7 / 8”
cm
1 / 4”
cm
3 / 4”
cm
3 / 4”
cm
3 / 4”
cm
17
45
18
46
18
48
19
49
19
50
19
50
19
50
3 / 4”
cm
1 / 8”
cm
7 / 8”
cm
1 / 4”
cm
3 / 4”
cm
3 / 4”
cm
3 / 4”
cm
CE Marking
VertaLux LSM
VertaLux LSO
VertaLux TLSO
VertaLux Part Number Configuration Matrix
Product
VLP
Style
Sex
LSM LSOTLSO U
Size
SM MD LG
Anterior Profile
Lordosis
XL XX 3X 4X LP PL MP PM SP PS
15
Explanation for building a part number:
These products are linear, building left to right. You choose one option from each box and
separate them with hyphens. Example part number: VLP-LSO-U-LG-SP-15
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
133
70
Spi n e B ra ci ng
Ninja Sizing Chart
Ninja
SizeWaist
SM
28 - 33"
71 - 84 cm
MD
33 - 38"
84 - 97 cm
LG
38 - 43"
97 - 109 cm
43 - 48"
XL
109 - 122 cm
2X
48 - 54"
122 - 137 cm
3X
54 - 60"
137 - 152 cm
4X
60 - 65"
152 - 165 cm
The Ninja is a modular system built upon a comfortable yet supportive belt with a 6:1 mechanical
advantage compression system, using a single pull strap. One easy pull securely forms the
Ninja to the patient’s torso and provides intra-abdominal compression, reducing the load on
intervertebral discs. The Ninja’s unique strap design is more robust than a traditional string
brace, making it more durable for long-term use. Best of all, the Ninja is a progressive orthosis –
as the patient heals, the support and control can be progressively diminished.
Anterior
Ninja LSM
• Lumbar laminectomy
• Mechanical back pain
• Multiple level decompression
• Posterior lateral fusion
Ninja PRO LSO
• Lumbar spinal laminectomy
• Multiple level
• Decompression
• Spinal Stenosis
• Spondylolysis
Ninja LSO
• Disc degeneration
• Disc herniation
• Lumbar discectomy
• Multilevel fusion
• Revision surgery
• Thoracolumbar injury
Ninja PRO TLSO
• Thoracic compression fractures
• Thoracic mechanical back pain
• Spinal stenosis
LPSP
6”
15 cm
6”
15 cm
6”
15 cm
6”
15 cm
6 1/2”
17 cm
6 1/2”
17 cm
6 1/2”
17 cm
7 1/2”
19 cm
7 1/2”
19 cm
7 1/2”
19 cm
7 1/2”
19 cm
8”
20 cm
8”
20 cm
8”
20 cm
Features
Posterior
BELT LSM
9”
23 cm 9” 23 cm 9” 23 cm 9” 23 cm 9” 23 cm 9” 23 cm 9” 23 cm 9 3/4”
25 cm
9 3/4”
25 cm
9 3/4”
25 cm
9 3/4”
25 cm
9 3/4”
25 cm
9 3/4”
25 cm
9 3/4”
25 cm
LSO
PRO LSO
14 1/2”
37 cm
14 1/2”
37 cm
14 1/2”
37 cm
14 1/2”
37 cm
14 1/2”
37 cm
14 1/2”
37 cm
14 1/2”
37 cm
14 1/4”
36 cm
14 1/4”
36 cm
14 1/4”
36 cm
14 1/4”
36 cm
14 1/4”
36 cm
14 1/4”
36 cm
14 1/4”
36 cm
PRO TLSO
17 1/4”
44 cm
17 1/4”
44 cm
17 1/4”
44 cm
17 1/4”
44 cm
17 1/4”
44 cm
17 1/4”
44 cm
17 1/4”
44 cm
Quick-Pull 6:1 mechanical
advantage compression
system
• Easy-to-apply intraabdominal compression with
minimal effort
Single pull-strap closure
• Easy one hand adjustment
• Patient-friendly, especially
for arthritic patients
Variations
Modular design
• Progressive
• Support & control
Posterior profile:
• LSM – Adjustable plate
• LSO – Adjustable plate
• PRO LSO – Molded shell
• PRO TLSO – Molded shell
Tri-laminate fabric
• Breathable
• Washable
Anterior Profile:
Front closure
• Easy to Don & Doff
Lordosis:
• LSM, LSO – Adjustable
• PRO LSO, PRO TLSO – 15°
Optional panel increases total belt length to 73".
CE Marking
Ninja LSM
Ninja LSO
Ninja PRO LSO
Ninja PRO TLSO
Ninja Part Number Configuration Matrix
Product
NJ
Style
Profile
Size
MaterialLordosis
BELT LSM LSO PRO LSO PRO TLSO LP SPSMMDLG XL XX3X4XADJ15
The Ninja product family is built without a hyphen between the product and style.
Example part number: NJTLSO-SP-LG-KYD-15
69
134
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Pinnacle™
Introducing our universal string pulley back support. With a 5:1 mechanical advantage, the
one-pull design allows patients to easily adjust compression tension with one hand. The corset
is designed to easily adapt to hip angulation and changes due to swelling. The fold-in design of
the corset allows for size adjustability without cutting. Advancements in materials, breathability,
compression and comfort can help improve patient compliance and clinical outcomes.
Pinnacle can be purchased pre-sized.
LSM
• Lumbar laminectomy
• Multiple level
decompression
Part #
LSO
To order:
PRO LSO
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Description
AB052123 Pulley Assembly, Small
AB052127 Pulley Assembly, Large
AB052130 Lateral Plate w/ Pad (One)
AB052104 TLSO, w/ Pad
AB052179 Anterior Plate w/ Pad
Low Profile
AB052120Anterior Plate w/ Pad
Mid Profile
AB052114 Anterior Plate w/ Pad
Standard Profile
AB052125 LSO Posterior Panel w/ Pad
AB052124 LSM Posterior Panel w/ Pad
PB001220Anterior Thoracic Extension
(ATE)
KT000022 Lateral Panel Locks
(w/ All L0637 Configurations)
PB101220 Over the Shoulder Straps
(OTSS), Universal
• One-pull compression
• 5:1 mechanical pull system
• Strong, breathable ultra lightweight
corset
• Removable and easy to position
pulley system
• True modular system
• Universal
LSM
Belt (Corset) Only, M, XL*
LSM, M, XL*
LSO, M, XL*
PRO LSO, M, XL*
TLSO, M, XL*
CE Marking
TLSO
• Thoracic compression fractures
• Thoracic mechanical back pain
• Spinal Stenosis
• Spondylolysis
Features
Pinnacle
PBXX0625
PBXXY627
PBXXY631
PBXXY637
PBXXY456
Y = 1 (Low Profile), 2 (Mid Profile),
3 (Standard Profile)
XX = 05 (M), 09 (XL) Universal Sizing*
PRO LSO
• Multiple level
• Decompression
• Spinal Stenosis
• Spondylolysis
LSO
• Disc degeneration
• Disc herniation
• Lumbar discectomy
• Multilevel fusion
• Revision surgery
• Thoracolumbar injury
Part # Description
TLSO
135
70
Spi n e B ra ci ng
Extender
CE Marking
The Extender is an anterior thoracic extension designed to be used with most of Bledsoe’s
spinal braces. This component helps to achieve additional flexion control. Every Extender
you order comes complete with all screws, hardware and instructions for easy attachment
to the anterior panel.
• Kyphosis
Features
Sliding adjustable bars
• Custom fit
Three sternal designs
• Semi-custom fit
Aerospace quality
aluminum construction
• Lightweight
• Bendable
EXT – PS
ADJ
Variations
• EXT-PS – Pivoting
Silicone Pads
• EXT-STH – Articulating
Rigid Sternal Plate
• EXT-STP – Concaved Kydex
Sternal Plate
• Optional shoulder straps
are available for added
support and comfort
EXT – PS
FIXED
EXT – STH
ADJ
EXT – STH
FIXED
Accessories
• Soft foam covers
• Shoulder straps
EXT – STP
ADJ
EXT – STP
FIXED
Extender Part Number Configuration Matrix
Product
EXT
Type
PS STP STH
Bar Type
FXDADJ
Straps
BLK NS
Soft Covers
WSC NSC
Example Part Number:
EXT-STP-ADJ-BLK-WSC
Part #
Description
OPT-TLS-EXT Posterior Harness, Mickey
OP-TLS-EXT2 Posterior Harness, Minnie
Accessories
A variety of accessories are available to be used in conjunction with Bledsoe braces
to further maximize the functionality and comfort of each brace.
Posterior Harnesses
Mickey – The Mickey is a posterior harness
that can be used with many of Bledsoe’s
spinal braces. Providing a back-pack style
support, it helps control kyphosis. Starting
posteriorly, the straps pass over the
shoulders then back under the axillae to
reattach to itself in the posterior.
69
136
To order:
Minnie – The Minnie is also a posterior
harness and like the Mickey, it is designed to
help control kyphosis. However, the Minnie
does not come with its own straps. Instead,
it is designed to work in conjunction with the
Extender and its straps. The Extender’s straps
pass over the shoulders and attach to the
Minnie without going back under the axillae.
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Ace Brace Sizing Chart
Ace Brace
Height Width
The Ace Brace is a hyperextension orthosis. The simple front closure of this CASH-style brace
makes donning and doffing easier for geriatric patients and those with arthritic hands. Its
one-size-fits-most comfortable design conveniently reduces inventory costs while providing a
semi-customized fit for each patient’s needs. The PS and PV versions are available with a V-style
pectoral top which eliminates sternal pressure and throat impingement.
Common Examples of Use Features
• Flexible Thoracic
Kyphosis
• Stable compression
fractures between
T-7 and L-2
• Osteoporosis
Ace-PS
Fully Adjustable
• One-size-fits-most
• Maximum comfort
Front Closure
• Easy to Don &
Doff
Articulating Pectoral
Interface
• Comfortable
• Relieves sternal
pressure
Lightweight
• To improve
patient
compliance
Ace-PV
Variations
• Ace-PS – Pectoral
silicone articulating,
self-centering
pectoral plates
• Ace-PV – Pectoral
hook and loop
articulating,
self-centering
pectoral plates
• Ace-ST – Hinged
sternal top plate
Each style available
with longer bar
option.
Ace-PS
12 1/4” - 18 7/8”
31 - 48 cm
8 1/4” - 11 7/8”
21 - 30 cm
Ace-PV
11 7/8” - 18 3/8”
30 - 47 cm
8 1/4” - 11 7/8”
21 - 30 cm
Ace-ST11 1/2” - 17 1/2”
29 - 44 cm
Ace-PS-X 15 1/2” - 22 1/8”
39 - 56 cm
Ace-PV-X 15 1/8” - 21 5/8”
38 - 55 cm
Ace-ST-X 14 3/4” - 20 3/4”
37 - 53 cm
8 1/4” - 11
21 - 30 cm
9 3/4” - 13
25 - 34 cm
9 3/4” - 13
25 - 34 cm
9 3/4” - 13
25 - 34 cm
7/8”
3/8”
3/8”
3/8”
X denotes longer bars.
CE Marking
Ace-ST
Ace Brace Part Number Configuration Matrix
ProductStyle
ACE
PVPS ST
Example Part Number:
ACE-PS
Soft Foam Covers
Straps
Black Straps
External Bars
For the
Extender STP
For the
Extender STH
or Ace-ST
To order:
For the
Extender PS
or Ace-PS / PV
Fixed
aluminum
extension
bar
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Sliding
adjustable
aluminum
extension bar
137
70
Spi n e B ra ci ng
Part #
Description
100071-000 Vista Collar
100072-000Vista Collar Set with Extra
Replacement Pads
100073-000Vista Collar Replacement
Pads
Vista® Cervical Collar
The Vista Cervical Collar improves patient care while saving time, money and storage space.
With its innovative height adjustment technology, the Vista is really six collars in one. The right
size is always at hand, reducing storage and inventory costs, while improving patient care.
• Cervicogenic headache
• Cervical disc syndrome
• Post surgical stabilization
• Trauma / whiplash
• Sprain / strain
• Radiculopathy
CE Marking
Features
• Six sizes in one collar
• Dial height adjustment
• Reduce inventory and waste
• Improved skin care
Part #
Description
100084-000 Vista TX Collar
100085-000 Vista TX Set with Extra Replacement Pads
100086-000Vista TX Replacement
Pads
Vista TX
The Vista TX encompasses all of the features and benefits of the already popular Vista Cervical
Collar, now with a thoracic extension. The Vista TX improves patient care while saving time,
money and storage space. With its innovative height adjustment technology, the Vista TX is
really six collars in one. The correct size is always at hand, reducing storage and inventory costs
while improving patient care.
CE Marking
• Sprain / strain
• Radiculopathy
Vista Accessories
Part #
Description
100329-000
100330-000
100331-000
100332-000
Features
Standard Back Panel
Large Back Panel
Vista ICU Back Panel
Vista ICU Back Panel Replacement Pad
• Thoracic extension
• Extended support
Manufactured by
Distributed by
69
138
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Vista MultiPost Collar
The Vista MultiPost Collar is the latest addition to the award-winning Vista Cervical Collar
and offers an extra level of support for greater motion restriction. The new fully adjustable
Vista MultiPost Back Panel adds an extra level of support for greater motion restriction. Like
the original Vista Collar, the Vista MultiPost is one size adjustable, virtually eliminating waste
associated with collar sizing errors. The Vista MultiPost Collar utilizes the proven cotton-lined
pads and is designed to enhance skin care by reducing patient contact points in the occipital
area.
Part #
100078-000
100079-000
100080-000
Description
Vista MultiPost Collar Set
Replacement Pads
CE Marking
• Sprain / strain
• Radiculopathy
Features
• Adjustable back panel
• Pivoting occipital panels
• Pads self adjust to cradle all head shapes – even the
most hard to fit
Vista CTO
The Vista CTO has multiple adjustment points to ensure a comfortable, effective fit for the vast
variety of patient anatomies. Like the Vista Collar, the Vista CTO is fully adjustable and only one
size is required, reducing inventory costs and keeping patient care the main priority.
Part #
Description
100081-000 Vista CTO
100083-000 Vista CTO Upgrade Kit
100336-000 Vista CTO Replacement
Pads
CE Marking
• Cervicothoracic instability
Features
• Accommodates anatomical changes
• One size
Manufactured by
Distributed by
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
139
70
Spi n e B ra ci ng
Part #
Description
100334-000 Vista CTO4
100335-000 Vista CTO4 Upgrade Kit
100336-000 Vista CTO4 Replacement
Pads
CE Marking
Vista CTO4
The Vista CTO4 is designed to provide motion restriction throughout the cervico-thoracic
spine and can easily be stepped down to the Vista CTO then Vista MultiPost to support the
progression of care. Significant motion control is provided in all three planes of motion—flexion /
extension, lateral bending and axial rotation. Even while providing this level of motion restriction,
the Vista CTO4 is comfortable for the patient to wear, and padded at all contact points, helping
to ensure compliance. The Vista CTO4 is designed to provide motion restriction throughout the
cervico-thoracic spine and can easily be stepped down to the Vista CTO then Vista MultiPost to
support the progression of care.
Features
• Accommodates anatomical changes
• One size
Part #
Description
100010-020 Aspen Cervical Collar,
Short
Regular
Tall
X-Tall
100015-020 Aspen Collar Sets, Short
100015-030 Aspen Collar Sets, Regular
100015-040 Aspen Collar Sets, Tall
100015-050 Aspen Collar Sets, X-Tall
Aspen Cervical Collar
Aspen Cervical Collars were designed to optimize support and comfort, two key components
for better patient outcomes. The structure of the collar was engineered to provide substantial
motion restriction without producing painful pressure points that can lead to skin breakdown
or poor patient compliance. For the ultimate in comfort, all contact surfaces of the collar are
cushioned with cotton-lined, breathable foam padding.
• Sprain / strain
• Radiculopathy
CE Marking
Aspen Collar Accessories
Part #
Description
Features
100014-000 Universal Replacement Pads,
Short Front Panel
100013-020 Aspen Collar Front Panel,
Short Front Panel
Regular Front Panel
Tall Front Panel
X-Tall Front Panel
100011-020 Small Back Panel, 12-20 in /
30-51 cm circumference
100011-030 Adult Large Back, 13-21 in /
100011-040 Adult Standard Back, 15-25 in /
100012-040 Aspen Collar Back Pad, Large
CE Marking
69
140
• Minimize skin breakdown
• Better patient outcomes
Manufactured by
Distributed by
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Aspen Pediatric Collar
SizeAge
Children need medical products designed specifically for them. Aspen understands this and
offers five sizes of pediatric cervical collars, allowing you to provide the highest level of patient
care.
• Sprain / strain
• Radiculopathy
Features
• Available in five pediatric sizes
Measurement
Weight
PD1 1-18 mos. 22” – 33” (53 – 84 cm)
11 – 29 lbs.
PD2 9-24 mos. 29” – 37” (74 – 94 cm)
22 – 33 lbs.
PD3 1-3 years 33” – 40” (84 – 102 cm) 24 – 36 lbs.
PD4 2-5 years 35” – 45” (89 – 114 cm) 26 – 42 lbs.
PD5 3-6 years 37” – 48” (94 – 122 cm) 27 – 54 lbs.
Measurement is taken at length
Part #
100277-000
100278-000
100279-000
100280-000
100281-000
Description
PD1 Aspen Pediatric Collar
CE Marking
Aspen Pediatric Collar Accessories
Part #
Description
100287-000 PD1, PD2 Replacement
Pads
100288-000 PD3, PD4, PD5
Replacement Pads
100290-000 PD3, PD4, PD5 Back Panel,
8.5-13 in / 22-33 cm
circumference
Aspen Sierra™ Universal Collar
With just a single size, the Aspen Sierra Universal Collar fits the vast majority of patients. Its
unique design provides the comfort and motion restriction needed to protect your patients. You
can feel confident you will get the right size for the right fit... right away. And, since the single
size and compact design alleviate storage problems, the collar is available whenever you need it.
CE Marking
Part #
Description
100067-000 Aspen Sierra Universal
Collar
CE Marking
Features
• Proven performance
• MRI compatible
Manufactured by
Distributed by
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
141
70
Spi n e B ra ci ng
Part #
100016-020
100016-030
100016-040
100016-050
100337-000
Description
Aspen CTO, Short
Aspen CTO, Regular
Aspen CTO, Tall
Aspen CTO, X-Tall
Aspen CTO, Pediatric
Aspen CTO
The Aspen CTO system offers the greatest versatility available when dealing with cervicalthoracic problems in today’s cost conscious healthcare environment
• MRI compatible
• Available in two or four post-option
• Available in a pediatric CTO
CE Marking
Features
Aspen CTO Accessories
Part #
Description
100020-000
100021-000
100022-000
100019-020
100019-030
100019-040
100019-050
100018-020
100018-030
100018-040
Replacement Pads,
Adult Pad Set
Replacement Pads,
Pediatric Pad Set
Replacement Pads,
Adult Vest Pad Set
CTO Front Panel, Short
CTO Front Panel, Regular
CTO Front Panel, Tall
CTO Front Panel, X-Tall
CTO Back Panel, Small
CTO Back Panel, Standard
CTO Back Panel, Large
Manufactured by
Distributed by
69
142
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Cervical Collar with Open Trachea
The Cervical Collar with Open Trachea is constructed of two piece semi-rigid foam. It provides
excellent immobilization while allowing anterior access to the neck. It is available in three heights
for an intimate fit.
• Immobilization of cervical spine
Features
• Reduces rotation and slightly hyperextends the cervical
spine
• Provides rigid immobilization
• Excellent for emergency tracheotomies and quick access
to the neck
• Molded and shaped to conform to any patient
• Constructed of lightweight closed cell foam material
• Hook and loop closure facilitates easy application and
removal
Size #
Size
Neck Circumference
X = 2
S
10” – 13” X = 3
M
13” – 16” X = 4
L
16” – 19”
X = 5
XL
19” +
Circumference measurement taken at neck
Part # Description
1131X
1132X
1134X
Cervical Collar with Open
Trachea, 2.25”, S - XL
CE Marking
Cervical Collar Low Density
The low density cervical collar provides comfortable support of the cervical spine. It is made of a
3” low density foam and covered in a stockinette. It contains a hook and loop closure and available
in multiple sizes to accommodate a wide range of patient sizes.
• Mild cervical sprains
• Sprains
• Post-operative rehabilitation
Features
• Soft low density foam
• 3” height
information
Size #
Size
X = 2
XS
X = 3
S
X = 4
M
X = 5
L
X = 6
XL
X = 9
XXL
Part # Description
07010X Cervical Collar Low Density,
XS – XXL
074600 Cervical Collar Low Density,
Universal
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
143
70
Spi n e B ra ci ng
Cervical Collar - Serpentine Sizing Chart
Cervical Collar Serpentine
LengthHeight
The serpentine shaped Cervical Collar provides excellent support of the cervical spine. It
features a hook and loop closure and is universally sized to fit a wide range of neck widths.
21”3”
Part # Description
11019
• Mild cervical strains
• Sprains
Cervical Collar – Serpentine
Features
• Contoured to give uniform support
• 3” medium density form covered with stockinette
Cervical Collar Medium Density
Size #
Size
Length
Height
X=2Ped 13.25”
3”
X=3S
14.75”
3.25”
X=4M
17.5”
3.38”
X=5L
18.5”
3.38”
X=6XL
20.13”
3.5”
X=9XXL 22.75”
3.5”
Part # Description
11286
07030X
Cervical Collar (Universal)
Cervical Collar Medium Density,
XXS - XXL
The contoured, universal Cervical Collar Medium Density provides comfortable, uniform support
of the cervical spine in a neutral position. It is constructed of 3” medium density foam, covered
with a removable, washable stockinette. The universal Cervical Collar Medium Density features
hook and loop closure and a foam width extender to support a wide range of neck widths.
• Mild cervical strains
• Sprains
Features
• Tapered chin cutaway
information
69
144
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Bracing
Shoulder
INNOVATION
through
COLLABORATION
“A lot of companies talk about
the importance of customer input:
Breg actually backs it up.”
– Troy Erickson, DO*
Duluth, Minnesota
Working together to fix a pressing problem.
When Breg Product Manager Tony Butler set out to build the optimal shoulder brace,
he and Breg Engineer James Fout hit the road with a prototype. They gathered direct
feedback from surgeons, like Dr. Erickson, and their patients. The end result: the
SlingShot® 3 shoulder brace.
“SlingShot 3 is a huge change,” Dr. Erickson says. “Patients who have worn other braces can’t
believe how good it feels. Because it’s comfortable, they wear it, so our outcomes are better.”
“The brace addresses problems plaguing surgeons and patients for years,” says Tony, “mainly
strap pressure on the neck. From direct customer input, we’ve created an off-loading shoulder brace u
nlike
anything else.”
Involving customers in product creation is just another way we demonstrate 360° Customer Care. Experience it today. Visit www.breg.com, or call 800-897-BREG (2734).
©2014 Breg, Inc. All rights reserved. SlingShot is a trademark of Breg, Inc. No fee was paid for the use of this testimonial.
* Not an official product endorsement. Brace wearer is not a patient.
BREG STORY
Dr. Troy Erickson
S h ou ld er B r a c i ng
ARC 2.0
Our signature aluminum waistband is moldable to each patient’s unique torso shape and
prevents anterior migration that is common with shoulder braces. The ARC 2.0 universal sling
design folds to fit every patient with one brace – right or left, football player or gymnast. The
ARC 2.0 features 2.0 material for maximum breathability and comfort. 2.0 material moves
moisture away from the skin to another layer of fabric for quick evaporation.
Part #
Description
AE050400 ARC 2.0 Shoulder Brace,
Universal
AE050420 Under Arm Strap Kit
AE050410 2.0 Sling Kit
AE050510 2.0 Pillow Kit
CE Marking
• For non-surgical or post-op shoulder conditions that
require diagnosis-specific arm positioning
•Rotator cuff repairs
•Bankart lesions
•SLAP lesions
•Glenohumeral dislocations / subluxation
•Posterior / Anterior capsule repairs
•Shoulder instabilities
•Muscle and tendon repair
•Joint reconstruction
Features
• Brace positions include gunslinger, neutral plane and
external rotation
• Universal sling design to fit every patient with one brace
• Unique pistol grip adjusts with quick-pull tabs and
keeps the arm from migrating forward out of the sling
• Optional underarm strap relieves pressure on the neck
for larger patients and patients positioned in external
rotation
• One-hand buckles ease patient reapplication
• Cold therapy cutout in the sling
Pistol Grip
Quick-Pull Tabs
0° to Full Internal Rotation
69
To order:
One-Hand Buckle
15°–45° Abduction
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Cold Therapy Cutout
Up to 70° External Rotation
147
70
Sh ou l d e r B ra cing
Part # Description
AE050500 ARC 2.0 w/ Pillow,
Universal
ARC 2.0 With Pillow
Our signature ARC sling and new 2.0 material in a traditional pillow design. Universal sling
design folds to fit every patient with one brace – right or left,from football player to gymnast.
The unique 2.0 material captures moisture and moves it away from the skin to another layer of
fabric for quick evaporation, drying the skin four times faster than typical breathable materials.
•Bankart lesions
•SLAP lesions
Features
• Traditional pillow design with 15° Abduction Pillow
• Unique pistol grip adjusts with quick-pull tabs and
keeps the elbow seated in the sling and prevents the
hand from migrating forward out of the sling
• Optional underarm strap relieves pressure on the neck
and reduces internal rotation
• One-hand buckles ease patient reapplication
• Cold therapy cutout in the sling
SlingShot® 3 Shoulder Brace
KNEE
SIZING3CHART
SlingShot
Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Length
X = 2
S
11.5” – 13”
X = 3
M
13.5” – 14.5” (34 - 37 cm)
X = 4
L
15” – 16”
X = 5
XL
16.5” – 17.5” (42 - 45 cm)
(29 - 33 cm)
(38 - 41 cm)
Measurement taken from olecranon to knuckles
Part # Description
0004X
00008
SlingShot 3, S – XL
Extension Strap
CE Marking
The SlingShot 3 is a clinician-driven innovation in shoulder bracing. Its design provides excellent
comfort for the patient recovering from surgery while providing multiple options of postoperative support.
• Rotator cuff repairs
• Bankart lesions
• SLAP lesions
• Glenohumeral dislocations / subluxation
• Posterior / Anterior capsule repairs
• Total shoulder reconstructions
• Global shoulder instability
• Soft tissue repairs / strains
•For non-surgical or post-op shoulder conditions that
Features
• Innovative offloading shoulder harness for patient comfort
• Convertible abduction pillow for post-operative options
(15° abduction, 90° neutral and 45° neutral)
• Sling is comprised primarily of Airmesh® fabric for
enhanced breathability
• Lined with a moisture wicking fabric for maximum
comfort
• Quick release shoulder and waist straps
• Four sizes (S-XL)
• Includes exercise ball
148
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
SlingShot 2 Sizing Chart
SlingShot 2 Shoulder Brace
The SlingShot 2 Shoulder Brace features a comfortable, breathable Airmesh sling and a 15°
abduction pillow. Quick release shoulder and waist strap buckles make this product easy to
apply. Includes exercise ball to stimulate circulation and a thumb rest to minimize migration.
• Anterior repairs
• Bankart lesions
• SLAP lesions
• Shoulder instabilities
• Muscle and tendon repair
• Posterior dislocations
• Capsular shifts
Size #
Size
Forearm Length
X = 2
S
11.5” – 13” (29 – 33 cm)
X = 3
M
13.5” – 14.5” (34 – 37 cm)
X = 4
L
15” – 16” (38 – 41 cm)
X = 5
XL
16.5” – 17.5” (42 – 45 cm)
Part # Description
0850X
SlingShot 2, S – XL
CE Marking
Features
• Comprised of Airmesh, a moisture wicking fabric, for
enhanced breathability and comfort
• Four sizes
• Quick release shoulder and waist straps
SlingShot Neutral Shoulder Brace
Designed to place the humerus in a neutral position of rotation, Breg’s SlingShot Neutral
Shoulder Brace is a cool, comfortable shoulder immobilizer lined with breathable Airmesh. It
includes a neutral pillow, exercise ball and thumb rest to minimize migration.
• Bankart lesions
• SLAP lesions
• Anterior dislocations
SlingShot Neutral Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
X = 2
S
Forearm Length
11.5” – 13” (29 – 33 cm)
X = 3
M
13.5” – 14.5” (34 – 37 cm)
X = 4
L
15” – 16” (38 – 41 cm)
Part # Description
018X0
01855
SlingShot Neutral, S – L
SlingShot Neutral, XL
CE Marking
Features
• Quick release shoulder and waist straps for ease of
application and removal
• Neutral pillow
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
149
Part #
Description
AE050300
Original ARC w/ Pillow, Universal
AE055300
Original ARC Cool Pillow, Universal
Original ARC With Pillow
Our signature Original ARC With Pillow, with the comfort and durability you have come to
expect from Bledsoe, in an economical design.
require diagnosis specific arm positioning
• Bankart lesions
• SLAP lesions
• Posterior dislocations
• Capsular shifts
CE Marking
Features
• Traditional pillow design with 15° abduction
• Unique pistol grip keeps the arm from migrating
forward out of the sling
• Perforated cool version available
Part # Description
00052
Atlas Universal
* Size adjustments made by rolling distal
end of sling
CE Marking
Atlas Universal Shoulder Brace
The Atlas Universal Shoulder Brace is designed for the patient recovering from shoulder surgery.
It features the offloading shoulder harness (Patent No.: US 8,414,512 B2) to promote comfort
and all day wear. It also features a comfortable, breathable Airmesh sling that is universal in size,
to fit most patients. The product contains a 15° abduction pillow and quick release shoulder and
waist strap buckles for easy application.
• Soft tissue repairs / strains
•Bankart lesions
•SLAP lesions
Features
• Innovative offloading shoulder harness for patient
comfort
• Universally sized shoulder sling
• 15° abduction pillow (with detachable waist strap)
• Sling is primarily comprised of Airmesh, a moisture
wicking fabric for enhanced breathability
69
150
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Atlas Minor Shoulder Brace
The Atlas Minor Shoulder Brace is designed for patients recovering from a shoulder injury. It
features the offloading shoulder harness (Patent No.: US 8,414,512 B2) to promote comfort and
all day wear. It also features a comfortable, breathable Airmesh sling that is universal in size to fit
most patients. The product contains a quick release shoulder buckle for easy application and a
thumb rest to minimize migration.
Part # Description
00070
Atlas Minor
* Size adjustments made by rolling distal
end of sling
CE Marking
• Arthroscopic repair
• Soft tissue repairs / sprains / immobilization
• Glenohumeral dislocations
Features
• Innovative offloading shoulder harness for patient
comfort
• Universally sized shoulder sling
• Sling is primarily comprised of Airmesh for enhanced
breathability
• Quick release shoulder buckle
Neutral Wedge Shoulder Brace
Neutral Wedge Sizing Chart
The Neutral Wedge Shoulder Brace is an immobilizer that positions the humerus in the neutral
position. It includes a quick release immobilizing waist strap and comfortable neck pad.
• Bankart lesions
• SLAP lesions
• Anterior dislocations
• Posterior capsule repairs
Size
Forearm Length
S / M
<14.5” (37 cm)
L / XL
>14.5” (37 cm)
Part # Description
11917 11918 Neutral Wedge, S / M
Neutral Wedge, L / XL
CE Marking
11920 11919 Night Pillow, Neutral
Wedge, S / M
Night Pillow, Neutral
Wedge, L / XL
Features
• Two sizes (S / M and L / XL)
• Easy to fit pillow, sling and straps
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
151
70
Basic Abduction Sling Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Forearm Length
X = 2
S
11.5” – 13” (29 – 33 cm)
X = 3
M
13.5” – 14.5” (34 – 37 cm)
X = 4
L
15” – 16” (38 – 41 cm)
Basic Abduction Sling
The Basic Abduction Sling is a shoulder immobilizer with abduction pillow that provides 15° of
abduction.
• Shoulder injuries or instabilities
Part #
1067658-0X
Features
Description
• Padded shoulder strap
• Lightweight comfortable material
• Universal left / right
• Detachable soft ball for patient comfort and exercise
Basic Abduction Sling,
S–L
Kool Sling Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Forearm Length
X = 2
S
11.5” – 13” (29 – 33 cm)
X = 3
M
13.5” – 14.5” (34 – 37 cm)
X = 4
L
15” – 16” (38 – 41 cm)
X = 5
XL
16.5” – 17.5” (42 – 45 cm)
Kool Sling® and Kool Sling Immobilizer
The Kool Sling features Airmesh for enhanced breathability and a cool, comfortable fit. It also
includes extra padding around the neck for added comfort, quick release buckles for ease of
application, and a thumb rest to minimize migration.
Features
Part #
0851X
0852X
70067
• Quick release shoulder and waist straps for ease of
Description
Kool Sling, S – XL
Kool Sling Immobilizer
Immobilizing Waist Strap
(fits waist up to 58”)
CE Marking
Shown: Kool Sling
Part #
Description
01851 Shoulder Abduction Pillow
(Universal)
CE Marking
Shoulder Abduction Pillow
Breg’s Shoulder Abduction Pillow is a shoulder immobilizer designed for varying degrees of
abduction (10°- 75°). When the pillow is inflated, the arm straps can be applied to limit posterior
shift of the shoulder following rotator cuff repairs.
• Large rotator cuff repairs
Features
• Inflatable bladder for abduction of 10° - 75°
• Limits posterior shift of the shoulder
• Universally sized abduction pillow
152
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Universal Abduction Sling
The Universal Abduction Sling is a unique one-size-fits-all sling that can be folded at the wrist
for a proper fit. It contains a 15° abduction pillow and a comfortable neck pad. There are quick
release buckles and an exercise ball to stimulate circulation.
Part # Description
08011
• Capsular shifts
• Global shoulder instabilities
Features
• Adjustable sling can be folded for proper fit
• Easy open sling allows forearm exercises
• Quick release shoulder and waist strap for ease of
Airplane Abduction Sling
Airplane Abduction Sling Sizing Chart
The Airplane Abduction Sling is a shoulder immobilizer designed to hold the shoulder in 45° or
70° of abduction. When the pillow is attached to the body and the arm straps are applied, the
brace limits the posterior shift of the shoulder following rotator cuff repairs. The brace is easy to
apply and is universal for either right or left shoulders.
• Large rotator cuff repairs
• Immobilization of the rotator cuff
• Humeral head fractures
• Adhesive capsulitis at the shoulder (Frozen Shoulder)
•Bankart lesions
•SLAP lesions
Size #
Size
Length of humerus
X = 2
XS
4” – 4.5“ (10.1 – 11.4 cm)
X = 3
S
5” – 7” (12.7 – 17.8 cm)
X = 4
M
7.5“ – 9” (19.0 – 22.9cm)
X = 5
L
9.5” – 11.5“ (24.1 – 29.2 cm)
X = 6
XL
12” – 17” (30.5 – 43.2 cm)
Measure length of humerus
Part #
33020X
Description
Airplane Abduction Sling,
XS – XL
CE Marking
Features
• Shoulder immobilizer with abduction pillow providing
45° or 70° of abduction
• Adjustable wrist and humeral cuffs providing additional
stability
• Padded foam body swathe
• Lightweight, comfortable material
• Universal right / left
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
153
Straight Shoulder Immobilizer Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Rib Circumference
X = 0
XXS
19” – 23”
X = 1
XS
23” – 27”
X = 2
S
27” – 31”
X = 3
M
31” – 35”
X = 4
L
35” – 39”
X = 5
XL
39” – 43”
X = 6
XXL
43” – 47”
Deluxe Straight Shoulder Immobilizer
Deluxe Straight Shoulder Immobilizer stabilizes the shoulder and safely positions the arm close
to the body.
• Dislocations
Features
• Foam laminate construction with hook and loop closure
• Adjustable forearm and humeral cuff with optional
shoulder strap
Part # Description
01078
01079
Deluxe Straight Shoulder
Immobilizer Regular, Rib
Circumference 24” - 50”
Deluxe Straight Shoulder
Immobilizer X-Large, Rib
Circumference 24” - 60”
Part # Description
0107X
Straight Shoulder Immobilizer,
XXS – XXL
Straight Shoulder Immobilizer
Straight Shoulder Immobilizer stabilizes the shoulder and safely positions the arm close to
the body.
• Dislocations
Features
• Elastic construction with foam padded wrist cuff
69
154
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Sling and Swathe Universal
The Sling and Swathe Universal immobilizes the shoulder and safely positions the arm close to
the body. It is easy to apply and provides complete comfort for most patients.
Part # Description
08008
• Dislocations
Features
• Secures arm against body
• May be used as an arm sling if swathe is not desired
• Fits either left or right
• Soft foam construction
Uni-Versatil Sling and Swathe
The Uni-Versatil Sling and Swathe offers metal slide buckles that help secure the shoulder straps
and attach to the sling with contact closures.
Part # Description
334000
• Dislocations
Features
• Universal, up to 53” (134.62 cm)
• Sturdy canvas construction with detachable swathe
Sling and Swathe Immobilizer
Traditional deluxe sling-and-swathe design immobilizes the shoulder and arm.
• Dislocations
Part #
Description
SA204000 Sling and Swathe Immobilizer,
Universal
CE Marking
Features
• Lightweight, soft foam sling supports the arm
• Swathe immobilizes the arm and shoulder
• Adjustable slide-buckle straps
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
155
70
Shure Shoulder Immobilizer Sizing Chart
Size #
Size Strap Length
X = 1
XS
Length 12.5” / Depth 7” 32”
X = 2
S
Length 14” / Depth 8.5” 36”
X = 3
M
Length 16” / Depth 8.75” 39”
X = 4
L
Length 17” / Depth 9.5” 43”
X = 5
XL
Length 20” / Depth 10” 50”
Part #
0100X
Waist Strap
Shure Shoulder Immobilizer
The Shure Shoulder Immobilizer is a deep envelope sling made of a breathable cotton material.
It is universal for right or left and comfortably immobilizes the shoulder. The full foam straps
increase comfort while the thumb loop prevents migration.
• For non-surgical or post-op support and immobilization
of the shoulder
• Strains and sprains of the shoulder, elbow and forearm
Description
Features
XS – XL
• Breathable, cool cotton material
• Removable foam waist strap
• O-Ring on strap for easy adjustment
Clinic Shoulder Immobilizer Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Sling Length
XX = 01 XS
20” – 24”
(51 – 61 cm)
XX = 03 S
24” – 30”
(61 – 76 cm)
XX = 05 M
30” – 36”
(76 – 91 cm)
XX = 07 L
36” – 42”
(91 – 107 cm)
XX = 09 XL
42” – 48”
(107 – 122 cm)
Clinic Shoulder Immobilizer
Sized canvas sling and soft foam waist strap immobilize the shoulder while supporting the
elbow, wrist and hand.
of the shoulder
Features
Measurement of sling length
Part #
• Immobilizing strap secures shoulder in place
• Oversized envelope accommodates large casts and
dressings
• Adjustable padded strap with easy-touch closure on
front and back
• Thumb loop keeps the elbow seated in the sling
Description
SA2005XX Clinic Shoulder Immobilizer
XS – XL
Ambulite Velpeau Immobilizer Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
X = 3
S
X = 4
M
X = 5
L
X = 6
XL
Part #
33070X
Description
Ambulite Velpeau Immobilizer
S – XL
The lightweight, breathable material makes the Ambulite Velpeau Immobilizer an economical
choice to comfortably immobilize the shoulder. The soft foam shoulder strap helps reduce neck
discomfort and encourages proper use.
of the shoulder
Features
•Lightweight, breathable material
•Foam-lined shoulder and swathe straps
•Adjustable soft shoulder and torso straps
information
69
156
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Classic Arm Sling Universal
The Classic Arm Sling Universal is a one-size-fits-all envelope sling. This sling can be folded to
proper length to accommodate most patients. It has a soft foam pad at the neck for patient
comfort and a thumb loop to prevent migration.
Part #
08007
Description
CE Marking
• For non-surgical or post-op support
• Mild strains and sprains of the shoulder, elbow and
forearm
Features
• Can be folded to proper length to accommodate most
patients
• No trimming necessary
• Slide buckle on strap for easy adjustment
• Neck pad on shoulder strap for comfort
Classic Arm Sling
Classic Sling Sizing Chart
The Classic Arm Sling is a classic envelope sling made of a breathable cotton material. It is extra
deep for bulky casts. It is universal for right and left with a foam shoulder pad for greater patient
comfort.
forearm
Features
• Extra deep pouch for bulky casts
• Breathable, cool cotton material
• Soft foam shoulder pad for greater patient comfort
Clinic Arm Sling
Size #
Size
Rib Circumference
X = 1
XS
Length 11” / Depth 7.5”
X = 2
S
Length 14.25” / Depth 8.5”
X = 3
M
X = 4
L
X = 5
XL
Length 20” / Depth 10.25”
Part #
0800X
Description
Classic Arm Sling, XS – XL
CE Marking
Clinic Arm Sling Sizing Chart
The Clinic Arm Sling is a sized canvas sling that supports the shoulder, elbow, wrist and hand.
forearm
Features
Size #
Size
Measurement
XX = 01 XS
11” (28 cm)
XX = 03 S
13.5” (34 cm)
XX = 05 M
15.5” (39 cm)
XX = 07 L
17.5” (45 cm)
XX = 09 XL
20” (51 cm)
Measurement taken from elbow to midline of hand
• Oversized envelope accommodates large casts and
dressings
• Adjustable padded strap with easy-touch closure on
front and back
• Thumb loop keeps the elbow seated in the sling
Part #
Description
SA2000XX Clinic Arm Sling XS – XL
CE Marking
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
157
70
Ambulite Arm Sling Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
X = 1
PED
X = 2
XS
X = 3
S
X = 4
M
X = 5
L
X = 6
XL
Part #
Description
30150X Ambulite Arm Sling
The Ambulite Arm Sling is an economical solution for a wide variety of shoulder injuries and
instabilities.
•For non-surgical or post-op support
•Mild strains and sprains of the shoulder, elbow and
forearm
•Arthroscopic repair
•Shoulder injuries or instabilities
Features
Ambulite Arm Sling,
PED – XL
• Foam lined strapping with hook and loop closure
• Ambulite material is lightweight, breathable and
durable
• Thumb loop incorporated into the design
information
Part #
Description
SA201000Universal Arm Sling,
Universal
CE Marking
Universal Arm Sling
Universal cotton sling supports the shoulder, elbow, wrist and hand.
•For non-surgical or post-op support
•Mild strains and sprains of the shoulder, elbow and
forearm
•Arthroscopic repair
•Shoulder injuries or instabilities
Features
• No trimming necessary, simply fold to proper length for
most patients
• Large envelope accommodates large casts and
dressings
• Adjustable slide buckle closure
69
158
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Shoulder Stabilizer Sizing Chart
Shoulder Stabilizer
Breg’s Shoulder Stabilizer is a functional shoulder support designed to limit abduction and
external rotation without sacrificing function. The unique design makes the Shoulder Stabilizer a
preferred brace for football, hockey and lacrosse players.
• Shoulder dislocations
• Shoulder subluxations
Features
• Lightweight and ventilated Neoprene harness
• Easy to fit harness and arm band
• Ability to restrict abduction and external rotation
Curtis Shoulder Cuff - Full ROM
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 2
S
34” – 38”
(86 – 97 cm)
X = 3
M
38” – 42”
(97 – 107 cm)
X = 4
L
42” – 46”
(107 – 117 cm)
X = 5
XL
46” – 51”
(117 – 130 cm)
X = 6
XXL
51” – 56”
(130 – 142 cm)
Measurement taken at level of axilla
Part # Description
1074X
Shoulder Stabilizer, S – XXL
Curtis Shoulder Cuff - Full ROM Sizing Chart
The Curtis Shoulder Cuff, Full ROM provides functional shoulder stabilization and controlled
range of motion. Its unique strap design can be customized to suit the wearer’s mobility
preference and comfort level. The form-fitting Neoprene material is comfortable and low profile
making it ideal for various sports.
•Shoulder dislocations
•Shoulder subluxations
•Global shoulder instabilities
Features
•Easy application and strap adjustments
•Neoprene construction provides compression and
warmth
•Multiple adjustments for individualized support
•Soft interior for wearing under or over clothing
information
Curtis Shoulder Sleeve
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 3
S
34” – 38”
(86 – 96 cm)
X = 4
M
38” – 42”
(96 – 106 cm)
X = 5
L
42” – 46”
(106 – 116 cm)
X = 6
XL
46” – 50”
(116 – 127 cm)
X = 7
XXL
50” – 54”
(127 – 137 cm)
Circumference measurement taken at chest
Part # Description
13723X
13724X
Curtis ROM Stabil., Right,
S – XXL
Curtis ROM Stabil., Left, S – XXL
Curtis Shoulder Sleeve Sizing Chart
The Curtis Shoulder Stabilizing Sleeve provides compression and restriction for shoulder
discomfort and instabilities, while remaining highly wearable and unrestrictive. The form-fitting
Neoprene material provides warmth and support for muscle strains and injuries, and is low
profile making it ideal for various activities and sports.
•Shoulder dislocations
•Shoulder subluxations
•Global shoulder instabilities
Features
•Easy application requires limited use of the shoulder
•Neoprene construction provides compression and
warmth
•Soft interior for wearing under or over clothing
information
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 3
S
34” – 38”
(86 – 96 cm)
X = 4
M
38” – 42”
(96 – 106 cm)
X = 5
L
42” – 46”
(106 – 116 cm)
X = 6
XL
46” – 50”
(116 – 127 cm)
X = 7
XXL
50” – 54”
(127 – 137 cm)
Circumference measurement taken at chest
Part # Description
13721X
13722X
Curtis Shoulder, Right, S – XXL
Curtis Shoulder, Left, S – XXL
159
70
360° CUSTOMER
CARE
We take care of our customers and their patients from every angle.
From innovative products, to unmatched service; from tailored
business solutions to being a responsive partner, Breg provides
company-wide dedication to delivering a 360° customer care
experience unmatched in the industry.
•
Wrist
Bracing
Elbow
Wrist Lacer 8” shown
EXCEEDING EXPECTATIONS
from product performance
to account management
Tony Elggren
Tony Elggren is no stranger to competitive sports.
The father of two is the head coach of a little league football team, participates in
a variety of outdoor activities, and even served as a torchbearer for the 2002 Winter
Olympics in Salt Lake City. So when he heard a loud pop during a routine workout,
he feared the worst. “An MRI confirmed a torn distal brachialis tendon, which had torn
partially off the short head of the bicep,” he said.
It was clear that Tony would need a brace fast, and Breg’s Billing Customer Care team helped
arrange for his Compact X2K Elbow Brace. “They treated me like I was an all-pro linebacker; like I was
someone,” he said of his interaction with Breg employees Katie Jenkins and Kathy Millers-Quinn. “They
made me feel special from the get go and showed they genuinely cared about my situation— and they even
had the brace shipped overnight.”
Without his elbow brace, Tony estimates that his arm’s range of motion would have been limited to only
about 20% of its full potential at best. He credits his brace and the kindness of Katie and Kathy for helping
him return to his daily activities.
“The brace is a life-changer,” he said. “I will be healed and back to being a dad at 100%—powerlifting and
coaching football again at full speed.”
Taking the time to ensure an excellent customer experience: that’s part of Breg 360° Customer Care.
©2014 Breg, Inc. All rights reserved. X2K is a trademark of Breg, Inc.
69
BREG STORY
TonyTo Elggren
Order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
El bow / Wr i s t B r a c i ng
T Scope® Elbow Premier Brace
The T Scope Elbow Premier is designed for fixed or controlled range of motion in the treatment
of ligamentous injuries and stable fractures of the elbow or upper arm. This brace incorporates
the patented T Scope Premier hinge and telescoping uprights. Designed for exceptional
patient fit and enhanced compliance, the T Scope Elbow Premier is one of the most lightweight,
low profile post-op elbow braces on the market and features a quick lock to prevent flexion /
extension at any angle. Malleable aluminum bars can be manipulated to accommodate patient
swelling and post-operative bandages.
• Stable fractures of the elbow, distal humerus, proximal
radius or ulna
• Tendon and ligament injuries or repairs (Tommy John
surgery, distal biceps tendon repair)
• Chronic elbow injuries
• Collateral ligament reconstructions
• Elbow hyperextension
• Range of motion control post injury
• Tennis elbow release
• Triceps tendon repair
Part #Description
07254
T Scope Elbow Premier Regular,
Left*
07255
T Scope Elbow Premier Regular,
Right*
07256
T Scope Elbow Premier Long,
Left*
07257 T Scope Elbow Premier Long,
Right*
70125 Neutral Hand Accessory
*CE Marking
Features
• T Scope Premier hinge offers extension adjustability between -10° and 110°, while flexion may
be adjusted between -10° and 120° (ROM control in 10° increments)
• Does not contain natural latex
• Available in regular or long options
• Easy to use extension drop lock allows the brace to be locked out at any angle with the push of
a button
• Lightweight – weighing only 13 oz makes it one of the lightest post-op elbow braces on the
market
• Low profile design conforms to the arm for greater patient comfort
• Telescoping forearm and humeral bars allows brace to fit a wide range of patient anatomies
• Trimmable pads and straps
• Malleable struts can be contoured to fit varying arm sizes and shapes
• Detachable shoulder sling is included
• Optional neutral hand accessory provides comfortable control to reduce pronation /
supination
T Scope Elbow Accessory
Optional neutral hand accessory provides comfortable control
to reduce pronation / supination. It is lightweight, low profile
and does not require tools to apply.
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
163
70
El b o w / Wri s t B ra c ing
Neutral Hand Position Attachment
Size #
Size Measurements
X = 3
S
7” – 9.5” (18 – 24 cm)
X = 7
L
8.5” – 12.5” (22 – 32 cm)
Telescoping Elbow
Facilitates healing by reducing brace migration and maintaining proper post-op positioning.*
• Non surgical or post-op elbow procedures
• Stable fractures of distal humerus
• Stable fractures of proximal to middle radius or ulna
• Tendon and ligament repairs
Part #Description
AE023100
Telescoping Elbow, Left
Universal
AE023200
Telescoping Elbow, Right
Universal
AE0121X
Neutral Hand Position Attachment, Left
AE0122X
Neutral Hand Position Attachment, Right
AE01123B
Supinate / Pronate Hand Attachment, Left
AE01223B
Supinate / Pronate Hand Attachment, Left
Features
• Malleable cuffs capture soft tissue
• Push-button telescoping uprights for perfect fit
• Locks the elbow in any position from -10° to 110° in
10° increments
• Optional shoulder strap included
CE Marking
*Citation: James Roberts, MD, Merck. 5.15.12
http://www.merckmanuals.com / home / injuries_and_poisoning /
fractures / overview_of_fractures.html
Optional neutral
hand position
attachment
Part #Description
AE021100
Extended Arm Brace, Left
Universal
AE021200
Extended Arm Brace, Right
Universal
AE012211
Extender Neutral Hand Position Attachment, S,
Right
AE012111B Extender Neutral Hand Position Attachment, S, Left
AE012113
Extender Neutral Hand Position Attachment, L, Left
AE012213
Extender Neutral Hand Position Attachment, L,
Right
Optional supination /
pronation hand
attachment
Extender Arm Brace
Facilitates healing by preventing brace migration and maintaining proper post-op positioning.
Features
• Malleable cuffs capture soft tissue
• Push-button telescoping uprights for perfect fit
• Simple range-of-motion hinge can be set 0° to 135° in 15°
increments
CE Marking
Optional neutral
hand position
attachment
164
pronation hand
attachment
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
T-Chek
Facilitates healing by reducing brace migration and maintaining proper post-op positioning.*
• Tendon and ligament repairs
Features
• Protected range of motion can be set from -10° to 110°
in 10° increments
• Optional shoulder strap included
Part #Description
AE026100
T-Chek w/ Wrist, Left,
Universal
T-Chek w/ Wrist, Right,
AE026200
Universal
AE026Y70
T-Chek w/ Hand
Attachment, Universal
AE026180
Neutral Hand Attachment,
Left
AE026208
Neutral Hand Attachment,
Right
AE012123B Supination / Pronation
Attachment, Left
AE012223B Supination / Pronation
Attachment, Right
CE Marking
*Citation: James Roberts, MD, Merck. 5.15.12
http://www.merckmanuals.com / home / injuries_and_poisoning /
fractures / overview_of_fractures.html
Optional neutral
hand position
attachment
pronation hand
attachment
Aligner PHX Humeral Fracture Brace
• Proximal third humeral fractures
• Mid shaft humeral fractures
• Distal third humeral fractures
Features
• The Aligner PHX Humeral Fracture Brace is a hybrid brace
with an humeral reduction component
• Combining common methods of stabilizing humeral
fractures
• Sarmiento fracture cuff combined with a
• Hanging Cast combined with
• ROM elbow brace
• The physician takes an active role in alignment of the
fracture
• The only fracture brace that allows a physician to reduce a
humeral fracture without surgery
Benefits
• Designed to decrease the chances of Gunstock Deformity
(Cubitus Varus)
• The fracture can be moved into place instead of
letting nature take charge of the alignment and gravity
determine the final position
• Allows for shoulder to wrist immobilization of the arm
69
Shoulder Cuff
ROM Hinge
Shoulder cuff contours to the shape of
the top of the shoulder. The contour
captures the top of the humerus and
assists in the suspension of the PHX
brace.
A protected range of motion can be set to
limit elbow motion during rehabilitation.
The flexion and extension can be set in 10
degree increments from -10 degrees to
110 degrees of flexion.
Varus / Valgus Adjustment
Adjustable Arm Length
No other fracture brace on the market
has the ability to manipulate the
fracture to get optimum alignment
of the fracture. The dual adjustment
points enable the physician to position
the fracture, x-ray the fracture and then
make varus or valgus adjustments to
align the fracture.
Push-button telescoping design provides
adjustable humeral and forearm lengths.
This allows the brace to be adjusted to the
patient’s anatomy – providing maximum
control of the arm.
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Size #
Size
Measurements
X = 3
S
8” - 11”
X = 5
M
11” - 14”
X = 7
L
12” - 15”
X = 9
XL 14” - 17”
Measurements according to Bicep Circumference
Part #Description
AE23510X
Aligner PHX Humeral
Fracture, Standard, Left,
S-XL
AE23520X
Aligner PHX Humeral
Fracture, Standard, Right,
S-XL
AE23517X
Aligner PHX Humeral
Fracture, Standard, w/Hand
Attachment, Left, S-XL
AE23527X
Aligner PHX Humeral
Attachment, Right, S-XL
X=See Size chart above
165
Compact X2K Elbow Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Bicep
Elbow joint
XX = 10
XS
13” – 15.5” 11” – 12.75”
XX = 20
S
15.5” – 18” 12.75” – 14.5”
XX = 30
M
18” – 19.5” 14.5” – 15.25”
XX = 35
M+
19.5” – 21” 15.25” – 16.25”
XX = 40
L
21” – 24”
16.25” – 18”
XX = 50
XL
24” – 27”
18” – 19.75”
XX = 60
XXL
27” – 31”
19.75” – 22”
Compact X2K® Elbow Brace
The Compact X2K Elbow Brace is often used to support patients with medial and lateral
ligament instabilities as well as elbow hyperextension. This is the ultimate brace for control,
especially for high-contact sports or extra large sizes.
• Elbow hyperextension
• Elbow dislocations
• Range of motion control
Features
Circumference taken at mid–bicep and elbow
• Aluminum frame adjustable in the field for a more
custom fit
• Polycentric hinge
Part # Description
219XX
220XX
1008X
70058
Compact X2K, Left, XS – XXL
Compact X2K, Right, XS – XXL
Brace Cover, Compact
X2K, S – XXL
Protective Cup
Note: When ordering for a right arm you must
place an order for a left brace, and when
ordering for a left arm you must place an order
for a right brace
CE Marking
HEX Elbow Brace Sizing Chart
X = 2
S
9” – 10.5” (23 – 27 cm)
X = 3
M
10.5” – 12” (27 – 30 cm)
X = 4
L
12” – 13.5” (30 – 34 cm)
X = 5
XL
13.5” – 15” (34 – 38 cm)
X = 6
XXL
15” – 16.5” (38 – 42 cm)
Circumference taken at forearm
Part #
1448X
Description
HEX Elbow Brace, S – XXL
CE Marking
69
166
HEX Elbow Brace
The HEX Elbow Brace controls range of motion and protects against hyperextension, making
it the ideal brace for use during high-level activities. With its half-wrap bicep sleeve, the HEX is
easy to apply and remove. The posterior straps prevent the brace from migrating, maximizing
the product’s effectiveness.
• Hyperextension prevention
• Elbow tendonitis
• Post-elbow dislocations
Features
• Slip-on half-wrap bicep sleeve
• “X” anterior straps with strap-lock buckle
• Adjustable hinges to control desired ROM (0° - 40°
extension / 45° - 90° flexion)
• Half Airmesh for breathability and half Neoprene for
compression
• Additional elbow foam padding to protect olecranon
process
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Hinged Elbow / Padded Sleeve / Basic Elbow
Hinged Elbow
Size #
The Hinged Elbow brace features dual upright hinges and cross straps to prevent
hyperextension of the elbow. When returning to play, the Hinged Elbow brace controls rangeof-motion and protects athletes. Bicep cuff easily adjusts for multiple sizes with one-hand strap.
Cross straps adjust for extension control.
SizeMeasurements
XX = 01 XS
9.75” – 11”
(25 cm – 28 cm)
XX = 03 S
11” – 12.25”
(28 cm – 31 cm)
XX = 05 M
12.25” – 13.5” (31 cm – 34 cm)
XX = 07 L
13.5” – 14.75” (34 cm – 37 cm)
• Elbow tendonitis
• Post-elbow dislocations
XX = 09 XL
14.75” – 16”
(37 cm – 41 cm)
XX = 11 XXL
16” – 17.5”
(41 cm – 44 cm)
XX = 13 XXXL
17.5” – 19”
(44 cm – 48 cm)
Features
Part #Description
• Low-profile, heavy-duty hinges
• Fully adjustable cross straps prevent hyperextension
• Extension stops included for additional range-ofmotion control
AE0630XX
AE0620XX
2
Hinged Elbow Brace,
TriTech, XS-3XL
Hinged Elbow Brace, 3D Neoprene, XS-3XL
Padded Sleeve
The Padded Sleeve provides cushion and protection. Durable foam construction is designed to
withstand the toughest conditions.
Part #Description
AE0610XX Padded Sleeve (Elbow),
XS-3XL
CE Marking
• Elbow sprains
• Elbow strains
• Tendonitis
• Bursitis
Features
• Foam pad protects the olecranon
• Neoprene posterior for compression and warmth
• Soft TriTech™ material for breathability and freedom of
movement
Part #Description
Basic Elbow
The Basic Elbow sleeve designed to provide compression and warmth to the joint.
AE0600XX Basic Elbow Sleeve, XS-3XL
• Elbow sprains
• Elbow Strains
• Tendonitis
• Bursitis
Features
• Neoprene posterior for compression and warmth
• Soft TriTech™ material for breathability and freedom of
movement
• Low-profile seams minimize irritation for highly active
athletes
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
167
70
Performance Knit Elbow Sizing Chart
X = 3
S
7.75” – 9” (20 – 23 cm)
X = 4
M
9” – 10.25” (23 – 26 cm)
X = 5
L
10.25” – 11.5” (26 – 29 cm)
X = 6
XL
11.5” – 12.75” (29 – 32 cm)
Performance Knit Elbow
The Performance Knit Elbow is a lightweight and durable brace that provides compression,
stability and comfort so that your patients can get back in the game or back to normal daily
activity.
Part #
• Elbow sprains
• Elbow strains
• Tendonitis
• Bursitis
Description
33000X
Performance Knit Elbow,
S – XL
Features
• Anatomically contoured viscoelastic inserts promote
enhanced proprioception and assist in joint stabilization
retention
• Provides graduated compression
Part #
Description
13430X
Elbow Sleeve w/ Comp Strap,
XS – XXL
Neoprene Elbow Sleeve with Compression Strap
This Neoprene elbow sleeve provides compression and warmth to the elbow joint. It features an
additional forearm strap for focused support, if needed.
• Elbow sprains
• Elbow strains
• Tendonitis
• Bursitis
Features
•Sized for comfortable fit
•Compressive, warming Neoprene material
•Forearm strap for additional support
Neoprene Elbow Sleeve Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Arm Measurement
X = 2
S
8” – 9” (20 – 23 cm)
X = 3
M
9” – 10” (23 – 25 cm)
X = 4
L
10” – 11”
(25 – 28 cm)
X = 5
XL
11” – 12”
(28 – 30 cm)
X = 6
XXL
12” – 13”
(30 – 33 cm)
Circumference taken at elbow joint
Part # Description
1009X
1011X
Neoprene Elbow Sleeve
Provides compression, padding, and warmth to the elbow region. Also available with padding
over the olecranon process for additional protection.
• Elbow sprains
• Elbow strains
• Tendonitis
• Bursitis
Features
• Sized for appropriate patient fit
• Compressive 1/8” Neoprene
Neoprene Elbow Sleeve,
S – XXL
Neoprene Padded Elbow Sleeve, S – XXL
CE Marking
69
168
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Platinum Elbow Strap Sizing Chart
Platinum Elbow Strap (Sporlastic Epi-hit Hot / Cold Therapy)
The Platinum Elbow Strap (Sporlastic Epi-hit Hot / Cold Therapy) is a forearm band and wrist
strap combination providing compression and support at the epicondyles. The added wrist
band offers stabilization by reducing wrist joint rotation. For added relief, a hot / cold pack is
available for focused therapy.
•Medial / lateral epicondylitis
• Generalized tendomyopathy
Features
Size #
Size
Forearm Strap / Wrist Strap
X = 3
S / M
14” Length / 14.5” Length
X = 5
L / XL
17.25” Length / 14.5” Length
Part #
Description
20180X
Platinum Elbow Strap
(Sporlastic Epi-hit Hot / Cold
Therapy)
•Hot / cold therapy strap included
•Straps are easy to apply
•Universal for left or right usage
Uni-Versatil Tennis Elbow
The Uni-Versatil Tennis Elbow brace is a padded compression strap designed to help alleviate the
discomfort of tennis / golfers elbow.
Part #
201600
Description
Features
•Universal fit for all forearm sizes
•Wrap can be easily applied and adjusted with one hand
•Dual hook and loop closure
The Volley Tennis Elbow Strap
The Volley, Tennis Elbow Strap Sizing Chart
A versatile brace providing compression for the forearm. Includes both a gel pouch for targeted
pressure and an air pouch for pneumatic compression.
Features
• Includes gel pouch insert for cold therapy
• Air pouch insert for pneumatic compression
• Circumferential band is easy to apply
• Universal support fits either left or right
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Part #
Name
Forearm Circumference
96501
The Volley
8” – 14”
96502
The Volley, XLong 11” – 17”
Part # Description
96501
96502
The Volley, X - Long
169 70
El b o w / Wris t B ra c ing
Tennis Elbow Strap Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Forearm Measurement
X = 1
XS
8” – 9”
(20 – 23 cm)
X = 2
S
9” – 10”
(23 – 25 cm)
X = 3
M
10” – 11”
(25 – 28 cm)
X = 4
L
11” – 12”
(28 – 30 cm)
X = 5
XL
12” – 14”
(30 – 36 cm)
Tennis Elbow Strap
Padded forearm band provides focused compression for patients with tennis elbow and
golfer’s elbow.
Features
Circumference taken at widest part of forearm
• Pull-on forearm band, with Neoprene
• Additional padding for added comfort
• Adjustable hook and loop closure for flexibility
• Universal support fits left or right
Part # Description
9654X
Tennis Elbow Strap, XS – XL
Tendon Strap Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Forearm Measurements
XX = 01 XS
10” – 11”
(25 – 28 cm)
XX = 03 S
11” – 12”
(28 –30 cm)
XX = 05 M
12” – 13”
(30 –33 cm)
XX
= 07 L
13” – 15”
(33 –38 cm)
XX = 09 XL
15” – 17”
(38 –43 cm)
Part #
Tendon Strap
Simple design relieves the pain of tennis elbow and golfer’s elbow.
Features
• Padded buttress relieves point-specific pain
• Sharkskin material reduces migration
• Simple design ideal for one-hand application
Description
SA6050XX Tendon Strap, XS – 3XL
CE Marking
Part #
SA208000
CE Marking
Description
Universal Tennis Elbow
Support, Universal
Universal Tennis Elbow Support
Universal design reduces inventory on hand.
Features
• Foam pad to alleviate stress over the medial / lateral
epicondyle
• Semi-rigid plate disperses pressure for even
compression
69
170
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Apollo Universal Wrist Brace 8” & 10”
The Apollo braces are constructed of a soft and comfortable foam material. The Apollo
Universal wrist brace fits the anatomies of most patients. The adjustable dual closure provides
greater contour and an individual fit. The contoured palmer stay is malleable while the dorsal
stay can be positioned where desirable.
• Wrist immobilization
• Sprains and strains
• Carpel tunnel syndrome
• De Quervain’s syndrome
• Rheumatoid arthritis
Features
Apollo Universal
with Thumb Spica
• Universal sizing for left and right
• Dual lacing closure provides greater contouring and
support
• Designed to provide desired wrist and thumb support
while allowing for maximum hand function
• Contoured palmar stay is malleable and the dorsal stay
can be positioned as desired
• Available in 8” and 10” length
Wrist Stabilizer Cock-up
The Wrist Stabilizer Cock-up is an immobilizing support for wrist and hand injuries. It is durably
constructed and contains a preformed and removable palmar stay that supports the wrist.
• Sprains
• Strains
• Carpal tunnel syndrome
Features
• Contoured for proper fit and immobilization
• Performance lining keeps moisture away from skin for
continuous comfort
• Foam tri-laminate material comfortably cushions wrist
Part # Description
10056
10057
10058
10059
Regular 8”
Apollo Universal Wrist
Brace, Left
Brace, Right
Apollo Universal Wrist Brace w/ Spica, Left
Apollo Universal Wrist Brace w/ Spica, Right
Large 10”
Brace, 10”, Left
Brace, 10”, Right
Apollo Universal Wrist Brace w/ Spica, 10”, Left
Apollo Universal Wrist Brace w/ Spica, 10”, Right
10656
10657
10658
10659
Wrist Stabilizer Cock-up Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 2
XS
2.5” – 3”
(6 – 7 cm)
X = 3
S
3” – 3.5”
(7 – 8 cm)
X = 4
M
3.5” – 4”
(8 – 10 cm)
X = 5
L
4” – 4.5”
(10 – 11 cm)
X = 6
XL
4.5” – 5”
(11 – 13 cm)
Circumference taken along MP Joint
Part #
Description
21472X
Left, XS – XL
21471X
Right, XS – XL
21482XThumb Spica, Left, XS – XL
21481XThumb Spica, Right, XS – XL
214820Thumb Spica, Left, Universal
214810Thumb Spica, Right, Universal
X - See size chart above
CE Marking
Universal Wrist Lacer
Universally-sized wrist brace reduces typical inventory from 5 to 1. Ideal for facilities with limited
space.
•Immobilization and support of the wrist
•Carpal tunnel syndrome
•Rehab and post-cast support
•Tendonitis
Part #
Description
WA010Y11 Universal Wrist Lacer 8”, Universal
WA010Y01 Universal Wrist Lacer 10”, Universal
Features
•Adjust size with removable dorsal stay
•Palmer pad for increased patient comfort and fit
•Malleable and removable palmer stay for customized
angulations
•Adjustable thumb cutout for better fit
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
171 70
Wrist Brace Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Wrist Measurement
X = 0
XXS
<5.75”
(<14.5 cm)
X = 1
XS
5.75” - 6.5”
(14.5 – 17 cm)
X = 2
S
6.5” – 7.25” (17 – 18 cm)
X = 3
M
7.25” – 8.25” (18 – 21 cm)
X = 4
L
8.25” – 9”
(21 – 23 cm)
X = 5
XL
9” – 10”
(23 – 25 cm)
Wrist Brace
The Wrist Brace (Cock-Up) is constructed of durable, padded material for maximum wear and
comfort. It features a removable malleable palmar stay for support and immobilization.
• Distal radial and ulnar fractures
Features
• Lightweight and durable construction
• Removable and malleable palmar stay
• Available in XXS
Circumference taken at wrist
Part #
Description
00280
00270
1027X
1028X
1029X
1030X
Wrist Brace, Left, XXS
Wrist Brace, Right, XXS
Wrist Cock-Up, Right, XS – XL
Wrist Cock-Up, Left, XS – XL
Thumb Spica Left, XS – XL
Thumb Spica Right, XS – XL
X - See size chart above
Wrist Brace with
Thumb Spica
CE Marking
Wrist Lacer 8” & 10”
Wrist Lacer Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 2
S
6” – 7”
(15 – 18 cm)
X = 3
M
7” – 8”
(18 – 20 cm)
X = 4
L
8” – 9”
(20 – 23 cm)
X = 5
XL
9” – 10”
(23 – 25 cm)
The Wrist Lacer is constructed of durable, perforated suede and moisture wicking polypropylene
felt. Its single-pull lace closure and adjustable thumb strap enhance ease of application and
patient fit. The Wrist Lacer has a removable, malleable palmar stay that supports the wrist. The
Wrist Lacer is available in 8” and 10” versions.
• Distal radial and ulnar fractures (10” version only)
Features
Part # Description
1038X
1039X
1040X
1041X
1036X
1037X
• Removable and malleable palmar stay
• Single-pull lace closure
Wrist Lacer 8”, Left, S – XL
Wrist Lacer 8”, Right, S – XL
Wrist Lacer 10”, Left, S – XL
Wrist Lacer 10”, Right, S – XL
Wrist Lacer with Thumb Spica, Left, S – XL
Wrist Lacer with Thumb
Spica, Right, S – XL
Wrist Lacer
with Thumb Spica
(Available in 8” only)
CE Marking
Part #
Description
WA040Y01 Universal Thumb Lacer, Universal
Universal Thumb Lacer
Universally sized thumb support reduces typical inventory from 5 to 1. Ideal for facilities with
limited space.
•Support and symptomatic relief
•Gamekeeper’s thumb
•De Quervain’s syndrome
•Sprains
•Strains
Features
•Adjust size with removable dorsal and ulnar stay
•Malleable thumb stays adjust for desired thumb
positioning
•Palmer pad for increased patient comfort and fit
69
172
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Vinyl Wrist Splint 7” and 10.5” Sizing Chart
Vinyl Wrist Splint 7” & 10.5”
The Vinyl Wrist Splint provides lightweight wrist immobilization and support. It is ergonomically
designed to optimize hand usage while the wrist remains stabilized.
•Sprains and strains
•Wrist immobilization
Features
•Breathable, durable material
•Padded lining for comfortable all-day use
•Contoured to minimize restriction on the hand
information
Size #
Size
Measurement
XX = 10
XS
2.5” – 3”
XX = 20
S
3” – 3.5”
XX = 30
M
3.5” – 4”
XX = 40
L
3” – 4.5”
XX = 50
XL
4.5” – 5”
Measure width of patient’s palm along MP joint.
Part #
Description
100155-1XX Vinyl Wrist Splint, 7”, Left
100155-2XX Vinyl Wrist Splint, 7”, Right
100152-1XX Vinyl w/ F Splint, 10.5”, Left
100152-2XXVinyl w/ F Splint 10.5”,
Right
Low Profile Wrist Support Sizing Chart
Low Profile Wrist Support 7” & 9”
Low Profile Wrist Supports are constructed of a premium perforated material. Its single-pull
lace closure and adjustable thumb strap enhance ease of application and patient fit. Both wrist
supports contain a malleable palmer stay for stabilization and soft flannel lining for comfort.
• Scaphoid injuries
Features
Low Profile
Wrist
• Promotes wrist stabilization without limiting thumb
rotation, and dorsal stays provide additional support
• Malleable palmar stay properly positions the wrist
• Deluxe perforated material with flannel lining for added
patient comfort
• Single-pull lacing closure for easy application
• Unique stockinette liner provides comfort
• Available in 7” and 9” length
Size #
Size
Wrist Circumference
X = 1
XS
Up to 5.5” (13.2 cm)
X = 2
S
5.5” – 6.5” (14 – 16.5 cm)
X = 3
M
6.5” – 7.5” (16.5 – 19 cm)
X = 4
L
7.5” – 8.5” (19 – 21.5 cm)
X = 5
XL
8.5” – 9.5” (21.5 – 24 cm)
Part # Description
1054X
1055X
1056X
1057X
Low Profile Wrist Support
7”, Left, XS – XL
7”, Right, XS – XL
9”, Left, S – XL
9”, Right, S – XL
CE Marking
Wrist Pro 8” & 10”
Wrist Pro Sizing Chart
The Wrist Pro is available in 8” and 10” versions. It is constructed of lightweight, durable foam
laminate, and it contains a preformed, removable, palmar stay that supports the wrist. It includes
an adjustable radial stay for thumb support.
• Sprains
• Strains
• Distal radial and ulnar fracture (10” version only)
Features
• Removable and preformed palmar stay
Wrist Pro
with Thumb Spica
(Available in 8” only)
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 2
S
6” – 7”
(15 – 18 cm)
X = 3
M
7” – 8”
(18 – 20 cm)
X = 4
L
8” – 9”
(20 – 23 cm)
X = 5
XL
9” – 10”
(23 – 25 cm)
Part #
1043X
1044X
1045X
1046X
1034X
1035X
Description
Wrist Pro 8”, Left, S – XL
Wrist Pro 8”, Right, S – XL
Wrist Pro 10”, Left, S – XL
Wrist Pro 10”, Right, S – XL
Wrist Pro with Thumb
Spica, Left, S – XL
Wrist Pro with Thumb
Spica, Right, S – XL
CE Marking
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
173
70
Wrist Brace / w/ Thumb Spica Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Wrist Measurement
X = 1
XS
Up to 5” (14 cm)
X = 3
S
5” – 6” (14 – 16 cm)
X = 5
M
6” – 7” (16 – 18 cm)
X = 7
L
7” – 8” (18 – 20 cm)
X = 9
XL
8.5”+ (22 cm+)
Wrist Brace / Wrist Brace with Thumb Spica
Strap design allows for varying tensions between the wrist and forearm and is sized for best fit.
•For carpal tunnel syndrome, support for strains and
sprains of the wrist
•For support and symptomatic relief of gamekeeper’s
thumb, de Quervain’s syndrome, scaphold injury (Wrist
Lacer with Thumb Spica only)
Part #
SA80210X SA80220X SA80215X SA80225X SA80310X SA80320X
Features
Description
Wrist Brace, 8”, Left, XS-XL
Wrist Brace, 8”, Right, XS-XL
Wrist Brace, 10”, Left, XS-XL
Wrist Brace, 10”, Right, XS-XL
Wrist Brace w/ Thumb Spica,
Left, XS-XL
Wrist Brace w/ Thumb Spica, Right, XS-XL
Wrist Brace
with Thumb Spica
angulations
•Dorsal stay for additional support and immobilization
•Comfortable and lightweight foam laminate
construction
•Additional aluminum stay along extensor surface of
thumb (Wrist Brace with Thumb Spica only)
•Sized for best fit and immobilization of thumb (Wrist
Brace with Thumb Spica only)
Wrist Lacer / w/ Thumb Spica Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Wrist Measurement
X = 1
XS
Up to 5” (14 cm)
X = 3
S
5” – 6” (14 – 16 cm)
X = 5
M
6” – 7” (16 – 18 cm)
X = 7
L
7” – 8” (18 – 20 cm)
X = 9
XL
8” – 9” (20 – 22 cm)
Wrist Lacer / Wrist Lacer with Thumb Spica
Lace-up design easily tensions and secures with one hand and is sized for best fit.
•For carpal tunnel syndrome, support for strains and
sprains of the wrist
•For support and symptomatic relief of gamekeeper’s
thumb, de Quervain’s syndrome, scaphold injury (Wrist
Lacer with Thumb Spica only)
Features
Part #
SA80010X
SA80020X
SA80015X
SA80025X
SA80510X
SA80520X
Description
Wrist Lacer 8” Left
Wrist Lacer 8” Right
Wrist Lacer 10” Left
Wrist Lacer 10” Right
Wrist Lacer w/Thumb Spica,
Left (XS-XL)
Wrist Lacer w/Thumb Spica,
Right (XS-XL)
Wrist Lacer
with Thumb Spica
angulations
•Dorsal stay for additional support and immobilization
•Durable and breathable suede construction
•Adjustable thumb cutout for better fit (Wrist Lacer only)
•Additional aluminum stay along extensor
surface of thumb (Wrist Lacer with Thumb Spica only)
X= See size chart above
174
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Performance Knit Wrist Sizing Chart
Performance Knit Wrist
The Performance Knit Wrist is a lightweight and durable brace that provides compression,
stability and comfort.
• Tendonitis
• Chronic instabilities
Features
• Anatomically contoured support provides compression
and stability
retention
Size #
Size
Measurement
XX = 20
S
5.25” – 6”
(13 – 15 cm)
XX = 30
M
6” – 6.75”
(15 – 17 cm)
XX = 40
L
6.75” – 7.5”
(17 – 19 cm)
XX = 50
XL
7.5” – 8.25”
(19 – 21 cm)
Part #
Description
100197-1XX Performance Knit Wrist, Left,
S – XL
100197-2XX Performance Knit Wrist, Right,
S – XL
CMC Thumb Guard
CMC Thumb Guard Sizing Chart
The CMC Thumb Guard is an ergonomically designed support made from high quality
Neoprene. Its unique wrap design is easy to use and provides comfortable compression and
support of the CMC joint.
•Thumb arthritis and tendonitis
Features
•Easy to apply Neoprene wrap
•Sized for more comfortable fit
•Large hook and loop closure panel
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 3
S
2.5” – 3”
(6 – 7 cm)
X = 4
M
3” – 3.5”
(7 – 8 cm)
X = 5
L
3.5” – 4”
(8 – 10 cm)
Part #
20361X
20362X
Description
CMC Thumb Guard, Right,
S-L
CMC Thumb Guard, Left,
S-L
Wrist Guard
Wrist Guard Sizing Chart
The Wrist Guard is a durable, lightweight support. Its low profile design follows the palmar
crease allowing maximum hand function.
• Sprains
• Strains
Features
• Flexible palmar stay
• Padded palm surface
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 2
XS
2.5” – 3”
(6 – 7 cm)
X = 3
S
3” – 3.5”
(7 – 8 cm)
X = 4
M
3.5” – 4”
(8 – 10 cm)
X = 5
L
4” – 4.5”
(10 – 11 cm)
X = 6
XL
4.5” – 5”
(11 – 13 cm)
X = 7
XXL
5” – 5.5”
(13 – 44 cm)
Part #
20391X
20392X
Description
Wrist Guard, Right, XS – XXL
Wrist Guard, Left, XS – XXL
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
175
El bo w / Wri s t B ra c ing
Elastic Wrist Support Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 2
XS
2.5” – 3”
(6 – 7 cm)
X = 3
S
3” – 3.5”
(7 – 8 cm)
X = 4
M
3.5” – 4”
(8 – 10 cm)
X = 5
L
4” – 4.5”
(10 – 11 cm)
X = 6
XL
4.5” – 5”
(11 – 13 cm)
Part #
20441X
20442X
Description
Elastic Wrist Support, Right
Elastic Wrist Support, Left
Elastic Wrist Support
The Elastic Wrist Support is a lightweight support constructed of a comfortable elastic with a
removable and rigid palmar stay for immobilization. It contains four hook and loop interfaces for
ease of use and personal fit. The ultra-low profile brace provides compression and support while
allowing maximum hand function.
Features
• Contoured design for an anatomical fit
• Rigid palmar stay for immobilization
• Low profile and neutral color
information
Part #
211510
211520
211610
211620
Description
Uni-Versatil Wrist Splint,
Right, 7”
Left, 7”
Right, 10.5”
Left, 10.5”
Uni-Versatil™ Wrist Splint 7” & 10.5”
The Uni-Versatil Wrist Splint is universally sized to fit most patients. It is constructed of a soft
foam for comfort and precise fit.
Features
• Universally sized foam material can be trimmed
• Palmar stay is mallable
• Dorsal stay is attached with hook & loop and is
moveable for individual fit and support
Deluxe Canvas Cock-Up Splint
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 2
XS
2.5” – 3”
(6 – 7 cm)
X = 3
S
3” – 3.5”
(7 – 8 cm)
X = 4
M
3.5” – 4”
(8 – 10 cm)
X = 5
L
4” – 4.5”
(10 – 11 cm)
X = 6
XL
4.5” – 5”
(11 – 13 cm)
Part #
21441X
21442X
Description
Deluxe Canvas Cock-Up Splint, Right, XS - XL
Deluxe Canvas Cock-Up Splint,
Left, XS - XL
Deluxe Canvas Cockup Splint 8” & 10”
The Deluxe Canvas Cock-Up Splint is a durable and ultra-low-profile brace. Its simple design
and neutral color makes it convenient for everyday use to promote support for activities of daily
living.
•Wrist immobilization
Features
•Removable / bendable palmar support for a more
custom fit
•Low-profile, lightweight design
•Thin, elastic material provides additional compression
69
176
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Classic Wrist Support Sizing Chart
Classic Wrist Support
The Classic Wrist Support is durable and lightweight. It provides immobilization with a
removable palmar stay.
Features
• Contoured design for an anatomical fit
• Palmar stay provide additional immobilization
information
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 2
XS
2.5” – 3”
(6 – 7 cm)
X = 3
S
3” – 3.5”
(7 – 8 cm)
X = 4
M
3.5” – 4”
(8 – 10 cm)
X = 5
L
4” – 4.5”
(10 – 11 cm)
X = 6
XL
4.5” – 5”
(11 – 13 cm)
X = 7
XXL
5” – 5.5”
(13 – 44 cm)
Part #
Description
20401X 20402X Classic Wrist Support, Right,
XS – XXL
Classic Wrist Support, Left,
XS – XXL
Elasto-fit Wrist
Elasto-fit Wrist Support Sizing Chart
Elasto-fit Wrist braces are durable and lightweight. They are made of a low-profile, knitted elastic
that offers compression and support. They provide immobilization and support of the wrist with
a removable palmar stay.
• Mild support and immobilization
Features
• Contoured design with a eight inch overall length
• Measure width of palm along MP joints
• Removable palmar stay
• Lightweight and breathable
information
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 1
PED
Pediatric
X = 2
XS
2.5” – 3”
(6 – 7.5 cm)
X = 3
S
3” – 3.5”
(7.5 – 9 cm)
X = 4
M
3.5” – 4”
(9 – 10 cm)
X = 5
L
4” – 4.5”
(10 – 11.5 cm)
X = 6
XL
4.5” – 5”
(11.5 – 12.5 cm)
Part # Description
20412X
20411X
Elasto-fit Wrist Support, Left,
PED – XL
Elasto-fit Wrist Support, Right,
PED – XL
Bilateral Wrist Support – 8”
Bilaterial Wrist Support Sizing Chart
This low-profile wrist brace is durable, supportive, uniquely designed to fit either the left or right
wrist. It contains a both a rigid palmar stay and flexible dorsal stay.
Features
•Available in 8”
•Works on both left and right hands
•Removable / reversible palmar stay
•Low-profile and neutral color
information
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 3
S
2.5” – 3”
(6 – 7 cm)
X = 4
M
3” – 3.5”
(7 – 8 cm)
X = 5
L
3.5” – 4”
(8 – 10 cm)
X = 6
XL
4” – 4.5”
(10 – 11 cm)
X = 7
XXL
4.5” – 5”
(11 – 13 cm)
Part # Description
20470X
Bilateral Wrist Support 8”,
S - XXL
177
70
17
Part #
100144-100
100144-200
100145-100
100145-200
Part #
100375-000
100133-000
100119-000
Description
Economy Wrist Splint,
Left, 10.5”
Right, 10.5”
Left, 7”
Right, 7”
Description
Univ Wrist / Forearm
Support, 6”
Support, 9”
Support, 12”
Economy Wrist Splint 7” & 10.5”
Universal and economical design to fit a wide size range of patients.
Features
• Contoured design for a comfortable fit
Universal Wrist / Forearm Support
The Universal Wrist Forearm Support offers stabilization for the wrist and forearm. Its one-sizefits-most design allows maximum flexibility for patient compression to reduce joint discomfort.
The 3 feet woven white elastic is lightweight, easy to adjust and is universal for either the left or
right hand. The thumb loop allows additional control and support at the wrist.
• Mild sprains and strains
• Tendonitis
Features
• Hook and loop closures secure fit
• Thumb loop for added support and assists with one
hand application
• Universal sizing for right or left hand
Part #
102000
Description
Universal Hand Splint
The Universal Hand Splint is designed to immobilize and protect injuries to the digits,
metacarpals and wrist. The joint is held in the intrinsic plus position to help prevent or minimize
finger stiffness and has padded stays to provide extra comfort.
• “Boxer’s” Fracture
• Other metacarpal fractures
Features
• Contoured design for a comfortable fit
178
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Uni-Versatil Wrist Band
The Uni-Versatil Wrist Band is a lightweight and simple wrist band to provide moderate support
and compression. Available with thumb loop for additional control.
Part # Description
204500
204510
w/ Thumb Loop, Blue
•Mild sprains and strains
•Tendonitis
Features
•Available with or without thumb loop
•Band with thumb loop available in black or blue
information
Uni-Versatil Wrist
Band shown
Part #
Wrist Band Black with Thumb Loop
The Wrist Band Black with Thumb Loop is a durable and lightweight support that provides
moderate stability and compression. It is constructed of elastic with hook and loop closure for a
personalized fit.
Description
102208-000 Wrist Band w/ Thumb Loop
• Mild sprains and strains
• Tendonitis
Features
• Cool and ventilated elastic construction features thumb
loop for easy application
• Wide range hook-and-loop closure
• One size fits most; fits either wrist
information
Wrist Guard
The Wrist Guard has heat moldable, adjustable inserts that give users the ability to adjust ROM
control with a custom fit.
Part #
Description
WA05100 Wrist Guard
• Prophylactic support
• Range of motion control
Features
• Designed for control
• Heat moldable, adjustable inserts to give users the
ability to adjust ROM control with a custom fit
Part # Description
Cryo Pad Universal
10999
Features
Cryo Pad Universal
• Designed to insert into the Volley and select wrist
supports and braces (Wrist Mate, Apollo Universal)
when cold therapy is indicated
• Gel pad is reusable and may be removed and chilled
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
179
Part # Description
10201 Premier Thumb Splint with Stays
(Universal)
Premier Thumb Splint with Stays
The Premier Thumb Splint with Stays is a versatile thumb splint made of perforated
Neoprene. It features pockets on the radial, palmar and dorsal sides of the thumb and
contains a malleable aluminum stay, a spiral stay and a rigid stay. These can be mixed and
matched for desired directional support. The brace has a wraparound design making for an easy
one-hand application.
• Scaphoid injuries
• Gamekeeper’s thumb
• Thumb arthritis and tendonitis
Features
• Interchangable flexible and rigid stays help provide the
desired support and comfort
• Universal design fits either left or right
• 1/8” perforated Neoprene wrap style is easy to apply
Part # Description
10266
Thumbster (Universal)
Thumbster
The Thumbster is a lightweight, low profile universal thumb support. It contains a malleable
thumb support that provides a unique custom fit. The figure-8 strap enhances thumb
support with a wraparound design.
• Sprains
• Tendonitis
• Hyperextension
• Arthritis
Features
• Low profile
• Lightweight
• Universal (Left / Right)
• Wraparound strapping for ease of application
Part # Description
10202
Universal Thumb Spica
The Universal Thumb Spica has flexible and rigid stays to help provide support and comfort.
• Sprains
• Tendonitis
• Hyperextension
• Arthritis
Features
• Interchangable flexible and rigid stays help provide the
desired support and comfort
• Universal design fits either left or right hand
• 1/8” perforated Neoprene wrap style is easy to apply
Trigger and Keeper’s Thumb Support
Size #
Size
Measurements
XX = 03
S
Up to 6.5” (17 cm)
XX = 05
M
6.5” – 7.5” (17 – 19 cm)
XX = 07
L
7.5”+ (19 cm+)
Part #
Description
SA8010XX Trigger and Keeper’s Thumb Support, S-L
18
69
180
Trigger and Keeper’s Thumb Support
These supports immobilize the thumb without immobilizing the wrist.
• Immobilization
• Thumb support
• Relief of gamekeeper’s thumb
• Basal joint arthritis
• Thumb tendonitis
Features
• Wrap around one-hand application
• Malleable extensor stay for customized positioning
• Fits right and left hands
Pediatric
Bracing
Wee Walker
shown
69
70
Embrace the
EXTREME
Brock Walker
Amateur Motocross Rider
Jet™ Pediatric Knee Brace
“I know the quality that Bledsoe puts out.”
Arliss Walker, Brock’s grandpa
Brock Walker revved up his first dirt bike at the tender age of 3; that same year he entered his
first motocross race. Today, at 9 years old, he’s a seasoned racer, following in the footsteps of
his dad Brian, under the watchful eye of his grandpa Arliss. Bledsoe Braces have been supporting the
racing father and son for more than 20 years.“I’ve been a big believer of Bledsoe braces,” said Arliss.
In his home state of Texas, Brock is the fastest in his age division for 65cc motocross. And his Bledsoe brace
is an integral part of his racing gear.
“If the brace is comfortable for him, I know he feels like he can do anything,” said Arliss. “Other braces
need a lot of adjustments, and you don’t have time to adjust anything when you’re racing. With the Bledsoe
braces, he puts them on at 7 o’clock in the morning, and sometimes they don’t come off until 7 or 8 o’clock
at night. They’re perfect.”
Bracing the future: that’s part of Breg 360° Customer Care.Visit www.breg.com, or call 800-897-BREG (2734).
©2014 Breg, Inc. All rights reserved. Jet is a trademark of Bledsoe Brace Systems.
69
BREG STORY
Brock
Walker
To Order: Breg (800) 897-2734 |To order:
Bledsoe
(888)(800)
253-3763
Breg
321-0607
Pe d iat r i c B r a c i ng
JET Sizing Chart
JET™
Size #
The Jet knee brace is designed with children in mind. The shorter frame fits proportionally to a
child’s leg length and the hinge has been reduced to match the anatomy of the smaller knee.
The aircraft aluminum frame provides support, strength and durability, while still remaining
lightweight. Brace migration is prevented by contouring and capturing the medial condyle as
well as using supracondylar suspension to keep the brace in place.
Spacer designed padding allows the brace to be adjusted to the growing child for longer use.
By removing or stacking the spacers, a three-point load system can also be created, allowing the
brace to be used for Juvenile Osteochondritis Dissecans (JOCD).
Size
Thigh Circumference
XX = 03 S
11” – 12.5”
(28 – 32 cm)
XX = 05 M
12.5” – 14.5”
(32 – 37 cm)
XX = 07
14.5” – 16”
(37 – 41 cm)
16” – 17.5”
(41 – 44 cm)
L
XX = 09 XL
Prefabricated: Measure 5” (13 cm) above mid-patella
while standing.
Part #
Description
KZ114000
KZ114YXX–G
KZ114YXX–P
KZ114YXX–B
Features
Y= Left (1). Right (2)
• Ligamentous injuries to the ACL, PCL, MCL and LCL
• Meniscus
• Juvenile Osteochondritis Dissecans
• 10” (25 cm) and 12” (30 cm) length frames
• S, M, L (10” frame)
• XL (12” frame)
• Reduced hinge size
• Condylar suspension points
• Spacer pads for size adjustments and unloading option
Padded Sleeve
JET, Custom
JET Green, S – XL
JET Pink, S – XL
JET Black, S – XL
CE Marking
Padded Sleeve Sizing Chart
Padded sleeve provides cushion and protection. Durable foam construction is designed to
withstand the toughest conditions.
• Padding and compression
• Contusions
• Strains
Features
• Foam pad protects the patella and patellar tendon
• Neoprene anterior for compression and warmth
• Soft TriTech™ material posterior for breathability
and freedom of movement
Size #
Size
Thigh Measurements
XX = 01
XS
9.75” – 11”
(25 cm – 28 cm)
XX = 03 S
11” – 12.25”
(28 cm – 31 cm)
XX = 05 M
12.25” – 13.5” (31 cm – 34 cm)
XX = 07 L
13.5” – 14.75” (34 cm – 37 cm)
XX = 09 XL
14.75” – 16”
(37 cm – 41 cm)
XX = 11 XXL
16” – 17.5”
(41 cm – 44 cm)
XX = 13 3XL
17.5” – 19”
(44 cm – 48 cm)
Part #
AE0610XX
Description
Padded Sleeve, XS – 3XL
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
183 70
Pe d i at ri c B ra ci ng
Part #
EK090000
Description
Wee ROM Post-Op, Universal
Wee ROM™ Post-Op
A post-op knee brace with telescoping bars to accommodate varying leg lengths.
CE Marking
• Non operative or post-op procedures to the lower leg
• ACL, PCL, MCL and LCL injuries
• Meniscus
• Cartilage
• Juvenile Osteochondritis Dissecans
• Patella injuries
Features
• Universal sizing
• Telescoping bars adjust from 16” – 22” (41 – 56 cm)
• Full range-of-motion hinge adjustable from 10° – 110°
• Extends to malleolus
Part #
Description
SA608012 Three Panel Knee Immobilizer,
12”
SA608016 Three Panel Knee Immobilizer,
16”
Pediatric Three Panel Knee Immobilizer
Classic tri-panel design immobilizes the knee.
• Soft tissue injuries where immobilization is needed
Features
• Terry cloth interior for added patient comfort
• Lengths 12” (30 cm) and 16” (41 cm)
Part #
SA607012
SA607014
SA607016
SA607018
SA607020
SA607022
SA607024
Description
Immobilizer, Knee, 1 Panel, 12”
Pediatric Single Panel Knee Immobilizer
Simple single panel design immobilizes the knee.
• Soft tissue injuries where immobilization is needed
Features
• Lightweight, breathable foam
• Elastic straps reduce migration
69
184
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Wee Bow™ Post-Op
Locked or limited motion control of the elbow during rehabilitation, after operative procedures
or injury to the elbow. Malleable arm cuffs allow for adjustability and improved fit.
• Ligament injuries of the elbow (UCL, RCL, Annular
Ligament)
• Strains and sprains
Part #
Description
AE028100 Wee Bow Post-Op, Left,
Universal
AE028200 Wee Bow Post-Op, Right,
Universal
CE Marking
Features
• Telescoping bars adjust from 10.25” – 13.25”
(26 – 34 cm)
• Full range-of-motion hinge adjustable from 10° – 110°
Pediatric Padded Elbow Sleeve Sizing Chart
Pediatric Padded Elbow Sleeve
Padded sleeve provides cushion and protection for the elbow. Durable foam construction is
designed to withstand up to toughest of conditions.
• Elbow sprains and strains
• Tendonitis
• Bursitis
Features
Size #
Size
Bicep Circumference
XX = 01
XS
9.75” - 11”
(25 - 28 cm)
XX = 03
S
11” - 12.25” (28 - 31 cm)
XX = 05
M
12.25” - 13.5” (31 - 34cm)
XX = 07
L
13.5” - 14.75” (34 - 37 cm)
XX = 09
XL
14.75” - 16”
(37 - 41 cm)
XX = 11
2XL
16” - 17.5”
(41 - 44 cm)
XX = 13
3XL
17.5” - 19”
(44 - 48 cm)
Part #
Description
AE0610XX Padded Elbow Sleeve,
XS–3XL
• TriTech™
• 3D Neoprene
Pediatric Sling 2
Ped Sling 2 Sizing Chart
The Pediatric Sling 2 is a sized cotton sling in a variety of colorful patterns. It is universal right or
left with easy to use hook and loop shoulder strap closure.
Features
• Easy to fit sling and straps
• Diagonal strap design limits pressure on neck and
shoulder
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Size #
Size
Forearm Length
X = 0
XXS
9.25” x 5.5”
X = 1
XS
10.75” x 5.5”
X = 2
S
14.25” x 5.5”
Part # Description
0847X
Pediatric Sling 2, XXS – S
185
Part # Description
10651
10652
10653
10654
Pediatric Apollo Universal Wrist
Brace, Left
Brace, Right
Brace with Thumb Spica, Left
Brace with Thumb Spica, Right
Pediatric Apollo Universal Wrist Brace
The Pediatric Apollo Universal Wrist Brace is constructed of a soft and comfortable foam
material and fits most children and adolescents. The adjustable dual closure provides contour
and an individual fit.
Features
• Wrist brace allows for maximum hand function
• Universal sizing for left and right
• Dual lacing closure provides a better contoured fit
• Soft and comfortable construction
CE Marking
Pediatric Apollo Universal
with Thumb Spica
Part # Description
204121
Elasto-Fit Wrist Support Pediatric,
Left
204111
Elasto-Fit Wrist Support Pediatric,
Right
Elasto-Fit Wrist
The Elasto-fit Wrist braces are durable and lightweight. They are made of a low-profile, knitted
elastic that offers compression and support. They provide immobilization and support of the
wrist with a removable palmar stay.
• Mild support and immobilization
Features
• Contoured design with a eight inch overall length
• Measure width of palm along MP joints
• Removable palmar stay
• Lightweight and breathable
Part #
008321
008322
008323
008324
008325
008326
186
Description
Seal-Tight Pediatric Arm
S, 11” (28 cm) Length
M, 18” (46 cm) Length
L, 28” (71 cm) Length
Seal-Tight Pediatric Leg
Seal-Tight Pediatric Arm and Leg
The Seal-Tight Pediatric barriers are easy to use, providing durable protection to simplify
showering and bathing. They are constructed of a durable vinyl that provides a firm, yet
comfortable fit that’s squeegee-tight to keep out water. Safely allows normal showering and
bathing routines.
• Used for therapeutic care and daily showering
Features
• Easy one-hand application
• Maintains hygiene
• Keeps skin clean and dry
• Reusable and lasts the life of the cast
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Mini Walker Nylon Struts Sizing Chart
Mini Walker (Nylon)
Size #
Size
Kids Shoe Size
X = 2
S
<5 – 6
X = 3
M
7–8
X = 4
L
9 – 11 +
Part # Description
7703X
Mini Walker Nylon Struts
CE Marking
Features
• Lightweight nylon struts
Mini Walker Alum. Struts Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Kids Shoe Size
X = 2
S / M
<5 – 8
X = 4
L
9 – 12
X = 5
XL
13 +
Part # Description
7700X
Mini Walker Aluminum Struts
uprights, S / M, L, XL
Features
• Lightweight aluminum struts
CE Marking
Wee Walker / Wee Walker Air Size Chart
The original child’s walker boot, designed to fit children as young as one year.
• Sprains and strains of the ankle
• Sprains and strains of the foot
Features
• Durable aluminum tough enough for average kids
• Heel height, width and rocker bottom designed for
small children
• Forefoot straps immobilize the ankle
• Built-in pneumatic system (Wee Walker Air only)
Size Age
Foot Length
Leg Length
S – M 1 – 2
Up to 6” (15 cm) Up to 9” (23 cm)
L
2.5 – 6
6”–7.5” (15 – 19 cm)
Up to 11” (28 cm)
XL
6.5 – 9.5 7.5”–8.5” (19 – 22 cm) Up to 14” (36 cm)
Part #
Description
AL185003BB-
AL185007BB-
AL185009BB-
BL585003
BL585007
BL585009
AL137000–B
Wee Walker, S – M
Wee Walker, L
Wee Walker, XL
Wee Walker w/ Air, S – M
Wee Walker w/ Air, L
Wee Walker w/ Air, XL
Night Cover
CE Marking
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
187 70
Pediatric Cast Boot Sizing Chart
Size
Shoe Size
M
5.5 – 7.5
L
8 – 10
Pediatric Cast Boot
The Pediatric Cast Boot’s slip resistant rocker sole provides a natural gait for children during
rehabilitation with a heel strap for ease of application and a better cast boot fit.
Features
Part # Description
11396
11397
Part #
• Juvenile print canvas upper
• Slip resistant rocker sole
Pediatric Cast Boot, M
Pediatric Cast Boot, L
Description
SA900309 Pediatric Post-Op Shoe
Pediatric Post-Op Shoe
Protects foot after surgery. Trimmable straps for easy application. Large opening to
accommodate dressings and swelling.
• For use following surgery or trauma to the foot
Features
• Universal left and right
• Kids size < 13.5
Part # Description
11031
Pediatric
The Post-Op Shoe Square Toe provides protection of the foot relating to post-op and trauma
applications. The square toe design acts as a bumper and provides additional room and
protection for the patient.
Features
• Post surgical foot protection
• Square toe feature provides added protection
• Forefoot closure allows for a wide range of adjustments
• Adjustable ankle strap and padded heel
• Rocker sole provides traction and comfort
• Kids shoe size 12 – 1
Part # Description
11026
Post-Op Shoe Deluxe, Pediatric
Post-Op Shoe Deluxe
The Post-Op Shoe Deluxe provides protection of the foot in post-op and trauma applications. It
is ideal for patients looking for both comfort and support of a shoe with a heel.
Features
• Rubber outer sole helps absorb shock
• Padded, shaped heel allows for better fit and comfort
• Fits left or right foot
69
188
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
SizeAge
Children need medical products designed specifically for them. Aspen understands this and
offers five sizes of pediatric cervical collars, allowing you to provide the highest level of patient
care.
• Sprain / strain
• Radiculopathy
Features
• Available in five pediatric sizes
Measurement
Weight
PD1 1-18 mos. 22” – 33” (53 – 84 cm)
11 – 29 lbs.
PD2 9-24 mos. 29” – 37” (74 – 94 cm)
22 – 33 lbs.
PD3 1-3 years 33” – 40” (84 – 102 cm) 24 – 36 lbs.
PD4 2-5 years 35” – 45” (89 – 114 cm) 26 – 42 lbs.
PD5 3-6 years 37” – 48” (94 – 122 cm) 27 – 54 lbs.
Measurement is taken at length
Part #
100277-000
100278-000
100279-000
100280-000
100281-000
Description
CE Marking
Aspen Pediatric Collar Accessories
Part #
Description
100287-000 PD1, PD2 Replacement
Pads
100288-000 PD3, PD4, PD5
Replacement Pads
100290-000 PD3, PD4, PD5 Back Panel,
8.5 – 13 in / 22 – 33 cm
circumference
CE Marking
Aspen CTO
The Aspen CTO, Pediatric system offers the greatest versatility available when dealing with
cervical-thoracic problems in today’s cost conscious healthcare environment.
Part #
Description
100337-000 Aspen CTO, Pediatric
CE Marking
• MRI compatible
• Available in two or four post option
Features
Manufactured by
Distributed by
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
189 70
Pavlick Harness Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Month
X = 0
Preemie
X = 1
S
0 – 3
14” – 16”
X = 2
M
3 – 6
16” – 18”
X = 3
L
6 – 9
18” – 21”
X = 4
XL
–
–
Measurement
12” – 14”
Pavlick Harness
The Pavlick Harness is designed with maximum comfort of the patient in mind. It doesn’t have
any bulky buckles, and the soft lining will help reduce the risk of skin irritation. It has been
carefully engineered to comply with orthopedic standards.
•Pediatric hip dysplasia
21” +
Features
•Color-coded straps to assist with proper application
•Soft liner for maximum comfort
•Anti-slip footpiece to prevent the foot from slipping
out of the harness
Measurements taken at chest circumference
Part #
00726X
Description
Pavlick Harness, Preemie – XL
Part #
Description
100311-000 Aluminum Push Button
Crutches, Youth
Aluminum Push Button Crutches
Breg’s axilla crutches are made from a lightweight aluminum with comfortable underarm pads
and foam handgrips to aid in ambulation for lower extremity injuries or rehabilitation. Breg’s
crutches are available in youth, adult and tall options.
• Aid in ambulation while recovering from surgical
procedures or when one or both of the lower extremities
is injured
Features
• Made of lightweight aluminum
• Comfortable EVA foam hand grips with underarm pads
• Rubber tip for increased traction
• Push button adjustment makes height changing easy
• Height adjustment in 1” increments
• Handgrip position is readily adjusted with wing nuts
69
190
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Fracture
Splints &
Management
A trek of a
LIFETIME
Fusion® OA Plus Knee Brace
In June, Lynn Hatcher and his wife went on a three-week
adventure of a lifetime to Khardung Valley in The Himalayas,
visiting ancient Buddhist monasteries and exploring some of
the highest peaks on the planet.
“Along with 144,000 Tibetans and locals from the Himalayan region, we were among 5,000 travelers from all
over the world who came to attend daily teachings by His Holiness the Dalai Lama,” said Lynn. “It was quite
a daily quest to get there-and-back from the hotel—about a two mile hike each way, plus walking around
seeing the town sights for hours on end.”
It’s hard to believe that a few months earlier, Lynn was faced with the decision to either undergo a total
knee replacement or interim bracing support. Without enough time to recover before his trip, he opted for
bracing and was equipped with a Fusion® OA Plus before departing for The Himalayas.
“I wore the brace every day for three weeks while in India,” he said. “It was a life saver and I could not have
made the trip without it.”
Closer to home, Lynn uses his brace while at work on the farm, and for exercising. “Without the brace, it’s
really tough to even walk down steps. It’s phenomenal.”
Helping people pursue what they love: that is part of Breg 360° Customer Care.
©2014 Breg, Inc. All rights reserved. Fusion is a registered trademark of Breg, Inc.
BREG STORY
Lynn Hatcher
S pl in ts & F ractu re Ma na g ement
Finger Splint Adjustable
Protection and stabilization of digits.
Features
• Constructed of aluminum with foam padding
• Four hook and loop closures
• Sold one per box
information
4 Prong Finger Splint Foam
Protection, stabilization and immobilization of digits.
Features
Part #
Description
Part #
Description
Part #
Description
194202Finger Splint Adjustable,
5.25” Length, XS
194203
Finger Splint Adjustable,
6.25” Length, S
194204
8.25” Length, M
194205
9.75” Length, L
190363
190364
190365
4 Prong Finger Splint, S
4 Prong Finger Splint, M
4 Prong Finger Splint, L
• Easily molds to provide the best fit
• Constructed of lightweight aluminum with foam
padding
• Sold six per box
Alumafoam Finger Splint
Protection and stabilization of digits.
Features
• Constructed of aluminum with foam padding
• Easy to form and can be cut to desired length
Baseball Finger Splint Foam
193463
193464
193465
193466
Alumafoam Finger Splint,
1 / 2” X 9”
1 / 2” X 18”
3 / 4” X 18”
1” X 18”
Baseball Finger Splint Foam Size Chart
Stabilizes multiple fractures of the phalanx.
Features
• Provides stabilization and protection
• No tape needed
Size # Size
Length
X = 3
S
3.75”
X = 4
M
4”
X = 5
L
4.75”
Part #
19006X
Description
Baseball Finger Splint Foam,
S–L
Fold Over Finger Splint
Stabilizes fractures of the distal phalanx.
Features
• Can easily be molded to give the desired amount of
extension or hyperextension
• No tape needed
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Part #
190263
190264
190265
190266
Description
Fold Over Finger Splint, S
Fold Over Finger Splint, M
Fold Over Finger Splint, L
Fold Over Finger Splint, XL
193 70
Spl i n t s & Fra ctu re M a na gement
Part # Description
193600 193610 193620 193630 193640 193650 193655 193660 193670 Stack Finger Splint, Kit
Stack Finger Splint, Size 1
Stack Finger Splint, Size 5.5
Part # Description
190661
190663
190664
190665
190667
Gutter Splint with Foam, 1.5”
Gutter Splint with Foam, 3”
Gutter Splint with Foam, 5.5”
Galveston Metacarpal Splint Size Chart
Size #
Size
Measurement
X = 3
S
2.5” – 3”
X = 4
M
3” – 3.5”
X = 5
L
3.5” – 4”
X = 6
XL ≥ 4”
Part # Description
10223X
Stack Finger Splint
Protects and supports distal interphalangel joint.
Features
• Multiple sizes for best fit
• Sold six per box for each size or a kit of 30 with multiple
sizes
Gutter Splint with Foam
Stabilizes and protects the digits.
Features
• Provides stabilization and protection
• Sold in packs of six
• Multiple sized for best fit
Galveston Metacarpal Splint
The Galveston Metacarpal splint uses three-point fixation to help correct metacarpal fractures.
Fully adjustable pads allow for customization to various hand sizes and fracture types.
Features
• Adjustable strap allows maintenance of swelling
reduction
• Two-toned dorsal pad has soft layer for comfort and a
stiffer backing pad for support
• Radiotransparent
• Sold one per box
69
194
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Colles Splint Vinyl Coated Size Chart
Colles Splint Vinyl Coated
Size # Size
This Colles Splint is a coated, ventilated aluminum that is pre-formed to provide stabilization of
fractures at the lower end of the radius.
Features
• Padded aluminum with blue foam for comfort, premolded for an anatomical fit
• Malleable to allow exact positioning
X = 2
S
X = 3
M
X = 4
L
Part # Description
10051XColles Splint Vinyl Coated, Right
10052X Colles Splint Vinyl Coated, Left
Arm Splint Vinyl Coated Padded
Arm Splint Vinyl Coated Padded
This Arm Splint is a coated, ventilated aluminum that is pre-formed to provide stabilization of
the distal radius and ulnar fractures.
Features
• Padded aluminum comfort, pre-molded for an
anatomical fit
• Malleable to allow exact positioning
Size # Size
X = 2
S
X = 3
M
X = 4
L
Part # Description
10011X Arm Splint Vinyl Coated Padded, Right
10012X Arm Splint Vinyl Coated Padded, Left
“Cruiser” Hip Abduction Splint
The “Cruiser” Hip Abduction Splint is used for treating children from infants to three years of
age with hip dysplasia. Holds hips in the correct abduction position. Can be used full time or for
night wear only.
Features
• Made of flexible polypropylene to allow walking
• Multiple sizes for best fit
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Part # Description
99-00002 “Cruiser” Hip Abduction
Splint, XS, 14”- 16”
10251
“Cruiser” Hip Abduction
Splint, S, 16” - 18”
Splint, M, 18” - 20”
Splint, L, 20” - 22”
195 70
Metal Post Tib / Fib Splint Size Chart
Metal Post Tib / Fib Splint
Size # Size
X = 2
S
X = 3
M
X = 4
L
Part #
10160X
This leg splint is a coated, ventilated aluminum, pre-formed splint that provides immobilization
of the lower leg.
Features
• Durable and flexible
• Fully ventilated for patient comfort
• Requires secondary bandage to hold splint in place
Description
Metal Post Tib / Fib Splint, S
Carboblast Rigid Insert Size Chart
Carboplast Rigid Inserts reduce foot motion by making footwear rigid, without removing the
sole.
Size # Size
X = 2
S
X = 3
M
X = 4
L
X = 5
XL
Part #
14181X
• Used to limit motion for conditions such as turf toe or
hallux rigidus
• Inserts
Description
Carboblast Rigid Insert
69
196
Carboblast® Rigid Insert
Features
• Easy to fit and finish
• Customizable by heat molding or grinding
• Designed to retain shape
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Synthocast Casting Tape
The Synthocast Casting Tape is comfortable and durable for every phase of immobilization. Its
strong fiberglass construction is conformable, easy to wrap and provides a great fit for most
patients.
Features
Part #
282902
282903
282904
282905
Description
Synthocast, 2” White
• Highly conformable casting tape
• Packaged in quantities of ten rolls per box
Thumb Spica Fracture Brace
Thumb Spica Fracture Brace Sizing Chart
The Thumb Spica is a lightweight, durable brace with a contoured design for full finger motion.
The rigid exterior shell contains closed cell foam on the interior that provides gentle fluid
compression for increased stability.
Features
• Adjustable loop lock closures
• Heat moldable and can be trimmed
• Measure width of palm
Size # Size
X = 2
S
X = 3
M
X = 4
L
Measure width of palm
Part #
Description
29123X
Thumb Spica Fracture Brace,
Right
29124X Thumb Spica Fracture Brace,
Left
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
197 70
Lo Pro Humeral Fracture Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Bicep Circumference
X = 3
S
8” – 11”
(20cm – 28cm)
X = 4
M
10” – 13”
(26cm –33cm)
X = 5
L
12” – 15”
(30cm–39cm)
X = 6
XL
14” – 17”
(36cm–43)
Lo Pro Humeral Fracture Brace
The Lo Pro Humeral Fracture Brace is lightweight with a contoured design. The rigid exterior
shell contains closed cell foam on the interior that provides gentle fluid compression for
increased stability.
Features
• Stockingette included
Measure bicep circumference
Part #
29093X
Description
Lo Pro Humeral Fracture
Brace, S – XL
Part #
29091X
29092X
Description
Humeral Fracture Brace,
Right, S – XL
Humeral Fracture Brace,
Left, S – XL
Part #
29390X
Description
Over the Shoulder Humeral
Fracture Brace, S – XL
Humeral Fracture Brace
The Humeral Fracture Brace is lightweight and durably constructed. It has a rigid exterior shell
that provides gentle fluid compression for increased stability.
Features
Over the Shoulder Humeral Fracture Brace
The Over the Shoulder Humeral Fracture Brace offers full soft tissue contact. The deltoid
extension provides greater alignment and prevents distal slippage. It has a rigid exterior shell
and soft foam liner that provides gentle fluid compression for increased stability.
Features
69
198
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Ambulite Elbow Quick Splint Sizing Chart
Ambulite Elbow Quick Splint
Size # Size
The Ambulite Elbow Quick Splint helps stabilize and decrease joint movement while providing
injury support. This easy-to-apply splint is made of lightweight, breathable materials for added
comfort.
• Elbow immobilization
• Injury stabilization
Features
X = 2
XS
X = 3
S
X = 4
M
X = 5
L
X = 6
XL
Measure the length of the forearm from the lateral
epicondyle to the fifth MP joint
• Fits right or left elbow
• Adjustable flexion extension at the elbow
• Removable hand positioner
Part #
information
Hanging Cast Sling
Description
20230XAmbulite Elbow Quick
Splint, XS – XL
Hanging Cast Sling Sizing Chart
This hanging sling for arm casts maintains correct healing position and adjusts to fit most
patients. Easily detachable arm band makes it simple to remove and reapply, aiding in
placement over or under clothing.
• Fracture management of the humerous
Features
• Sling lies flat against the chest, reducing patient
discomfort
• Web strap with adjustable buckle
• Foam padded collar and elastic support band
Size # Size
X = 1
Ped
X = 2
S
X = 3
M
X = 4
L
X = 5
XL
Part #
Description
30140X
Hanging Cast Sling, Ped – XL
• Proximal third humeral fractures
• Mid shaft humeral fractures
• Distal third humeral fractures
Features
• The Aligner PHX Humeral Fracture Brace is a hybrid
brace with an humeral reduction component
• Combining common methods of stabilizing humeral
fractures
• Sarmiento fracture cuff combined with a
• Hanging Cast combined with
• ROM elbow brace
• The physician takes an active role in alignment of the
fracture
• The only fracture brace that allows a physician
to reduce a humeral fracture without surgery
Benefits
• Designed to decrease the chances of Gunstock
Deformity (Cubitus Varus)
• The fracture can be moved into place instead of letting nature take charge of the alignment
and gravity determine the final position
• Allows for shoulder to wrist immobilization of the arm
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Size #
Size
Measurements
X = 3
S
8” - 11”
X = 5
M
11” - 14”
X = 7
L
12” - 15”
X = 9
XL 14” - 17”
Measurements according to Bicep Circumference
Part #Description
AE23510X
Aligner PHX Humeral
Fracture, Standard, Left,
S-XL
AE23520X
Aligner PHX Humeral
Fracture, Standard, Right,
S-XL
AE23517X
Aligner PHX Humeral
Attachment, Left, S-XL
AE23527X
Aligner PHX Humeral
Attachment, Right, S-XL
X=See Size chart above
199 70
Spl
C
ast
i n t&s B
&a Fra
nd actu
g e re
P ro
Mtec
a nato
gement
r
Part #
008315
Description
Seal-Tight Adult Hand,
12” (31 cm) Length
Seal-Tight Adult Hand
The Seal-Tight Hand is an easy to use and durable barrier to simplify showering and bathing. It
is constructed of a durable vinyl that’s squeegee-tight to keep out water. Safely allows normal
showering and bathing routines.
Features
Part #
008316
008317
Description
Seal-Tight Adult Short Arm,
Seal-Tight Adult Long Arm,
Seal-Tight Adult Arm
The Seal-Tight Long Arm is an easy to use and durable barrier to simplify showering and
bathing. It is constructed of a durable vinyl that’s squeegee-tight to keep out water. Safely allows
normal showering and bathing routines.
Features
69
200
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
S pl in ts
C as
& tF&
ractu
Banre
dage
Ma na
P rot
g ement
ec t or
Seal-Tight Adult Leg
The Seal-Tight Wide Leg is an easy to use and durable barrier to simplify showering and
Features
Part #
Description
Part #
Description
Part #
Description
008318
008319
008320A
Seal-Tight Adult Short Leg,
Seal-Tight Adult Long Leg,
Seal-Tight Adult Wide Short
Leg, 24” (61 cm) Length
Seal-Tight Adult Foot / Ankle
The Seal-Tight Foot / Ankle is an easy to use and durable barrier to simplify showering and
008320
Seal-Tight Adult Foot Ankle,
Features
The Seal-Tight Pediatric barriers are easy to use and durable protectors to simplify showering
and bathing. They are constructed of a durable vinyl that provides a firm, yet comfortable fit
that’s squeegee-tight to keep out water. Safely allows normal showering and bathing routines.
Features
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
008321
008322
008323
008324
008325
008326
201 70
C ast & B a nd a g e P ro tec to r
Part #
Description
11926
Aquashield Half Arm,
Small
007899
Aquashield Half Arm,
Regular
Aquashield Half Arm
AquaShield Watertight Cast and Bandage Protectors are plastic protective covers for casts,
bandages, dressings, burns, prostheses, and other conditions that must remain dry during bathing
and showering.
• Water proof protection for shower, bathing, pool or spa
• It’s commonly used for fractures, sprains, foot, hand and
knee surgery, PICC sites, lymphadema therapy and water
therapy
Features
• Pre-sized and ready to use
• Durable and safe
• High performance, heavy-gauge polyurethane
• Sold in packs of 12
Part #
Description
13317
Aquashield Full Arm,
Small
008425
Aquashield Full Arm,
Regular
Aquashield Full Arm
and showering.
therapy
Features
69
202
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
C as t & Ban dage P rot ec t or
Aquashield Half Leg
and showering.
Part #
Description
Part #
Description
12873
Aquashield Half Leg,
Pediatric
007900
Aquashield Half Leg,
Regular
therapy
Features
Aquashield Full Leg
and showering.
008426
Aquashield Full Leg,
Regular
therapy
Features
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
203 70
UNMATCHED
SERVICE
Breg Customer Care is committed to providing prompt, one-call service.
We stand behind our products and services, and do all we can to ensure
customers are satisfied. We work to go “above and beyond” to address
customer requests and surpass expectations.
Walkers
Crutches, Canes &
It’s a whole NEW
BALLGAME
“With Freestyle™ OA, my knee still feels good – even after four games in a weekend.”
– Neil Tucci
Boca Raton, Florida
For Neil Tucci, there’s nothing slow about
slow pitch softball.
Neil Tucci has played softball for 42 years – 20 of them with a painful knee. “I pitch for our
team, and I run bases for other players. I’m moving around a lot,” Neil says. “At the end of
a game, my knee would be painful and swollen. It was hard to sleep at night.”
Then Neil’s orthopedist recommended the Freestyle OA from Breg. It’s lightweight and features
a wraparound design for a low-profile fit. “Freestyle OA is comfortable and doesn’t slide down my
leg, so I’m much more mobile,” Neil says. “The brace is easy to put on: I can do it in seconds.”
With the Freestyle OA, Neil’s knee no longer swells after a game, and he can sleep comfortably at night.
The brace also helps Neil with his other sport: keeping up with his grandkids.
Designing products around patients needs is part of Breg 360° Customer Care. Learn more at www.breg.com,
or call 800-897-BREG (2734). View Neil’s story at www.breg.com / osteoarthritis. ©2014 Breg, Inc. All rights reserved.
Freestyle is a trademark of Breg, Inc. No fee was paid for this testimonial.
BREG STORY
Neil Tucci
C ru tch e s , Can e s , an d Wa l k er s
Breg’s axilla crutches are made from a lightweight aluminum with comfortable underarm pads
and foam handgrips to aid in ambulation for lower extremity injuries or rehabilitation. Breg’s
crutches are available in youth, adult and tall options.
• Aid in ambulation while recovering from surgical
procedures or when one or both of the lower extremities
is injured
Part #
Description
Part #
Description
Part #
Description
100309-000
100310-000
100311-000
Aluminum Push Button
Crutches, Adult
Crutches, Tall
Crutches, Youth
Features
• Comfortable EVA foam hand grips with underarm pads
• Height adjustment in 1” increments
• Handgrip position is readily adjusted with wing nuts
Push Button Aluminum Cane
Breg’s Push Button Cane is made from a lightweight aluminum with comfortable hand grips to
help provide assistance with balance. The handle allows users to hook the cane over their arm
while performing tasks.
100314-000 Push Button Aluminum Cane
• Provides additional assistance with balance to help
restore mobility
Features
• Comfortable vinyl hand grips
• Adult maximum weight capacity: 250 lbs.
• Adjusts from 30” to 39”
• Fits users with heights from 4’5” to 6’5”
Folding Walker
Breg’s Folding Walker is made from lightweight aluminum with comfortable, contoured vinyl
hand grips. The Folding Walker folds up easily so it can be taken anywhere you go. 5” fixed
wheels can be ordered as an accessory to help glide quietly over most surfaces.
100312-000 Folding Walker
100313-000 5” Fixed Wheels for Walkers
restore mobility
Features
• Comfortable hand grips
• Adult maximum weight capacity: 250 lbs.
• Adjust from 32” to 39”
• Fits users with heights from 4’5” to 6’5”
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
207 70
C r u t c h e s , C a n es , a nd Wa l k ers
Part #
Description
16753
Bariatric Walker
100313-000 5” Fixed Wheels for Walkers
Bariatric Walker
The Bariatric Walker is made of reinforced aluminum with a steel cross brace on each side to
provide added stability. It has a weight capacity of 650 lbs. and an extra wide frame with 22”
between the hand grips to keep larger patients active and mobile.
restore mobility
Features
• Extra-wide frame gives larger patients a more
comfortable fit
• Two-button folding capabilities let patients receive
support through narrow spaces
• Comfortable hand grips
• 650 lb. (295 kg) weight capacity
• Approximate user height, 5’5” – 6’4” (165 cm – 193 cm);
height adjustment width, 32” – 39”
(81 cm – 99 cm); folded width, 4.5” (11 cm)
• Sold 2 per case
69
208
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
& Miscellaneous
Therapy
Home
CONFIDENCE
at every step
Allan José recently began using the PF Unloader Strap to
help with his patellar tendonitis.
“I wish I knew about this product when I was a teenager. This would have been really helpful during
my time as a high school athlete,” he said. Years as an active runner, wrestler, and time on the basketball and
tennis courts have contributed to Allan’s knee discomfort. “I feel more secure—more confident—when I’m
wearing the PF band. It gives me that extra support, and it doesn’t feel like my knee will give out when I’m
running,” he said.
With his PF Uploader, Allan has been able to return to the court, feeling more sure-footed than ever. His only
regret is that he didn’t seek out this support earlier.
Helping you return to an active lifestyle: that’s part of Breg 360° Customer Care.
©2014 Breg, Inc. All rights reserved. PF Unloader is a trademark of Breg, Inc.
BREG STORY
Allan José
Home T h e rap y & M i s c .
Part # Description
Shoulder Therapy Kit
A collapsible bar for range of motion exercises, surgical tubing, and wall pulley allow for a
multitude of shoulder and elbow exercises.
00500
Shoulder Therapy Kit, Complete
01000
Knee Therapy Kit, Complete
01400
Ankle Therapy Kit, Deluxe
71400
Rubber Tubing Assembly Red, 10-Pack
71410
Rubber Tubing Assembly Green, 10-Pack
71420
Rubber Tubing Assembly Blue, 10-Pack
71440
Rope & Pulley Set, 10-Pack
71450
Collapsible Bar, 10-Pack
71460
L - Handle, 10-Pack
CE Marking
Knee Therapy Kit
An inflatable pillow, surgical tubing, and waist belt provide the tools necessary to complete a
wide variety of home rehabilitation exercises for knee injuries.
Ankle Therapy Kit
An exercise rocker, tubing, and door straps allow for a wide array of range of motion exercises to
rehabilitate many foot and ankle injuries.
Red Tubing,10-Pack
Rope & Pulley,10-Pack
Green Tubing,10-Pack
Blue Tubing,10-Pack
Collapsible Bar,10-Pack
L-Handle,10-Pack
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
211 70
Hom e Thera p y & M isc .
Part #
151400
Description
Overdoor Cervical
Traction Kit
Overdoor Cervical Traction Kit
The Overdoor Traction Kit is used to relieve pressure on muscle and soft tissue surrounding the
cervical spine. It is easily set up for home use.
• Sprains and strains of cervical spine
Features
• Overdoor bracket
• Padded head halter
• Water weight bag
• Traction cord
information
Part #
302700
Description
Universal Arm Elevator
The Universal Arm Elevator can help reduce edema of the hand and arm after surgery. Made
from sturdy, reliable materials, it is built to last.
•Wrist injuries
•Arm fractures
•Elbow and shoulder sprains
Features
•Easy to use
•Durable materials and construction
information
Part #
313100
Description
Borrero Arm Elevator Sling
Help provide support and comfort for an injured arm or hand after surgery. Made from
convoluted foam for even weight distribution, especially when used in combination with a cast.
•Wrist injuries
•Arm fractures
•Elbow and shoulder sprains
Features
• Easy to use
• Made from soft, convoluted foam
information
69
212
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Kodel Knee Sling Sizing Chart
Kodel Knee Sling
The Kodel Knee Sling is designed for knee suspension and elevation following lower extremity
surgeries.
•Lower extremity surgeries
Features
•Reinforced rivets to reliably support different limb sizes
•Plush lining for optimal comfort
information
Rib Belt 6” Universal
The Rib Belt 6” Universal is durably constructed of foam and available in male or female styles. It
provides compression and support for injuries and strains to the rib cage.
Size #
Size
Width
Length
X = 2
Ped.
14.25”
6.25”
X = 3
S
14.25”
10”
X = 4
M
18.25”
11.5”
X = 5
L
22.13”
12.5”
X = 6
XL
24”
12.38”
Part #
26230X
Description
Kodel Knee Sling, Ped. – XL
Part #
Description
Part #
Description
084710
084720
Rib Belt 6” Universal, Male
Rib Belt 6” Universal, Female
• Stabilization and support of ribs and abdomen
Features
• Male or female specific design
• Male length = 44”
• Female length = 40”
information
Velofoam Rib Belt
The Velofoam Rib Belt is made of a stretch elastic and a soft foam to provide comfortable
compression for the ribs and abdomen. It is universally sized, available in male or tapered
female styles.
085010
085020
Velofoam Rib Belt, Male
Velofoam Rib Belt, Female
• Stabilization and support of ribs and abdomen
Features
• Soft foam anterior for comfort
• Male or female specific design
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
213 70
Abdominal Binder Sizing Chart
Abdominal Binder
Size #
Size
Length
X = 2
XS
27”
X = 3
S
30.5”
X = 4
M
34.5”
X = 5
L
40.5”
• Support and compression of ribs and abdomen
X = 6
XL
42.6”
Features
X = 9
XXL
46.1”
Part #
The Abdominal Binders allows flexibility and conformity for abdominal injuries or weakness. Its
woven elastic, tapered design and multiple heights offer an individualized fit.
• Firm elastic construction with a tapered design
• Various heights for an individual fit: 8”, 9”, 10” & 12”
• Wide contact closure panel
Description
08080X
08090X
08100X
081053
081055
08120X
081253
081254
084600
Abdominal Binder
8”, XS - XXL
Abdominal Binder
9”, S - XXL
Abdominal Binder
10”, S - XXL
Abdominal Binder
10”, 3XL
Abdominal Binder
10”, 4XL
Abdominal Binder
12”, S - XXL
Abdominal Binder
12”, 3XL
Abdominal Binder
12”, 4XL
Abdominal Binder
12”, Univ
information
Surgical Binder 9”
The Surgical Binder 9” provides support and compression to strained or weakened abdominal
muscles. Universal size to fit multiple body types.
•Support and compression of abdominal muscles
Features
•Universal size
•Durable, woven elastic material
•Wide hook and loop closure panel
information
Part #
Description
088800
Back Booster Sizing Chart
Size #
Size
Measurement
X=2
XS
26” – 30” (66 – 76 cm)
X=3
S
30” – 34” (76 – 86 cm)
X=4
M
34” – 38” (86 – 96 cm)
X=5
L
38” – 42” (96 – 106 cm)
X=6
XL
42” – 46” (106 – 117 cm)
X=9
XXL
46” – 50” (117 – 127 cm)
Measurement taken at hip circumference
Part #
01260X
Description
Back Booster, XS - XXL
Back Booster
The Back Booster is a simple and economical way to manage chronic and acute lower back
discomfort. It’s low profile, breathable and provides gentle support to encourage alignment and
stabilization.
•Lower back pain
•Lower back sprains / strains
Features
•Breathable, durable material
•Dual hook and loop fastening for adjustments and
optimal support
information
69
214
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Heelbo Sizing Chart
Heelbo Protector
®
The Heelbo Protector provides comfortable, breathable coverage of the elbow or heel.
• Used to prevent dermal ulcers in conjunction with other
dermal ulcer therapy
Features
• Made of flexible stretch weave
• Air-cushioned contour foam pad for comfort
• Machine washable
information
Pavlick Harness
Size #
Size
X = 1
S
X = 2
M
X = 3
L
X = 4
XL
X = 9
XXL
Part #
14629X
Description
Heelbo, S - XXL
Pavlick Harness Sizing Chart
The Pavlick Harness is designed with maximum comfort of the patient in mind. It doesn’t have
any bulky buckles, and the soft lining will help reduce the risk of skin irritation. It has been
carefully engineered to comply with orthopedic standards.
Size #
Size
X = 0
Preemie
X = 1
S
0 – 3
14” – 16”
•Pediatric hip dysplasia
X = 2
M
3 – 6
16” – 18”
Features
X = 3
L
6 – 9
18” – 21”
X = 4
XL
•Color-coded straps to assist with proper application
•Soft liner for maximum comfort
•Anti-slip footpiece to prevent the foot from slipping
out of the harness
Month
–
–
Measurement
12” – 14”
21” +
Measurements taken at chest circumference
Part #
00726X
Description
Pavlick Harness,
Preemie - XL
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
215 70
Compression Stocking Sizing Chart
Part#
Description
Calf Circum Ankle
009788 S, Above Knee OT
11” – 14”
7” – 8.25”
009789 M, Above Knee OT 13.5” – 16” 8.38” – 9.63”
009790 L, Above Knee OT
15.5” – 18” 9.75” – 11”
Compression Stockings
The compression stockings offer firm support and graduated compression to relieve tired,
aching legs, moderate varicose veins or other related conditions throughout the day. Available
in various sizes and open or closed toe for an individual “right sized” fit.
009791 XL, Above Knee OT 17.5” – 20” 11.12”– 12.38”
10643
S, Below Knee CT
11” – 14”
10644
M, Below Knee CT
13.5” – 16” 8.38” – 9.63”
10645
L, Below Knee CT
15.5” – 18” 9.75” – 11”
10646
XL, Below Knee CT 17.5” – 20” 11.12”– 12.38”
009226 S, Below Knee OT
• Theraputic compression for minor swelling, tired aching
legs moderate varicose veins
7” – 8.25”
Features
• Knit construction with a defined heel pocket for added
durability and proper fit
• Smooth opaque texture in neutral color
• Moderate compression, 25mmHg
• Sold as pair
11” – 14” 7” – 8.25”
009227 M, Below Knee OT 13.5” – 16” 8.38” – 9.63”
009228 L, Below Knee OT
15.5” – 18” 9.75” – 11”
009229 XL, Below Knee OT 17.5” – 20” 11.12”– 12.38”
99-000532XL, Below Knee OT 19.5”– 22” 12.5”– 13.75”
99-000543XL, Below Knee OT 21.5”– 24” 12.5”– 13.75”
Shown: Below Knee
Closed Toe
Part # Description
Compression Stockings S – 3XL
OT=Open Toe
CT =Closed Toe
Anti-Embolism Stockings Sizing Chart
Part#
Description Calf Circum Leg Length
13104
S, Short
10” – 13”
26” – 29”
13108
S, Regular
10” – 13”
29” – 31”
13112
S, Long
10” – 13”
31” – 34”
13106
M, Short
13” – 15”
26” – 29”
13109
M, Regular
13” – 15”
29” – 31”
13113
M, Long
13” – 15”
31” – 34”
13107
L, Short
15” – 17”
26” – 29”
13111
L, Regular
15” – 17”
29” – 31”
13114
L, Long
15” – 17”
31” – 34”
15783
XL, Regular 17” – 19”
29” – 31”
15784
XL, Long
31” – 34”
Part #
216
17” – 19”
Anti-Embolism Stockings
The anti-embolism stockings provide a tailored, contoured fit with just the right amount of
gradient pressure. Available in various sizes and lengths for a customized fit, all thigh high.
• Theraputic compression to prevent leg embolism
Features
• Constructed of 80% nylon and 20% spandex
• Elastic band to control migration
• Six (6) pairs per package
Description
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Solutions
Business
FEARLESS
Joe Zerboni
Fierce competitor and Breg Fusion OA wearer
“Playing with Fusion® braces has changed my game.”
Joe Zerboni, Tennis Player
Joe Zerboni has played competitive tennis for over 50 years. An All-American from
Claremont McKenna College, Joe still plays over 100 singles matches a year, including
competitive tournaments. “Unfortunately, all this vigorous play has worn down my knee
joints,” Joe says. “Two years ago, it became painful to play.” He told his doctor, “I’m losing
that great feeling of unbridled joy I got when I played at my peak.”
Joe’s doctor prescribed Breg’s Fusion OA knee brace. Joe says the braces (he wears one on each
knee) have had a big impact on his tennis game. “With my Fusion braces, I run on the court almost as well as I
did fifteen years ago, and I charge for the ball without fear. My tennis friends are amazed.”
Helping people pursue what they love is part of Breg 360° Customer Care. Learn more at www.breg.com,
or call 800-897-BREG (2734). ©2014 Breg, Inc. All rights reserved.
Fusion is a registered trademark of Breg, Inc. No fee was paid for this testimonial.
BREG STORY
Joe Zerboni
Bu s in e s s Sol ut i ons
Business Solutions
We are Fully Committed to
Your Compliance.
Enhance Patient Care • Control Costs • Generate Ancillary Revenue
Breg is a market leader in Business Solutions. From OrthoSelect consulting services to Vision™
Patient Episode Management software, Breg gives you the tools you want and the expertise you
need to set up and maintain a successful in-office orthopedic bracing and supplies program.
Whether you’re a one-physician practice, or part of a large group practice, we can help you take
control of your practice, today.
®
Business Solutions
OrthoSelect
Consulting
Vision
Patient Episode Management
• Comprehensive practice analysis
• Web-based, with multiple mobile options
• Thorough staff training
• Program implementation
• Customizable to meet specific practice
needs
• Coding & billing expertise
• Customized product lists; vendor neutral
• Continued support from clinically
trained specialists
• Streamlined ordering, fulfillment & tracking
Centers for Medicare and Medicaid
Services (CMS) requires that Durable
Medical Equipment, Prosthetics and
Orthotics Suppliers (DMEPOS)
maintain, furnish and adhere
to specific standards executed
to provide consistent patient care. Our
Business Solutions team works with your
practice to make sure you know what
it takes to be compliant with Medicare
standards.
• Cost control through inventory visibility
• Custom reporting for planning
& budgeting
OrthoSelect Consulting Services
OrthoSelect is a consulting and training program run by our Business Solutions team. They
work with you and your staff to set up and maintain an in-office bracing and supplies program
tailored to your specific practice needs, processes and protocols. Several Business Solutions team
members have worked in clinical settings and integrated OrthoSelect into their own practices.
With their real-life experiences, they know what it takes to implement a viable, profitable program.
Program Elements
• Practice analysis
• Expense and revenue projections
• Coordinator and staff training (including billing, office and clinical staff)
• Protocol efficiency recommendations, revenue enhancement
• Customized documentation (required CMS forms, DME superbill and waiver, LMN examples, etc.)
• Coding and billing expertise
• Implementation support
• Continuing education
• Quarterly financial analysis
• Program follow-up and evaluation
• Dedicated reference guide and website
• Medicare audit preparation and support
Service Fees and Terms
Contact Business Solutions for a
customized quote.
Services for Established In-House Billing Programs
Are you ready for a Medicare audit? Even if you have an existing dispensing and billing program,
we can provide Medicare compliance support, site audits, business reviews and billing assurance
including coding and modifier analysis to help make sure you’re compliant and prepared.
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
219
70
Bu si n e s s S o l ut io n s
Vision Patient Episode Management
Vision™ Cloud Connect
Vision Cloud Connect software automates and maximizes management of in-house orthopedic
bracing and supplies inventory. Part of Business Solutions’ suite of services and tools, it helps
orthopedic practices reduce costs and improve operational efficiencies. Created by Breg
specifically for our customers, Vision software is proven through actual customer experience and
refined through direct customer feedback.
Vision is the only orthopedic practice software with “Smart Dispense.” This feature reconciles
the practice’s billing system with product dispensed for maximum inventory cost control.
Program Features
Vision software enables users to:
• Compliment EHR, create seamless patient transactions
• Paperless dispensing and patient documentation
• Compliance centric, focusing on accuracy and completeness of patient files
• Minimize product shrinkage (loss)
• Optimize stock levels
• Reconcile purchase orders online, in seconds
• Create multiple vender orders at the same time
• Enjoy paper-free ordering
• Generate detailed reports
Practice Mgmt
PULL
EMR/Billing
PUSH
Our Business Solutions team will:
• Customize your inventory site
• Train clinical and administrative staff on software application
• Provide updates and upgrades when available
• Offer continued customer support and resources
“I am very pleased with the flow of information and integration from Vision to our EHR /
PM systems. The people at Breg undersold and over delivered. They really have exceed my
expectations.”
Chris Greenman
Administrator, Tahoe Fracture
“Vision has definitely streamlined our DME process. We have alleviated a lot of paperwork,
patients sign the proof of delivery on our mobile devices and we are able to capture information
right in the exam room. Vision is truly an invaluable asset to Excelsior Orthopaedics.”
Donna Crum, ATC, LMT,
DME Coordinator, Excelsior
220
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
Custom Logo Program &
Breg Store
Fusion shown
When a CUSTOMER CALLS,
Breg rep Scott Blackwelder
DROPS
EVERYTHING.
Even his weekend tee time.
Scott Blackwelder
Breg Sales Representative, Tri-State Orthopedic Products
In addition to in-servicing staff, keeping practice managers apprised of industry
developments and meeting with athletic trainers at local schools, Scott gladly helps
customers – on the weekend.
One recent Saturday Wellington Orthopaedic & Sports Medicine asked Scott to deliver
a cold therapy unit to a patient’s home ASAP. While Scott was at the home, he addressed
a bracing issue on the spot. For Scott and all Breg reps, that level of professionalism is par for
the course.
BREG STORY
Scott Blackwelder
Bre g C u s tom Logo Program / C u st om Col or s
Breg Custom Logo Program
The Breg Custom Logo Program allows organizations to customize our products by
placing the organization’s logo on the products. Please contact Customer Care for
more details at 800-321-0607.
Polydome Logo
Heat Transfer Logo
Polydome Logo
Products Available for Custom Logo Program:
Polydome
• Custom Fusion, Solus and LPR (contact Customer Care regarding LPR polydomes and fees that
may apply) (excluding: X2K line braces)
• Custom Fusion Braces (excluding: X2K line, and LPR Braces)
• Polar Care Kodiak and Cube Cold Therapy units
Heat Transfer
• Most Soft Goods Products (Call Breg Customer Care for current availability)
College / Professional Teams:
In order to use an officially licensed logo for a College or Professional team, you must first receive
authorization in writing. This authorization can be obtained by having the team’s athletic trainer
sign Breg’s “School Licensing Approval Letter.” Please contact Breg for a letter template.
Breg Custom Color Chart
Fusion brace color and pattern options.
(Custom colors / patterns and labeling also available)
Forest
Royal
Red
Orange
Yellow
Navy
Charcoal
Sage
Mauve
Pink
Note: Colors represented above have been recreated to match brace colors as closely as possible. The actual brace color may vary. Color / Pattern option available on custom
Fusion braces only. Contact your local sales representative for pricing and additional color / pattern options.
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
223 70
Ble dsoe C us to m Co lo rs
Bledsoe Color Chart
Custom color Bledsoe braces are available with one or two color options. If you would like to
order a different color for the thigh cuff and tibial cuff, specify each color code on the custom
brace order form on the shell color number line, separated by a comma.
Magnesium Colors
Z-12 / Z-12 D / Z-12 Adj OA / Z-12 OA / 20.50
Axiom / Axiom-D / Axiom Adj OA / Axiom OA / Primas-D
Ultramarine Blue
Steel Blue
Traffic Blue
Pastel Blue
Traffic Red
Wine Red
Light Pink
Grass Green
Yellow Green
Water Blue
Sahara Gold
Signal Yellow
Pure Orange
Telemagenta
Moss Green
Jet Black
Black
Metallic
Silver
Metallic
Traffic White
Aluminum Colors
69
224
Axiom / Axiom-D / Axiom OA / Axiom Adj OA / Primas-D
DUO / Legacy Thruster / Thruster / Aligner / Z-13 / Jet
Wine Red
Brown Red
Traffic Red
Traffic Red
Metallic
Light Pink
Telemagenta
Pure Orange
Candy Purple
Cobalt Blue
Steel Blue
Stardust Blue
Metallic
Traffic Blue
Sky Blue
Pastel Blue
Moss Green
Moss Green
Metallic
Grass Green
Water Blue
Sahara Gold
Signal Yellow
Traffic White
Jet Black
Black Metallic
Traffic Gray
Metallic
Silver Metallic
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
B reg St ore
Breg Store is your online resource.
Order. Manage. Track.
BregStore enables users to order, manage, and track Breg products online with ease. This userfriendly website allows you to enjoy the same great service, pricing, and delivery you’ve come to
expect from Breg, but with the added convenience of 24 / 7 order placement, e-mail confirmations,
and real-time shipment tracking.
BregStore allows you to:
• View detailed information on all Breg products in an online catalog
• Place orders online anytime
• Save frequently ordered products for quick and easy reorder
• Receive immediate e-mail confirmation upon order placement
• Track order and shipping data
• View account information and order history
For more information, please visit www.breg.com or call 800-321-0607.
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
225 70
Ble dsoe S hip p ing / Wa rra nty Inf o r mat ion
CUSTOMER CARE
Bledsoe Customer Care representatives are available Monday through Friday, 7AM to 6PM CST.
Domestic
Phone 888-253-3763
888-BLEDSOE
Fax 972-660-5495
International
Phone 972-522-7484 Fax 972-660-5495
Canada Fax 855-397-4159
SHIPPING WITHIN THE UNITED STATES:
Order Type:
Order Received:
Prefabricated products shipping to domestic destinations
Prior to 4PM Central Time for same day shipping
Custom knee braces ship within 24 hours of order
Prior to 2PM Central Time
Custom logo products ship within 48 hours
Prior to 2PM Central time
PRODUCT WARRANTY
Cold Therapy (units and pads)
6 months
Prefabricated Sports and OA Braces, Frames and mechanisms
1 year
Prefabricated Sports and OA Braces, Soft goods, straps and clips
6 months
Custom Braces Including Pads & Straps, Rigid components and mechanisms
Lifetime Warranty
Custom Braces Including Pads & Straps, Soft goods, straps and clips
6 months
Walker Boots, Frames and mechanisms
1 year
Walker Boots, Soft goods, straps and clips
6 months
Spine Braces, Rigid Components and mechanisms
1 year
Spine Braces, Soft Goods, straps and clips
6 months
Bledsoe Warranty / Return Policy
Bledsoe products are warranted for manufacturing or material defects. Full credit
and shipping costs will be refunded to the customer for those returned products
verified as defective by Quality Assurance. Normal and abnormal wear and tear
are not considered a valid defect.
Products with custom logos are returnable for manufacturing and material
defects only.
Bledsoe will accept non-defective product returns in a re-sellable condition with
the original packaging for up to 180 days from date of purchase and will be
subject to a 15% restocking after the initial 30 days.
226
To order:
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Bre g S h ippin g / Warran ty Infor ma t i on
TO OUR CUSTOMER
At Breg, we are committed to total customer care.  Each of our friendly Customer Care Representatives receives
extensive training on all Breg products and practices, ensuring that you always get the best service possible. From
our diverse line of medical devices to our exceptional staff, we strive to exceed your expectations.
Customer Care
Customer Care Representatives are available Monday through Friday, 6AM to 5PM, Pacific Time.
Phone 800-321-0607 800-897-Breg (2734) International +1-760-795-5440 • Fax 800-329-2734 800-959-Breg (2734)
Your satisfaction is guaranteed
If, at any time, you are not completely satisfied with a Breg product within the designated warranty period, please
contact our Customer Care Department, and give us the opportunity to make it right.
Shipping
We offer all levels of delivery service from ground to overnight. To keep transit times and shipping costs to a
minimum, we currently ship our products from two warehouses (one in California and one in Indiana). Here are the
ordering cut-off times for each location:
SHIPPING FROM CALIFORNIA FOR ACCOUNTS IN THE WESTERN PART OF THE UNITED STATES:
Order Type:Order Received:
Orders shipping FedEx (Preferred Shipper) or UPS Ground to domestic destinations
Prior to 4PM Pacific Time for same day shipping
Orders shipping FedEx or UPS Next Day to domestic destinations
Prior to 3PM Pacific Time for same day shipping
Custom bracing orders will ship within 24 hours after receipt of order
Prior to 4PM Pacific Time
Custom braces with standard colors / patterns will ship within 24 hours
Braces with custom color / pattern will ship within 72 hours
Prior to 4PM Pacific Time
Products with custom logos will ship within 48 hours
SHIPPING FROM INDIANA FOR ACCOUNTS IN THE MIDWEST AND EASTERN PART OF THE UNITED STATES:
Order Type:Order Received:
Orders shipping FedEx to domestic destinations
Prior to 2PM Pacific Time will ship same day
Orders shipping UPS Ground to domestic destinations Prior to 1PM Pacific Time will ship same day
Custom bracing, braces (standard or color) and Special Product Requests
are not available from our Indiana facility at this time
Products with custom logos will ship within 48 hours
PRODUCT WARRANTY
Polar Care Products
6 months
Fusion, Solus and X2K Prefabricated 1 year
Fusion, Solus and X2K Custom Frames
5 years
Fusion, Solus and X2K Straps / Frame Pads
6 months
Freestyle OA (Hinge)
1 year
Freestyle OA (Sleeve)
6 months
Post-Op Bracing 3 months
FreeRunner
6 months
FreeSupport
6 months
Soft Goods (Knee, Clavicle / Cervical)
6 months
Functional Elbow
1 year
Upper Extremity (Shoulder, Wrist, Back Supports)
3 months
Aspen Spine Braces
1 year
Ultra Ankle
1 year
Ankle Brace Lock, Kool Air Stirrup, Lace Up Ankle
Adjustable Range of Motion
3 months
Walker Boots
3 months
Polar Care
6 months
Home Therapy Kits
6 months
6 months
Warranty / Return Policy
Breg products are warranted for manufacturing or
materials defects. Please contact Customer Care if you
have questions regarding the warranty. Before returning a
product, please contact our Customer Care Department
at 800-321-0607 or 800-897-Breg (2734) for a return
authorization number.
Note: Breg warrants its products for manufacturing or
material defects. Breg does not warrant products for
cosmetic deficiencies caused by regular use. Custom
products and products with custom logos are not
returnable. Non-warranty returns will be accepted within
120 days from date of purchase and will be subject to a
15% restocking fee.
Note: Product with custom logos are returnable for
manufacturing and material defects, however are not
returnable due to overstock reasons.
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607
227
Bre g E d uca t i o n
BIOSKILLS LAB & MEDICAL EDUCATION CENTER
Breg’s BioSkills Lab and Medical Education Center offer state-ofthe-art lab and classroom facilities to host hands-on learning events
for you and your colleagues. With eight lab stations available,
visiting surgeons are able to work on knee, shoulder, ankle and foot
specimens in a spacious lab setting. From total joint replacements
to arthroscopic procedures and basic dissections, the BioSkills Lab
can host a variety of procedures. Outside of the lab, visitors will find
the Medical Education Center, a smart classroom equipped with
video conferencing and live video feed capabilities to accommodate
remote attendees.
Take a Virtual Tour at www.breg.com/lab.
For more information, contact Breg’s Education Manager at [email protected]. APPLICATION VIDEOS AT YOUR FINGERTIPS
Patients just scan the QR code with a Smartphone to
view a video about the Breg product you prescribed.
The videos show how to apply and care for the product,
and also include tips and troubleshooting. Patients can
also view the videos online by entering the QR code URL
directly into an Internet browser.
Scan the code.
Below we have included a few samples to scan for
quick access or go to www.breg.com/qrcodes for a
complete list.
View the video.
Fusion® Knee
Bracing
Freestyle™ OA
Knee Bracing
Fusion OA Plus
Knee Bracing
T Scope®
Premier
T Scope®
Hip
Breg.com/fkb
Breg.com/foa
Breg.com/fnoa
Breg.com/ts
Breg.com/hip
Ultra CTS™
Ankle Brace
FreeRunner™
Knee Bracing
SlingShot® 3
Shoulder Bracing
Polar Care® Kodiak®
Cold Therapy
Horizon
Spine Bracing
Breg.com/fr
Breg.com/SS3
Breg.com/pck
Breg.com/hsb
Breg.com/ctsvideo
228
breg.com/fr
To order: Breg (800) 321-0607 |
Bledsoe (888) 253-3763
Part Nu mbe r C onv er s i on
TRANSITIONING PRODUCT PART NUMBER TABLE EXPLANATION
In 2013, Breg acquired Biomet’s Bracing Division and added a wide variety of new products to our customers. As we continue through the integration
process and use current product inventory, there will be changes to some product part numbers as products are transitioned. In order to keep ordering
products as easy as possible, please use this chart to track potential changes to product numbers. This chart is provided as a reference only, as Breg
Customer Service is able to place orders with Biomet numbers until further notice. Please note as these parts are transitioned, you may receive products
with different part numbers on the label.
Product Name
Page No.
Current Part Number
ABDOMINAL BINDER 8” (XS - XXL)
214
08080X
Future Part Number(s)
100098-0X0
ABDOMINAL BINDER 9” (S - XXL)
214
08090X
100099-020 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60
ABDOMINAL BINDER 10” (S - XXXXL)
214
081003 / 04 / 05 / 06 / 09 / 53 / 55
100095-020 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60 / 70 / 80
ABDOMINAL BINDER 12” (Universal)
214
084600
100096-000
AMBULITE ARM SLING (PED - XL)
158
30150X
100108-001 / 10 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50
BACK BOOSTER (XS - XXL)
214
01260X
100203-010 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60
KNEE SLEEVE OPEN PATELLA (XS - XXL)
75
13061X
100177-010 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60
HORSESHOE PADS 1/4” (12-PACK)
75
131000
100374-000
COOL SPORT HINGE (XS - XXXL)
59
106744X
100180-010 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60 / 70
COOL SPORT ELITE (XS - XXXL)
59
106745X
100179-010 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60 / 70
COOL SPORT ELITE WRAP (XS - XXXL)
59
106746X
100125-010 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60 / 70
CERVICAL COLLAR MED. DENSITY (PED. - XXL)
144
070301 / 02 / 03 / 04 / 05 / 06 / 09
100141-005 / 10 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60
PERFORMANCE LATERAL SUPPORT (XS - XXL)
68
13271X
100183-010 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60
KNEE SUPPORT UNIV HORSESHOE
77
133000
100178-000
ELBOW SLEEVE W/COMP STRAP (XS - XXL)
168
13430X
102738-010 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60
CURTIS SHOULDER SLEEVE - RIGHT (S - XXL)
159
13721X
100373-220 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60
CURTIS SHOULDER SLEEVE - LEFT (S - XXL)
159
13722X
100373-120 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60
CURTIS SHOULDER CUFF - FULL ROM - RIGHT (S - XXL)
159
13723X
100369-220 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60
CURTIS SHOULDER CUFF - FULL ROM - LEFT (S - XXL)
159
13724X
100369-120 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60
HEELBO PROTECTOR (S - XXL)
215
14629X
100272-020 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60
OVERDOOR CERVICAL TRACTION KIT
212
151400
100187-000
PLATINUM EPICONDYLITIS STRAP - S/M / L/XL
169
201803 / 201805
100363-030 / 100363-050
KODEL KNEE SLING (PED. - XL)
213
26230X
102851-001 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50
AMBULITE VELPEAU IMMOBILIZER (S - XL)
156
33070X
100193-020 / 30 / 40 / 50
SURGICAL BINDER 9”
214
088800
101339-000
RIB BELT MALE / FEMALE 6”
213
085010 / 085020
100209-000 / 100205-000
STACK FINGER SPLINT KIT
194
193600
100228-000
STACK FINGER SPLINT - SIZES 1 - 8
194
193610 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 55 / 60 / 70
100220-000 / 21 / 22 / 23 / 24 / 25 / 26 / 27
FINGER SPLINT ADJUSTABLE
193
194202
100148-010
PERFORMANCE KNIT ACHILLES - RIGHT (S - XL)
104
17121X
100219-210 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50
PERFORMANCE KNIT ACHILLES - LEFT (S - XL)
104
17122X
100219-110 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50
AMBULITE ELBOW QUICK SPLINT (PED. - XL)
199
202302 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6
100192-010 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50
UNIVERSAL ARM ELEVATOR
212
302700
102427-000
BORRERO ARM ELEVATOR SLING
212
313100
100204-000
BILATERAL WRIST SUPPORT 8” (S - XXL)
177
20470X
102837-020 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60
ELASTIC WRIST SUPPORT - RIGHT (XS - XL)
176
20441X
100269-210 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50
ELASTIC WRIST SUPPORT - LEFT (XS - XL)
176
20442X
100269-110 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50
UNI-VERSATIL WRIST BAND
176
204500
100365-000
UNI-VERSATIL WRIST BAND W/THUMB LOOP
179
204510
100366-000
WRIST BAND BLACK W/THUMB LOOP
176
206630
102208-000
VINYL WRIST SPLINT 7” W/THUMB - RIGHT (XS - XL)
173
214512 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6
100154-220 / 30 / 40 / 50
VINYL WRIST SPLINT 7” W/THUMB - LEFT (XS - XL)
173
214522 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6
100154-120 / 30 / 40 / 50
VINYL WRIST SPLINT 10.5” W/THUMB - RIGHT (XS - XL)
173
214613 / 4 / 5 / 6
100151-220 / 230 / 240 / 250
VINYL WRIST SPLINT 10.5” W/THUMB - LEFT (XS - XL)
173
214623 / 4 / 5 / 6
100151-120 / 130 / 140 / 150
WRIST GUARD BLACK - RIGHT (XS - XXL)
175
20391X
100261-210 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60
WRIST GUARD BLACK - LEFT (XS - XXL)
175
20392X
100261-110 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60
CLASSIC WRIST SUPPORT - RIGHT (XS - XXL)
177
20401X
100260-210 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60
CLASSIC WRIST SUPPORT - LEFT (XS - XXL)
177
20402X
100260-110 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50 / 60
ELASTO-FIT WRIST SUPPORT - RIGHT (PED. - XL)
177
20411X
102831-201 / 10 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50
ELASTO-FIT WRIST SUPPORT - LEFT (PED. - XL)
177
20412X
102831-101 / 10 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 50
X = See sizing chart on product page
229
Notes
Not es
I nde x
CC
O LOD LTD
HER
T AHP YE
RAPY
5
Polar Care® Kodiak®7
Polar Care Kodiak Battery Pack (optional)
7
Intelli-Flo® Pads
8
Polar Care Cube™
9
Polar Care Glacier™
10
Polar Care Cub 11
WrapOn Polar Pads
12
Polar Pads
13
Polar Care Packs
14
Z-13 Knee Brace 35
Airmesh® and Neoprene
57
X2K® Knee Brace
36
Hinged Knee Brace 58
X2K High Performance Knee Brace (HP)
36
Cool Sport Elite
59
X2K Women’s Knee Brace
36
Cool Sport Hinged Knee Brace
59
Compact X2K Knee Brace
37
Hinged Knee Brace
60
X2K-PTO Knee Brace
37
Hinged Knee Open Back
60
NZONE™37
Select Hinged Knee Brace
61
Undersleeve38
Select Hinged Knee FC
61
Patellofemoral Bracing
63
Fusion XT Slide Guide
39
39
Brace Cover
39
Custom Brace Measuring System
40
Bledsoe Measuring Kit
40
Brace Bags
40
Osteoarthritis Bracing
41
18
Fusion OA Plus Knee Brace Innovation
42
PTO High Performance Knee Brace
66
Extender Plus and Extender
19
43
Crossover PT 67
Recover Knee Brace
20
Fusion Women’s OA Plus Knee Brace
43
Hinged LPS
67
Original Knee
21
Solus® Plus Knee Brace
44
Lateral Patella Stabilizer 67
Revolution 3 21
Fusion XT OA Plus
44
Lateral Stabilizer with Hinge Soft
Post-Op Knee Brace
22
Fusion Lateral OA Plus Knee Brace
45
Knee Brace
68
Post-Op Lite Knee Brace
22
45
Lateral Stabilizer Soft Knee Brace
68
Post-Op Rehab Knee Brace
23
Dynamic OA
46
68
23
DUO 46
69
Merit OR 24
Z-12 Adjustable OA 47
Adjustable Donut Soft Knee Brace
69
EPO Post-Op Knee Brace
24
Z-12 OA 47
Select Lateral Patella Stabilizer 70
EPO Lite Post-Op Knee Brace
24
Axiom Adjustable OA 48
Select Reinforced Patella Stabilizer 70
25
Axiom OA 48
Reinforced Patella Stabilizer 70
Post-Op with Shells Knee Brace
25
Thruster RLF 49
Patella Stabilizer Soft Knee Brace
71
Uni-Versatil Knee Immobilizer
26
Legacy Thruster 49
71
Tri-Panel Knee Immobilizer
26
OA Impulse Push / Pull 50
Tendon Strap 71
26
X2K-OA Knee Brace
50
PF Unloader
72
Three Panel Knee Immobilizer 27
X2K CounterForce Knee Brace
51
72
Single Panel Knee Immobilizer 27
Compact X2K CounterForce Knee Brace
51
Knee Support
72
X2K-OA Women’s Knee Brace
52
Padded Knee Support
73
Compact X2K-OA Knee Brace
52
KNEE BRACING
Post-Op Knee Bracing
17
T Scope® Premier Post-Op Knee Brace
17
G3 18
G3 XL Extended Quick-Fit Post-Op Knee Brace
Quick-Fit EPO Post-Op Knee Brace
Knee Ligament Bracing
29
Fusion® Technology
30
Fusion Knee Brace
31
Fusion Women’s Knee Brace
31
TriTech™54
Fusion XT Knee Brace
32
Crossover
55
LPR® Brace
32
Crossover FT
55
Bledsoe Dynamic Bracing Technology 33
Crossover Pull-On
55
Z-12D Knee Brace 34
Crossover FT
55
Axiom D Knee Brace 34
Crossover ROM
55
Primas D Knee Brace 34
RoadRunner™ Knee Brace
56
Z-12 Knee Brace 35
ShortRunner™ Knee Brace
56
35
Economy Hinged Knee Brace
57
Axiom Knee Brace ™
Soft Knee Bracing
53
FreeRunner™ Knee Brace
64
FreeSport™ Knee Brace
64
20.50 Design 65
20.50 Patellofemoral 65
PTO Soft Knee Brace (Patellar Tracking
Orthosis)66
73
Patella Donut
73
Padded Sleeve
74
Knee Support
74
Select Patella Donut
74
Select Knee Support
74
Knee Sleeve Open Patella
75
Knee Support Universal Horseshoe
75
Thigh Support
75
.25” Horseshoe Pads (12-pack)
75
Ind ex
HIP BRACING
Axiom Ankle
101
Horizon 637 LSO
118
Ultimate Ankle Brace
101
Horizon 456 TLSO 118
Ankle Stirrup Plus & Ankle Stirrup
102
Evergreen™ TLSO
119
Post-Op Hip Bracing
77
T Scope Post-Op Hip Brace
79
102
Evergreen LSO 119
Philippon Hip
80
Ankle Sprain Kit
102
Evergreen LSO LoPro
120
Centron Hip™
81
KoolAir Ankle with Valve
103
Evergreen Lumbar 120
81
KoolAir Ankle Stirrup
103
Evergreen Lumbar Lite 121
M-Brace103
Evergreen SI Belt 121
Performance Knit Ankle
104
Summit™ 631
122
Performance Knit Ankle Tall
104
Summit 637 122
104
Summit 456
123
®
Simple Pelvic
WALKER / ANKLE / FOOT BRACING
Walking Boots
83
Walking Boot Design
85
105
Vista 627 Lumbar
124
Genesis Full Shell Walker 86
Pullover Nylon Anklet
105
Vista 631 LSO LoPro 124
ProGait Plus 86
Elastic Ankle Support
105
Vista 637 LSO
125
ProGait™ 86
106
Vista 639
125
ProGait Lift
87
106
Vista 464 TLSO 125
Flatform Plus / Flatform 87
Dorsal Night Splint
106
QuikDraw™ PRO 126
J Walker Plus / J Walker 88
Padded Night Splint
107
QuikDraw RAP 126
AdjustaFit88
Night Splint
107
Contour™ Complete 127
Achilles Boot
89
PFS Strap
107
Contour TLSO Complete 127
Hi Top / Lo Top 89
107
Aspen® LSO 128
Conformer 90
Aspen LSO LoPro 128
Charcot Conformer 90
Aspen TLSO 129
Bunion Boot 90
CASH Orthosis 129
Vectra® Air Basic Walker Boot
91
Back Booster
130
Vectra Basic Walker Boot
91
Back Support with Side Pulls
130
Vectra Lite Walker Boot
92
Basic Lumbar Support
130
Shell Air Ankle Walker Boot
92
Back Support with Pocket
131
131
Clavicle Support
131
Clavicle Support
131
Controlled Range of Motion Walker Boot
(CROM)93
Integrity Fracture Walker Boot Air
93
Integrity Fracture Walker Boot
94
Pin Cam Walker Boot
95
Fixed Ankle Walker Boot
95
Mini Walker (Nylon)
96
96
97
Achilles Wedge
97
Ankle Bracing
98
Ultra Zoom® Ankle Brace
98
Ultra High-5® Ankle Brace
Foot Supports
108
108
Post-Op Shoe Deluxe
108
Post-Op Shoe Adjustable Heel
108
Darco MedSurg™ Post-Op Shoe
109
Post-Op Shoe
109
Closed Toe Cast Boot
110
Cast Boot Flexible Sole 110
Cast Boot 111
Cast Shoe 111
Bunion Splint
112
Budin Splint
112
Adjustable Heel Lifts 112
Anti-Shox® Conform Orthotics
112
Viscoelastic Insoles
113
Silicone Heel Cups
113
Ankle Foot Orthosis
®
OrthoLux 132
®
VertaLux®133
Ninja134
Pinnacle™135
Extender136
Ace Brace
137
113
Upper Spine
137
Metatarsal Pads 3/16”
114
Vista Cervical Collar 138
Metatarsal Pad
114
Vista TX 138
98
Heel Pads
114
Vista MultiPost Collar 139
Ultra CTS™ Ankle Brace
98
Longitudinal Metatarsal Arch Pad
114
Vista CTO 139
Lace Up Ankle Brace
99
Vista CTO4 140
Lace Up Ankle Brace with Tibia Strap
99
Aspen Cervical Collar 140
Lace Up Ankle Brace with Stays
99
141
SPINE BRACING
®
100
Lower Spine
117
Aspen Pediatric Collar Aspen Sierra™ Universal Collar 141
Hinged Wraptor
100
Horizon™ 627 Lumbar 117
Aspen CTO 142
100
Horizon 631 LSO
117
143
I nde x
143
Basic Elbow 167
Wee ROM™ Post-Op
184
Cervical Collar Serpentine
144
Performance Knit Elbow
168
Pediatric Three Panel Knee immobilizer
184
144
Neoprene Elbow Sleeve with
SHOULDER BRACING
ARC 2.0 147
ARC 2.0 With Pillow 148
148
149
SlingShot Neutral Shoulder Brace
149
Original ARC With Pillow
150
Atlas Universal Shoulder Brace
150
Atlas Minor Shoulder Brace
151
Neutral Wedge Shoulder Brace
151
Basic Abduction Sling
152
Kool Sling and Kool Sling Immobilizer
152
Shoulder Abduction Pillow
152
153
Airplane Abduction Sling 153
Deluxe Straight Shoulder Immobilizer
154
Straight Shoulder Immobilizer
154
155
155
Sling and Swathe Immobilizer 155
156
Clinic Shoulder Immobilizer
156
156
157
Classic Arm Sling
157
Clinic Arm Sling 157
Ambulite Arm Sling
158
Universal Arm Sling 158
Shoulder Stabilizer
159
Curtis Shoulder Cuff - Full ROM
159
Curtis Shoulder Sleeve
159
®
®
ELBOW / WRIST BRACING
Pediatric Single Panel Knee Immobilizer 184
Compression Strap 168
Wee Bow™ Post-Op
185
Neoprene Elbow Sleeve
168
Pediatric Padded Elbow Sleeve
185
Platinum Elbow Strap 169
Pediatric Sling 2
185
169
Pediatric Apollo Universal Wrist Brace
186
169
Elasto-fit Wrist 186
Tennis Elbow Strap
170
186
Tendon Strap 170
Mini Walker (Nylon)
187
Universal Tennis Elbow Support 170
187
Apollo Universal Wrist Brace 8” & 10”
171
187
171
Pediatric Cast Boot
188
Universal Wrist Lacer 171
Pediatric Post-Op Shoe
188
Wrist Brace
172
188
Wrist Lacer 8” & 10” 172
Post-Op Shoe Deluxe
188
Universal Thumb Lacer 172
Aspen Pediatric Collar 189
Vinyl Wrist Splint 7” & 10.5”
173
Aspen CTO 189
Low Profile Wrist Support 7” & 9”
173
Pavlick Harness
190
Wrist Pro 8” & 10”
173
190
Wrist Brace / Wrist Brace with
Thumb Spica 174
Wrist Lacer / Wrist Lacer with
Thumb Spica 174
Performance Knit Wrist
175
CMC Thumb Guard
175
Wrist Guard
175
Elastic Wrist Support
176
Uni-Versatil™ Wrist Splint 7” & 10.5”
176
Deluxe Canvas Cockup Splint 8” & 10”
176
Classic Wrist Support
177
Elasto-Fit Wrist 177
Bilateral Wrist Support – 8”
177
Economy Wrist Splint 7” & 10.5”
178
Universal Wrist / Forearm Support 178
178
179
Wrist Band Black with Thumb Loop
179
T Scope® Elbow Premier Brace
163
Wrist Guard
179
T Scope Elbow Accessory
163
Cryo Pad Universal
179
Telescoping Elbow
164
Premier Thumb Splint with Stays
180
Extender Arm Brace
164
Thumbster180
T-Chek
165
180
165
Trigger and Keeper’s Thumb Support 180
Compact X2K® Elbow Brace
166
HEX Elbow Brace
166
Hinged Elbow 167
Padded Sleeve 167
P E D I AT R I C S B R A C I N G
SPLINTS & FRACTURE MANAGEMENT
Finger Splint Adjustable
193
4 Prong Finger Splint Foam
193
Alumafoam Finger Splint 193
Baseball Finger Splint Foam 193
Fold Over Finger Splint 193
Stack Finger Splint
194
Gutter Splint with Foam
194
194
Colles Splint Vinyl Coated 195
Arm Splint Vinyl Coated Padded 195
“Cruiser” Hip Abduction Splint 195
Metal Post Tib / Fib Splint
196
Carboblast® Rigid Insert
196
Synthocast Casting Tape
197
Thumb Spica Fracture Brace
197
Lo Pro Humeral Fracture Brace
198
Humeral Fracture Brace
198
Over the Shoulder Humeral Fracture
198
Ambulite Elbow Quick Splint
199
Hanging Cast Sling
199
199
Seal-Tight Adult Hand
200
Seal-Tight Adult Arm
200
Seal-Tight Adult Leg
201
JET™183
Seal-Tight Adult Foot / Ankle
201
Padded Sleeve
201
183
Ind ex
Aquashield Half Arm
202
Red Tubing,10-Pack
211
Pavlick Harness
215
Aquashield Full Arm
202
Green Tubing,10-Pack
211
Compression Stockings
216
Aquashield Half Leg
203
Blue Tubing,10-Pack
211
216
Aquashield Full Leg
203
Rope & Pulley,10-Pack
211
Collapsible Bar,10-Pack
211
L-Handle,10-Pack211
CRUTCHES, CANES & WALKERS
207
Push Button Aluminum Cane
207
Folding Walker 207
Bariatric Walker 208
HOME THERAPY & MISC.
BUSINESS SOLUTIONS
Business Solutions
219
Vision Patient Episode Management
220
Overdoor Cervical Traction Kit
212
212
212
Kodel Knee Sling
213
Rib Belt 6” Universal
213
Breg Custom Logo Program
223
Velofoam Rib Belt
213
Bledsoe Color Chart
224
225
CUSTOM LOGO / BREG STORE
Abdominal Binder 214
Breg Store
Shoulder Therapy Kit
211
214
Bledsoe Shipping / Warranty Information 226
Knee Therapy Kit
211
Back Booster
214
Breg Shipping / Warranty Information
227
Ankle Therapy Kit
211
Heelbo Protector
215
Breg Education
228
Part Number Conversion
229
®
D Y N A M I C A L LY
DIFFERENT
More than 30 years ago, Bledsoe Braces founder Gary Bledsoe set out to help people by providing products
that challenged the industry’s status quo. And in doing so, he helped change the landscape of sports medicine
and orthopedic care as we know it.
In 1977, standard operating procedure called for ACL patients to be placed in casts as part of their postop recovery. Not only are casts cumbersome to apply, but they’re constructed to restrict movement, causing
patients to re-learn how to use their muscles all over again once the cast is eventually removed.
“I was working as an orthopedic sales specialist, and one day as a nurse was applying a cast to one of her
patients, she looked to me and said: ‘Bledsoe, you’re an engineer. Why don’t you come up with something
that you can strap on the leg?’” With a background in mechanical engineering, and firsthand experience with
his own knee surgeries, Gary knew that there had to be a better way to help patients recover.
In 1979 he created his first post-op brace and introduced dynamic technology: a whole new approach to
orthopedic bracing. “The brace was designed to provide support, yet it could be gradually adjusted as time
goes on so that the patient could begin to slowly reuse, strengthen their muscles,” said Gary.
“Help people and do it
right — it’s that simple.”
Gary Bledsoe, Founder, Bledsoe Braces
MADE LIKE
NO OTHER
It’s rare to find self-built, ecosystem-like companies where virtually all of the product parts and components
are manufactured by its own people, on its own equipment, from tools and molds made in-house. Amazingly
enough, that’s exactly the case at Bledsoe Braces. Together, Gary and his five brothers built many of the
machines and processes that still produce much of the Bledsoe Brace products today.
The capabilities range from simple cutting and sewing through laser metal cutting, ultrasonic welding, plastic
vacuum forming, injection molding, compression molding of foam, metal stamping, automatic machining, as
well as complicated tool and die machining. “There’s not one piece of equipment that I can’t partially operate
myself,” he said.
From patient recovery efforts, to making life a little easier for health care providers, to the level of craftsmanship
that goes into each and every product, many would agree that Gary Bledsoe has succeeded in what he set out
to accomplish so many years ago.
And now with the integration of Bledsoe and Breg product offerings, patients and health care providers will
continue to benefit from exceptionally designed products and innovative orthopedic solutions.
Developing and manufacturing
industry-leading bracing products for
more than 30 years. These products
have reached patients spanning
six continents and 24 time zones.
Manufactures and distributes products
designed to improve and promote the
recovery phase of post-operative treatment,
including cold therapy and deep vein
thrombosis products.
Provides orthopedic providers an
extensive network of local billing
services across the U.S.
015
2885 Loker Ave. East, Carlsbad, CA 92010
Breg: (800) 897.2734 | (800) 897.BREG
Bledsoe: (888) 253.3763 | (888) BLEDSOE
www.breg.com
©2015 Breg, Inc. All rights reserved. AW-1.08600 Rev Y 0115
Ultra Zoom, High-5 and Ultra CTS are registered trademarks, and Performathane and PerformaFit are trademarks of Ultra Athlete.
Horizon, Summit, Contour, Evergreen, MemoryFlex, Vista MultiPost and Sierra Universal Collar are trademarks, and Vista is a registered trademark of Aspen Medical Products.
All other trademarks and registered trademarks are owned by Breg, Inc.

Moving You Forward

Transcription

Similar documents

KoolAir Ankle w/ Valve

Your Hospital Stay - Maxx Medical, Pvt. Ltd.

Distal Femoral and Proximal Tibial Microfracture

Jewett Orthopaedic Clinic There are two types of cartilage in the

Training Program for the Tibialis Posterior Muscle

Knee Brace Knee Brace

Article Title: The Medals of Wounded Knee

PDF

9840 Knuckle Duster